Mariner Radar Equipment Instruction Manual

JMA'993&SA/9932-SA
JMA.992&MKAil9XA
JMA-992&6XA/9XA
]I'ARINERADAR
EQUIPMENT
INSTRUCTION
MANUAL
...-.......*.
9445O[3
lMO1119.
@ flryr&adineo.,lH.
voltsare to be appliedto the electronic
Highvoltagesfrom hundredsvoltsto tensof thousands
equipmentsuchradioand radardevices.Youdo notfaceany dangerduringnormaloperation,
inspectionand adjustmentof their internal
caresare requiredfor maintenance,
but sufJicient
components. check-upand adjustmentof the inside of the equipmentare
(Maintenance,
prohibited
exceptby maintenance
specialists.
)
Highvoltageso{ tens of thousandsvolts are so dangerousas to bring an instantaneousdeath
from electricshock,but even voltagesof hundredvolts may sometimeslead to a death from
electricshock.To prevenlsuchan accident,makeit a ruleto turnoffthe powerswitch,discharge
capacitorswith a wire surelyearthedon an end and makesure that internalpartsare no longer
chargedbeforeyou touchany parb insidethesedevices.At the time,wearingdry cottongloves
ensuresyou furtherto preventsuch danger.lt is also a necessarycautionto put one of your
handsin the pocketand notto useyourbothhandsat the sametime.
It is also importantto selecla stablefootholdalwayslo preventadditionalinjuriesonceyou were
shockedby electricity.lf you were injuredfrom electricshock,disinfectthe burn sufiicientlyand
get it takencareof promPtly.
When finding a victim of electric shock, tum off the power source and earth the circuit
lf it is impossibleto turn off the circuit,move the victimaway promptlyusing
immediately.
insulatorssuchas dry wood plateand clothwithouttouchingthe victimdirectly.
In caseof electricshock,breathingmay stopsuddenlyif cunentflowslo the respirationcenterin
respiration
thebrain.lf theshockis notso strong,artificial Whenshocked
mayrecoverbreathing.
the victimwill cometo lookverybadwithweakpulseor withoulbeating,resultingin
by electricity,
andrigidity.
unconsciousness
-t-
* First-aid
treatments
As far as the victimof electricshockis not in dangerouscondition,do not movehimand practice

artificialrespiration Oncestarted,it shouldbe continued
on him immediately. rhythmically"
as resultof the accident,but rescuermay also get an

(1) Do not touchthe victimconfugedly
electricshock.
(2) Turnoff the powersourcecalmlyand movethe victimawayquietlyfromthe electricline.
(3) Calla physician

or ambulance or ask someoneto calla doctor.
immediately
(4) Laythe victimon his backand loosenhis necktie,clothes,belt,etc.
thevictim'spulse
(5) a .Examine
b.Examinehis heartbeatbringingyourearcloseto his heart.
his breathingbringingthe backof yourhandor yourfacecloseto hisface.
c .Examine
d .Checkthe sizeof the pupilsof his eyes.
(6) Openthe victim'smouthandtakeout artificialteeth,cigaretteor chewinggum if any.Keep

his mouthopen,stretchhistongueand inserta towelor the likein his mouthto preventthe
(lf it is hardto open his mouthdue to set teeth,open it with a
tonguefrom suffocating.
screwdriverand inserta towelin this mouth.)
inside.
(7) Then,wipehis mouthso thatfoamingmucusdoesnotaccumulate
- -
*'When pulseis beatingbutbreathing
hasstopped
* Mouth-to-mouth
respiration
( 1 ) Tilt the victim'sheadbackas fat as this facelooksback.(A pillowmay be insertedhis neck.)
(2) Pushhisjaw upwardto openhis throatwide(to spreadhisairway).
(3) Pinchthe victim'snostrilsand takea deepbreath,blockhis mouthcompletelywithyoursand
blowintohis mouthstrongly.Takea deepbreathagainand blowinto his mouth.Continue
this 10 to 15 timesa minute(blockinghis nostrils).
(4) Carefulty watch that he has recovered his natural breathing and practicing artificial
respiration.
to openthe victim'smouth,inserta rubberor vinyltubeintoone of his nostrils
(5) lf it is difficutt
and blowintoit blockingthe othernostrilandhis mouthcompletely.
he may try to standup suddenly,but let him lie
(6) Whenthe victimrecoversconsciousness,
calmlyand servehim with a cup of hot cofieeor tea and keephimwarmand quiet.(Never
givehimalcoholicdrinks.)
by raisinghead
respiration
Methodof mouth-to-mouth
(1) Raisethe victim'shead.Support
his forehead with one of your
hand and his neck with the other
hand.-O
When you tilt his head backward,
the victim, in most cases, opens
his mouth to the air. This makes
mouth-to-mouthrespirationeasy.
(2) Cover his mouth as widely as

possible with yours and press
your cheekagainsthis nose*@
Or, pinch his nostrils with your
fingers to prevent air from
leaking.---@
(3) Blow into hi.

Blowing into mouth until his
breastswells.Blowinto his mouth
Fig.1 Mouth-to-mouthrespiration as quicklyas possiblefor the first
10 times.
-iii-
*When bothpulseand breathing
havestopped
r. Cardiacmassage
When no pulsehas come not to be felt, his pupilsare open and no heartbeatis heard,
cardiacarrestis supposedto haveoccurredand artificialrespirationmust be performed.
( 1 ) Place your both hands, one hand on the other,on the lower one third area of his
breastboneand compresshis breast with your elbows applyingyour weight on his
breastso that it is dentedabout2 cm (Repeatcompressinghis beast50 timesor so a
minute).(Cardiacmassage)
( 2 ) In case of one rescuer,
Repeatcardiacmassagesabout15 timesandblowintohis mouth2 timesquickly,and
repeathiscombination.
ln case of two rescuers,
One personrepeatscardiacmassages15 timeswhile the other personblow into his
(Performthe cardiacmassageand
moulhonce,andtheyshallrepealhis combination.
respiration)
mouth-lo-mouth
Whenthe bothhavereturnedto normal,
( 3 ) Examinehis pupilsand his pulsesometimes.
stop the artificialrespiration,serve him with a cup of hot cofiee or tea and keep him
warmand calmwhilewatchinghim carefully. Committhe victimto a medicalspecialist
(Nevergivehimalcoholicdrinks.)To let him recoverfrom
dependingon his condition.
the mentalshock,it is necessaryfor personsconcernedto understandhis situations
andthe necessary
treatments.
tl-) @
v!-ryu'!
lrrrnnth
t
-4
{ =*t.s'>o'--
@
(v,A o \\ //
J€.d \_-/
B/- _\____
A\N I
L-\\</+ -/tt---"-..-...-..-*--
Fig.2 Cardiac massage
-tv-
<PREFACE>
Thankyouverymuchfor purchasing JMA-9900ARPAseries.

the JRC marineradarequipment,
designedto obtainsafeoperationof marineship.
Thisequipmentis marineradarequipment
O Beforeoperatingthe equipment,be sure to read this instructionmanual

carefullyfor correctoperation.
manualso thatoperatorscanreferto it at anytime.
O Maintainthisinstruction
O Referto thismanualwhenany inconvenience or defectsoccur.
<BeforeOperation>
Variouspictorialindications
are includein thismanualandareshownon theseequipment so that
you can operalelhem safelyand correctlyand preventany dangerto you and/orother persons
andany damageto yourpropertyduringoperation. and theirmeaningsare as
Suchindications
follows.
Pleaseundersiandthem beforeyou readthis manual:
This indicationis shownwhere any personis possibilityto be in

of being killed or seriouslyinjured,if this indicationis
AonruGERdanger
neglectedandtheseequipmentare not operatedcorrectly.
This indicationis shown where any person is supposedto be in
l\wnnNlNG danger of being killed or seriouslyinjuredof this indicationis
neglectedand theseequipmentare not operatedcorrectly.
is shownwhereany personis supposedto be injured
Thisindication
Acnunott orneglected
any propertydamageis supposedlo occur if this indicationis
andtheseequipmentare not operatedcorrectly.
Examplesof Pictoriallndication
,,1\ The A make representsGAUTION(includingDANGERand
{J} WARNING).
Electri6
shock contentsof CAUTION("Electric
Detailed Shock"in theexample
on the left.)is shownin the mark.
",*s*
The O makerepresents prohibition.
Prohibited
S
Prohibition
Detailedcontentsof the prohibitedaction ("Disassembling
in lhe exampleon the left.)is shownin the mark.
Prohibited"
"g*o
The power
plug
Instruction
The O makerepresents instruction.
the power
Detailedcontentsof the instruction("Disconnect
plug"in theexampleon the left.)is shownin the mark.
WarninoLabel
This is a warninglabelon the top coverof the equipment.
Do nottry to remove,breakor modiff the label
-vt-
<Cautionsto be UsedduringOperation>
A oaNGER
coverof a highvoltageterminal
Do not removethe conservation
part.
Thereis dangeryoutouchthe highvoltagepart,andto get shockedby.
Sincethe scannerradiatorrotates,do not approachit.

any personmay be
The scannermay startrotatingsuddenly,and consequently
you to installthe scannerradiatoron the
struckand be injured.We recommend
roofof thewheelhouse,flyingbridge,trestle,radarmastor anyotherhighposition
so that no personcan approachit. Whenservicingthe scanner,set the scanner
safetyswitchto the"OFF'position.
A wnRNlNG
Do not touchthe insidesof the scanner.transmitter-receiver
and
displayunit.
Touchingany highvoltagearea,you will get an electricshock.Formaintenance,
inspectionand adjustmentof internalpartsof these equipmenl,consultwith our
salesofiiceor distributorin yourdistrict.
SCANNERRADIATION
HMARD
Neverlook up the antennafromwhichradiationis beingoutputfroma distance
lessthan the following
Injurymay resultfrom exposureto radiationproducedby the antenna(particularly
effectsto the eyes) at a distancefrom the centralfront face of the antennaless
than:
'
(Radiationpower densitvof 10Wm2)
0.6meterfor NKE-I087/1089
1.1meterfor NKE-I079/1075A(Radiationpowerdensitvof 10Wm2l
(Radiationpower densitvof 100Wm2l
21 centimeterfor NKE-1079/1075A
Installthe scannerat any placehigherthananyperson.

lf beingexposeddirectlyto electricwave at close range,you may sufferadverse
influence.
o When approaching the scannerfor maintenan@ or inspection,

set
the powerswitchof the displayunitto the "OFF"or "STBY"position.
lf beingexposeddirectlyto electricwave to closerange,you may sufieradverse
influence.
A cnunoN
o Use these radaronly as assistingdevicesfor navigation.Also, the
officershouldmakethe finaldecisionfor maneuveringby himself.
Use ARPAonly as assistingdevicesfor navigation.

Also,the officer
shouldmakethe finaldecisionfor maneuvering
by himself.
such as vector,targetvalue data, alarm,etc. May contain
ARPAs information
some errors.Also, targetswhich cannotbe detectedwith these radarcannotbe
points.
trackedat theiracquisition
o In the case that either mark shown in followingfigure is on the

expiredTR-tube,Radioisotopes are in the TR-tube.
Disposalof TR-tubewith these marksmust be done in accordancewith the laws
of the pertaining
and regulations country.
fromTR-tubehasno effeclon the humanbody.
Radiation
Don'ttakeapartTR-tube.
a.f ri
a a
-ix-
APPEARANCE
EQUIPMENT
ScannerUnit Type NKE-I079(12 Feet)
Unit Type NTG-3037A

Transmitter-receiver
(12 Feet)
ScannerUnit TypeNKE-1075A
(7 Feet)
ScannerUnitTypeNKE-1089-Z
ScannerUnit Type NKE-1089-9(9 Feet)
Transmitter-receiverUnit Type NTG-3028

ScannerUnit Type NKE-10876(6 Feet)
ScannerUnit Type NKE-I087-9(9 Feet)

DisplayUnit Type NCD.4263(Self-standingType)
Monitor Unit Type NWZ-158T(DesktopType)(Option)
Control Unit Type NDC-1279T(DesktopType)(Option)
KeyboardUnit Type NCE-7721T (DesktopType)(Optlon)

Display Unit Type NCE4263(DesktopType)(Option)
CONTENTS
PREFACE v
....................
BeforeOperation .......vi
Cautionsto be UsedduringOperation .................vii
APPEARANCE
EQUIPMENT ....................
x
.........
GLOSSARY ...)ott/
1. GENERALAND EQUIPMENT
COMPOSITION
1.1FUNCTIONS ...........1-1
1.2FEATURES ........ .....1€
1.3CONFTGURAflON ....................1-5
1.4EXTERTORDRAWTNG .......... ......................1-7
1.5GENERALSYSTEMDIAGRAM ..............1-20
AVOTDANCE
1.6COLL|SION ......... ...,..........J47
2. NAMEAND FUNCTION PANEL

OFCONTROL
SWITCHESANDFUNCTIONOF
SOFTWARE BUTTONS
OF CONTROLPANELSWITCHES...2-1
I NAMEAND FUNCTION
OFSOFTWARE
I FUNCTTON BUTTONS ..................2-6
- xv -
3. BASICOPERATION
3.1FLOWOF OPERATION.................. ..........3-1
I PowerON and Startthe System ............3'2
I ObserveandAdjustVideo .....................34
I TuningOperations '''-.rrj''r....'................................3'7
I Acquireand Measurement Data......... ......'...............3€
I Endthe Operationand Stopthe System ................3S
3.2MENUCOPOSTT|ON ........... .....3-9
3.3PREPARATION ""3'12
I Tuning[UNEI ...3'12
I SensitivityGontrol[GAlNl ....................3-12
I DisplayBrillianceControl ..3-13
I GontrastControllBRlLLVlDEOl .......... ..................3-13
I SeaClutterSuppression [RAlNl ..........3'14
I BrillianceControl ................3'14
I Day/NightModeSelec{ion[DAY/NIGHTI............
I CotorSetting[COLOR] ......3'22
3.4BASTC OPERATIONS ........... ....................3-34
I MoveCrossCurcorMark[+] by Trackball.............................'.3..34
I MethodsforSettingMenultemswith the Trackball ..............3'35
I Use EBls(ElectronicBearingLines) ..341
I SetFloatingEBL ......... ........34:]
t SetFloatingEBL ,........ ........345
I SelectRangeIRANGEI ......347
I SetMaximumRange ..........347
I SelectPulseLength ...........348
I SelectBearingDisplayMode[AZl MODEI ...........348
I Cancelship'sHeadingLine[HLOFfl ........ ...........349
I CancelAllDisplayltemsExceptRadarEcho,VRM,EBL,HL,
RR,and Grosscursor Mark[+l [DATAOFF] ........349
I DisplayPl(ParallelIndexLines)tP[ ........... ...........3'50
I MoveOrrvnShip'sDisplayPositionIOFFCENTER]...............3.53
I DisplayOtherShip'sTrailsIIRAILS] ..364
I DisplayOwnShips Tracksand Own Symbols[OWNSHlPl.365
t MarkingIMARKI ...........'......368
I DisplayRangeRingsIRANGERINGSI .................3-59
- xv r -
I DisplayVariableRangeMarkers[VRMl/VRM2].....................
3-59
I SetGuardZone[GUARDZONEI .........3-61
I ResetAlarmBuzzer[ALARMACKI ....3.63
I SetAlarmSoundLevel ......3-63
I FUNCTTON ........3{5
I ExpandTargeb ...................366
I DisplayProcessedMdeos ...................347
I ReduceRadarlnterfurence ..................368
I PersonalInformation .........3S9
I Information.......
Displayof Navigational ...............3-72
I Functionof USERSwitch/ OPTIONSwitch .........3€8
I Operationof PerformanceMonitor .....3€9
f EBLManeuvering............ ...3-95
OF RANGEAND BEARING
4. MEASUREMENT
I by Trackball
Measurement .....................4-1
I by RangeRings
Measurement ..............4-2
I by EBLsandVRMs
Measurement ........+2
I by betweenTwoOptionalPoints
Measurement ....44
-xtx-
5. OPERATIONOFARPA
UsingARPA ..................5-1
5.1tNtTALSETTING ......................5-2
I SeftingCollisionDecisionCriteria: SAFELIMIT .....................5-2
I AutomaticSettingMode(SystemStart) .................54
I SettingRangeScale: RANGESCALE ....................54
I SettingOwn Ship'sSpeed ......................5-5
5.2 DISPLAYMODESETTING
I SettingMotion DisplayModeffM/RMI
I SettingBearingDisplayModeIAZIMODE] ............5-7
5.3TARGETID No.DISPLAY ........5€
5.4TARGETACQUTSTTION .......... ....................5-9
I AutomaticAcquisition[AUTO]
I ManualAcquisition[MANUAL] ...........5-12
I Useof Automaticand Manual
AcquisitionModes[ACQAUTO]IACOMANUAL] ................5-1 2
5.5ARPADATADISPLAY ............5.13
I Displayof Vectors ...............5-13
I Displayof PastPositions[PASTPOSN] ...............5-16
5.6DATADISPLAY ....5.18
I Typesof DataDisplay ........5-18
I MethodofDisplayingTargetData[tGTDATA] ...5-19
I Cancellationof DisplayingTargetData[tGT DATAI .............5-19
s.7ALARMD|SPL.AY ....................5-20
I DangerousTargetAlarm:CPA/TGPA........... .........5-20
I GuardZoneAlarm[GUARDZONEI ....5-21
I Lost TargetAlarm[LOSTTARGETI ....5-22
I SystemFunctionAlarmIARPA(DATA)I .................................5-23
I GyroSetAlarm [SETGYRO] ...............5-23
5.8TRIALMANEUVERING .........5.24
I TrialManeuveringin the TrueVectorMode ..........5-24
I TrialManeuveringin the RelativeVectorMode ...5-25
I UsingtheTRIALFunction ....................5-26
5.9DELETING UNWANTED TARGETS ........5.27
I DefetingTargets ..................5-27
5.10ARPASETTTNG ....................5-29
I Simulation........... .................5-30
I GateSize ...........5-32
I TestVideo
ON DISPLAY
6. TRUEANDFALSEECHOES
I RadarWavewith the Horizon ................
6-1
I Strengthof Reflectionfrom the Target ....................6€
I SeaClutters ........6€
I FalseEchoes ......6€
I Displayof RadarTransponder(SART) ...................
6-G
7. MAINTENANCE
7.1ROUTINE MAINTENANCE ......7-1
7.2MAINTENANCE ON EACHUNIT ....... ......,7.2
I ScannerNKE-1079/1075A/1089/1087 ........ ..............7-2
UnitNTG€037A/3028
I Transmitter-receiver ...............................74
I DisplayUnitNCD-4263 ........7-5
I CoaxialCable(JMA-9933SA) ......... .......7-5
I WaveGuide(JMA-9923-7XA/9XA) ........7€
FOR
8. COUNTERMEASURES
TORUBLEANDADJUSTMENT
8.1FUNCTTON CHECK.............. ....8-l
I FunctionGheckon TestMenu ...............8-2
I ListofAlarmsandotherlndications ..8-14
8.2TROUBLESHOOTTNG ......... ..8-17

8.3COUNTERMEASURES TO TROUBLE ..8.18
OF MAJORPARTS
8.4REPI.AGEMNT ........8-24
I ReplacementofPARTsPeriodically..,.....-.... .......8-26
Magnetron(V1/V201)
I Replacementof ............... ...8-26
of the Liquid€rystalMonitor ............................8-32
I Replacement
- xxt -
w .......8-33
I VectorConstant .8€8
I UsingSectorBlankfunction ................8'39
I Level
Quantization ..............842
I Adiustmentof NSKUnitto GyroCompass andLog .............84
T MainBangSuppressionAdjustment ............. .......846
8.6SETTING.............. ....................848
I TrueBearingSetting ..........848
I ShipSpeedSefting ..........'..849
I NavigationEquipmentSefting ............8'51
I CurrentCorrection(SET/DRIFT| Setting ...............8-52
I Time/DayDisplaySetting ..8'54
t Adiustmentof Performance Monitor(NJU63/64) ..................
8'56
I Adiustmentof Interswitch................. ....8'58
9. AFTER€ALES SERVICE
I WhenyouRequestforRepair............... ...................9-1
I RecommendedMaintenance ............. ....9-1
I RadarFailureCheckList .......... ..............9'2
10.DISPOSAL
OFTHEUNIT
10.1DISPOSAL ....10.1
OF USEDBAfiERIES ..............
10.2DTSPOSAL ............10-1
OFUSEDMAGNETRON..............
10.3DTSPOSAL ........10-l
OFTR-TUBE............
10.4DfSPOSAL .........,..10-2
-xx -
11.SPECIFICATION
11.1JMA-9933€AWPERADAR .................11-1
11.2JMA-gg32€ATYPE RADAR .................11-2
11.3JMA-9923-7XA/9XAWPE RADAR .......11-3
11.4JMA-99226XA/9XAWPE RADAR .......114
11.5SCANNER (NKE-1079) ........11-5
11.6SCANNER (NKE.:l075Al ,....11€
11.7SCANNER (NKE-1089-7/9). ...11-7
11.8SCANNER (NKE-1087€/9) ..11€
11.9TRANSMTTTER-RECEIVER UNIT(NTG€037A) ....11-9
11.10TRANSMTTTER-RECE|VER UNrrNTG€028) ...11-10
11.11D|SPLAYUNTT(NCD4263) ............... .11-11
11.12ARPA 11-13
11.13PERFORMANCE MONTTOR (NJU€3) 11-14
11.10PERFORMANCE MONITOR (NJU$4) 11-14
APPENDIX
RadarSystemComposition ............ ...............
A-1
RadarSystemGircuitBlock ........
A-3
|NTERSWTTCH (NQE3141IOPERATION MANUAL ......A€
JMA€900seriesRadarAlSOPERATION MANUAL ....A-22
Fig.101 Bbck Diagramof Radar,TypeJMA-9933€AandJMA-99217XAPXA

Fig.'tO2 BlockDiagramof Radar,TypeJMA-9932€AandJMA-9922€XA/9XA
Fig.103 TerminalBoardConnedionDiagramof Radar,TypeJMA-9933SA
(SelfstandingtypeAC220l230V3p)
Fig.'104 BoardConneclionDiagramof Radar,TypeJMA-9933€A
.Terminal
(SelfstandingtypeAC220230VAC100/110V 1<p)
Fig.105 TerminalBoardConnectionDiagramof Radar,TypeJMA-9933SA
(Desktcp typeAC ?2.U23AV 3<0)
Fig.106 Terminal BoardConnection Diagram of Rdaa TypeJMA-993$SA
(DeskbptypeAC2AZTV AC100I|110V 19)
of
Fig.107 TerminalBoardConnectjonDiagam Radal TypeJMA-9932SA
(Selfshnding typeAC 220230V3q)
Fig.108 TerminalBoardConneclionDiagramof Radar,TypeJMA-9932€A
(SeffsbndingtypeACZ2OZWVAC 100/110V 19)
Fig.109 TerminalBoardConnectionDiagramof Radar,TypeJMA€932€A
(DesktrptypeACzz0iZi0v W)
Fig.110 TermimlBoardConnection Diagramof Rada4TypeJMA-9932€A
(Desktop typeAC 2201230V AC 100/110V 19)
Fig.111 TerminalBoardConnectionDiagramof Radar,TypeJMA-992&7PXA
(Selfstandingtype AC22Ol23O\l
?0)
- xxlll -
(SelfshndingtypeAC220l2fiYAC 100/110V 1<p)
Fig.113 TerminalBoardConnectionDiagramof Radar,TypeJlt4A-9992$7/9M
(Desktop typeAC 220BnV ?p)
Fig.114 TerminalBoardGonnectionDiagramof Radar,TWe JMA-9S923-7/9XA
(DesktrrptypeAC 22V2W V AC10C/11 0V tp)
Fig.115 TerminalBoardGonnec{ionDagnamof Radar,TypeJ[4A-9922€/9XA
(SelfstandingtypeAC z0PnV W)
Fig.1'l6 TerminalBoardC,onnectionDiagnamof Radar,T1rpe, TypeJitlA-9922€/$G
(SelfstandingtypeAC220lz30V AC 100/110V 19)
Fig.117 TerminalBoardConnedionDiagramof Radar,TypeJMA-9922$/9XA
(Desktop typeAC 22Of23OV ?p)
Fig.118 TerminalBoardConneclionDiagramof Radar,TypeJMA-9922d9XA
(DesktoptypeAC22Of2WV AC 10CV110V 1<p)
Fig.119 PrimaryPorverSupplyBlockDiagramof Radar,TypeJMA-9933€A
Fig.120 PrimaryPowerSupplyBlockDiagramof Radar,TypeJMA9932€A
Fig.121 PrirnaryPorer SupplyBlockDiagramof Radar,TypeJMA-992$7XAI9XA
Fig.12. Pimary PowerSupplyBlockDiagramof Radar,TypeJMA-9922€XA/9XA
Fig.123 IntremalConneclionDiagramof ScannerUnit,TypeNKE-1079
Diagramof ScannerUnit,TypeNKE-107SD
Fig.124 Int-.malConnec'tion
Fig.125 IntemalConnedionDiagramof ScannerUnit,TypeNKE-10754(100/11OvAC,1fhase)
Fig.126 IntemalConnection Diagramof ScannerUnit,TypeNKE-1075A(220l230VAC,3phase)
Fig.127 IntemalConnection Diagramof ScannerUnit,TypeNKE-1075A(22Cl230VAC,1-phase)
Fig.128 Intemal ConnectionDiagramofScannerUnitTypeNKE-1089-7/9(1-phase)
Fig.129 IntemalConnection Diagramof ScannerUnit,TypeNKE-1089-7/9 ($phase)
Fig.130 InternalConnectionDiagramof ScannerUnit,TypeNKE-1087€/9(1-phase)
Fig.131 InternalConnectionDiagramof ScannerUnit,TypeNKE-1087$€(3-phase)
Fig.132 InEmalConnedionDiagramof Transmitter-rcceiver Unit TypeNTG-30374
Flg.133 IntemalConnec{ton Diagnmof Transmitter+eceiver Unit,TypeNTG3028
Flg.13 IntemalConnection Diagramof DisplayUnit,TypeNCD4263
Fig.135 IntemalConnection Diagramof LGDMonitorof DisplayUnit,TypeNCD4263
Fig.136 BlockDiagramof DisplayUnit,TypeNCD4263
Fig.137 Listof NSKand LOGSelectSwitchesof DisplayUnit,TypeNCD4263
Fig.138 SettingTableof Seed LOGSelectSwitchesof DisplayUnit,TypeNCD4263
Fig.139 SetingTableGyo mmpassandGyroSwitchesof DisplayUnit,TypeNCD4263
Fig.140 TerminalBoardConneclion Diagnam of 2-unitInterswitdtsystem,TypeNQE-3141-2
FigJ41 TerminalBoardConnedionDiagramqf 3-unitInterswitch system,TypeNQE€1414
Fig.142 InternalGonnectionDiagr:amof Interswitch,
TypeNQE-3141-2
Fig.143 InternalConnectionDiagramof Intersvitch,TypeNQE-31414
- xxiv -
GLOSSARY
This sectiondescribesthe maintermsusedfor this equipmentandgeneralrelatedmaritimeterms.
ARPA: HDG(Heading):
AutomaticRadarPloftingAid. Ownship'sheadingbearing.
AZI MODE(AzimuthStabilizationMODE): The displayrangesfrom 000.0to 359.9 degrees
Beringdisplaymode as scannedclockwise.
BCR(Bow CrossRange): HL (HeadingLlne):
Bowcrossrange Ship'sheadingline.
BCT (Bow Cross Time): H UP (Head.Up):
Bowcrosstime Own ship'sheadingline is alwayspointedto the
BRG(Bearing): top centerof the radardisplay.
Bearing tMo:
CPA{ClosestPoint of Approach): MaritimeOrganization
International
The closestpointof approachfrom own ship, Inter Switch(lSW):
wtlichcan be set by the observer Inter-switch
function
GOG(CourseOverThe Ground): Equipmentthat switches connectionof two or
Courserelativeto the ground. moreDisplayunitand two or moreScanner.
C UP(Course-Up): IR:
Ownship'scourseis pointedto the top center Interference
Rejector
of he radardisplay. MMSh
DRIFN MaritimeMobileServiceldentitv
Distancecoveredsolelydue to cunent,tidal MARK:
streamand surfacedrift. Useas a temporarymarker( "O" mark)
EBL (ElectronicBearing Line): NM (NauticalMile):
An electronicbearing line originatedfrom 1NM= 1852m
ownship'sposition. MSK (North StabilizationKit):
Floating EBL: Truebearingunit
Arbitrarypointis EBLat the center. N UP (North-Up)
GNDSTAB(GroundStabilization): The northis always pointedto the top centerof
relativeto the ground.
Stabilization the radardisplay.
GPS(GlobalPositioning System): OWNTRACK:
The position of a GPS receiver can be Displayfunclionof own ship'strack
determinedby the signalsfromGPSsatellites
Guard Zone:
Alarmringagainstintrusion
PerformanceMonitor (PM): TCPA(Timeto Closestof Approach):
An additionalunil to monitorthe transmitledpower Thetlmeto approachthe closestpointfrom
andthe receivingsensitivityof radarequipment. ownship.
PI: TM (TrueMotion):
ParallelIndexLine Truernotionpresentation
PIN (PersonalldentificationCode): A presentationin whichown ship and any
set by th€ user(personalcode)
Information other tiarget move depending on their
PROC(Process): individualmovements.
Targetprocessingfunction TRAILS:
RAIN(Anti-clutterrain): Functionof displayingtracksof otherships.
cluttersuppression.
Rain/Snow TRIAL(TrialManeuver):
Relativevector: Trialmaneuvering
A target'smovementpredictedrelativeto own ship. True Vector:
RR (RangeRings): A target'strue movementpredictedas the
Fixedrangering resultof enteringown ship'sdirectionand
RM (RelativeMotion): sDeeo.
Relativemotionpresentation VRM (VariableRangeMarker):
Own ship'spositionis fixedand othertargelsmove Variablerangemarker
relativeto own ship. WATER(WaterStabilization):
S/X Band: relativeto the water
Stabilization
Radiofrequencybands
S: 3GHzband,X: gGHzband
SCANNER:
Antenna
SEA(Anti+lutter sea):
SeacluttersuPPression
SET:
The resultantdirectiontowardswhich current,tidal
streamand surfacedriftflow.
SOG(SpeedOver Ground):
Speedrelafiveto the ground.
STAB(Stabilization):
Stabilization
-)o(vt-
SECTIONl
GENERALANDEQUIPMENT
1.1 FUNCTTON .......................

1-1
1.2 FEATURES .......................1€
1.3 CONFtGURAT|ON...................................................1-5
DRAW|NG.............................................1-7
1.4 EXTERTOR
SYSTEMD|AGRAM............................
1.5 GENERAL r-20
1.6 COLLtSION 1-27
AVO|DANCE......................................
-27
Problemsof ColllslonAvoidancein Navigation..,..,,,,.....,,.1
Marine Acciden6 and Colllsions
-28
Basic Conceptof CollisionAvoidance,.---- --.. --..........,.1
Relarve yector and True Vector
Raclarand collision Avoidance..., ..,.,....,.1-29
aaaaaaaoaaaooaaaoaaaaaoaaaoaaaaaaoaaaaa
1.1 FUNCTION
This equipmentis high-performance radar equipmentconsistingof a scanner unit, a
transmitter-recover unitand a 23.1-inchcolorraster-scanLCD displayunit
This radar complieswith the current performancestandardsof the lMO.
I Functions of This System
The JMA-9900 ARPA series is a color radar system designed to comply with the
international standards of the lMO. The main functions include; sea clutter and
rein/snowclutter suppression,sensitivityadjustment,interferencereflector,bearingand
range measurementusing a trackball,fixed/variablerange makers, and electronic
bearingline, and ARPA functions(automatic/manual tiargetacquisitionand tracking,
vectorand trail displays,alarmdisplaysandtrial maneuvering).
In addition,the equipmenthas the functionsof colordisplaysetting(4 views),own track
display,NAV line and markerdisplays,TM (True Motion)presentation, Self-diagnostic
facilities.and radar.
In addition,a radarswitchingfunction(lnterSwitch)can be addedto switchbetweentwo,
four or eight radar units. However,in orderto this functionfor four or eight units,an
externalswitchingbox is necessary.
f ARPA Functions
TheARPAfunctionsthat the JMA-9900seriesincorporates will be outlinedbelow.
I I ] First Stage : Target Detection from Radar Information

This work correspondsto plottingtargetsby band on the radardisplay.Assumethat a
ship is approachingthe own ship.You can catchthe ship on the radar.Signalsfrom the
ship are processedwith the data processorand are transferredto the computer as
signalsof bearingand arrange relatedto the own ship. ln this stage,the system has the
functions to quantizationof radar information,to reject noises, to eliminate any
informationother than ship informationand to transfer necessarypositiondata of ships
to the computer.
I II ] Second Stage : Target Tracking

Targetsare plottedat intervalsof 3 to 6 minuteswith the radar,but trackingon this
systemis to plot them electricallyat intervalsof fixed times. This meansto compare
target position data to be detected every moment with those detected previously
changesof positiondata of the target.
[IIIJ Third Stage : Judgment of Existence of Ship in Danger of Collision

In this stage, the system calculates speed and @urses of a target ship from
ever-changingpositiondata of the targetship obtainedin the previousstage so as to
judge existenceof any dangerof collision.After the calculation,the systemcan easily
calculatethe ClosestPointof Approach(CPA)to the own ship and the time requiredto
reach the CPA (TCPA= Time to CPA).Both the CPA and the TCPA are comparedwith
the presetvalues previouslyset previouslyset accordingto the situationsof the own
shipso as to judge existenceof any dangerof collision.
1-1
aaaaaaaaaoaaaaaaoaaaaaaaaaaaoaaaaaoaaaa
[Ml Fourth Stage : lndication
The above informationmust be informed to the officer maneuveringthe own ship. A
variety of indicatingmethods are available including LCD display and numerical
indicator,and variousdataare available.
This system indicatesunprocessedvideo, vectors (to be selectedfrom true vector and
makesof dangership or safe ship for
relativevector)of otherships and identification
these ships on the usualradarscope. When the targetship is dangerone, the system
will soundan alarmand turnson the alarmlampto alertthe officer.
1-2
aaaaaaaooaaaaaaaaaaooaaaaaaaoolaaaaaooa
1. FEATURES
Target Detection by Latest Signal Processing Technology
The system employs the latest adaptive clutter suppressiontechnologyto eliminate

undesiredclutterfrom the radar video signalsthat are obtainedform the receiverwith a wide
dynamic range,thus improvingthe target detection.
Key Arrangement for Higher Operability
The basic and main functionsof the radar can be operatedwith the minimumnecessary
keys, ensuringquick actioneven in case of emergency.Othervarioususefulfunctionsare
also availableby the use of the soft buttonon and gcreenmenu.
In the case that two or more operatorsoperatethe radar equipment,each operatorcan
registerthe operatingconditionsthat are mostfavorableto him/herand can be recalledand
sel momentarily(Personalcode funclionis built-in).
Advanced Technology Based ARPA Functions Provided as Standard
The ARPA target acquisitionand tracking performanceis enhanced by the use of the most
advancedradar processingand trackingtechnologies,ensuringstableoperationin target
trackingunderclulter.
O Acquisitionand trackingof 50 targets
O Hazardousconditionsare representedby shapesand colorsof symbolsas well as sounds
O Trialmaneuveringfunctionsprovided
O Simultaneousindicationof otherships'data
lmproved Day/Night Mode
Two types of backgroundcolorsare avaihblein each Day/Nightmode (total4 background

colors).Each backgroundcolor can be reproducedto be suited for the user's operating
environmentby simplekey operation.The radarechoesand a varietyof graphicscan also
be representedin differentcolors,ensuringeasy-to-seedisplays.
Various Functions
O TRAILS(Othership'strackdisplay)
O NAVlines
O TM (True Motiondisplay)
O display
Head-up/North-up/Course-up
O Own ship'strackdisplay
O GuardZone function
1-3
oaaaoaaoaaaaoaaaaooaaaaaaaaaaoaaaaaoaaa
Low Power Consumption
The radiator structure making the most of wind power contributes to the substantial
reductionin powerconsumptionof the S bandscannerunit
Self-diagnostic Program Incorporated
programalwaysmonitorsall the functionsof the system.lf any function

The Self-diagnostic
deteriorates, alarmmessagewill appearon the radardisplayand an alarmsoundsat the
an
sametime.
Even when the syslem is operating,the functionalitytest can be carried out. (except on
somefunctions)
PerformanceMonitor
The radar performance(transmittedoutput power and receivingsensitivity)can appear on

the radardisplay.
Easy InterSwitch Operation (Option)
By additionallyinstallingan InterSwitchPC board, up to 3-unitsof the JMA-9900series

radarequipmentcan be combinedand switchedover by simpleoperation.
1-4
aaalaaa aaaaaaaaa aoa aaaaaoaaaaaoaaaoaaaa
1n
T<
l. Lt CONFIGURATION
ScannersandTransmitted
OutoutPowers
RadarModel OutpulPower
Transmitted Band
JMA-9933-SA 12ftslot anlenna 30kw S
JMA-9932-SA 12ftslot antenna 30kw S
JMA-9923-7XA 7ft slot antenna 25kW X
JMA-9923-9XA 9ft slot antenna 25kW X
JMA-9922-6M 6ft slot antenna 25kW X
JMA-9922-9XA 9ftslotantenna 2skw X
Radar and Ship'sMains

RadarModel ScannerUnit Performance Transmitter- Display Ship'sMains
Monitor ReceiverUnit Unit
JMA-9933-SA NKE-1079
C) NTG-3037A
NJU-63
220123OVAC. 50/60H2.3d
JMA-9932.SA NKE-1075A
f)
1001110t220t230vAc
JMA-9923-7XA (-)
NKE-1089-7 NCD4263
NTG-3028 50160H2.1d
JMA-992},gXA NKE-108e-9
f)
NJU.64 (.1)
JM4.9922-6XA (-)
NKE-1087-6
JMA-9922.9XA NKE-I087-sC)
f1)JMA-9g33-SA A022ot23ov.50/60H2.16 - - - MEDonly
1-5
aoaaaaa o aoaoaaooaaaoaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaoaaa
Notes:
AC, 50/60H2 (three-phase)
1 . The drivemotorfor the scannerunit is availablein 22O1230Y
type and 10Ol11012201230VAC, 50/60H2 (single-phase)type.
: JMA-9933€A22O123OV AC. 50/60H2.16 - ' 'MEDonly
2 . The scannerunit can be equippedwith a deicing heateras an option markedwith (-),

insteadof which'-D" shall be sufiixedto the type name.
3 . When using the ship's mains of 440V AC as the radar power source, a step-down
transformershallbe used.
4. The name platesfor the radarcomponentsindicateas foflows:
ScannerUnit: SCANNERUNIT
Unit: UNIT
TRANSMITTER-RECEIVER
DisplayUnit: DISPLAYUNIT
1-6
oo aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaataaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
1+ DRAWING
EXTERIOR
Fi9.1.1EXTRIORDRAWINGOF SGANNERUNIT,TYPE NKE-I079
Fi9.1.2EXTRIORDRAWINGOF SCANNERUNII TYPE NKE-i075A
Fig.1.3EXTRIORDRAWINGOF SCANNERUNIl TYPE NKE-l089-7
Fig.1.4EXTRIORDRAWINGOF SGANNERUNIT,TYPE NKE-l089-9
Fig.1.5EXTRIORDRAWINGOF SCANNERUNIT,TYPE NKE-l087-6
Fig.1.6EXTRIORDRAWINGOF SCANNERUNII TYPE NKE-l087-9
Fig.1.7EXTRIORDRAWINGOF TRANSMITTER-RECEIVER
UNII TYPENTG-3037A
Fig.1.8EXTRIORDRAWINGOF TRANSMITTER-RECEIVER
UNIT,TYPE NTG-3028
Fig.1.9EXTRIORDRAWINGOF DISPLAYUNIT,TYPE NCD4263

(sELF-SANDTNG
TYPE)
Fi9.1.10EXTRIORDRAWINGOF MONITORUNIT,TYPE NwZ-l587

(DESKTOPTYPE)(OPTTON)
Fi9.1.11EXTRIORDRAWINGOF CONTROLUNII TYPE NDC-12797

Fi9.1.12EXTRIORDRAWINGOF KEYBOARDUNIT,TYPE NCE-77217

1-7
tr:l >l
ElLt&l
N-C.Dl
sl =l
-Jl I
.<l
l--lzsr)- xFl
o>@l
rYi < tJrl
)
o_ EL tul
<1 <111
tl
tl
0.tl
(rt Ol I
aJt I
<ot I i
>(Jl I u
il_
rilFe- :T
PF<eq-t
-lr
.Jt o)l c.Jl
('tl.(
(\tl a..J aol
----.r- | I
lltl
L]
- - IE-
Fig.l.1 FJffERIORDRAWTNG OF
SCAA'IVERUNIT, TYPE NKE-1079
1-8
lr.ut>l
q oFl { l
I
I
-:rl - El | 1
LOI:r (Jt I
( o l= l ll ll
rl ,l
I Jl i lFr
>il fl l.lE
PlIifll r # |
ilHfl
.1.].1=1
= Elnln elElffi
tdt
c o lO l l-P
t| l |
=lglls fll",l
AI
z.l
9l
@l
z.l
S1a
; tjE
olt"
2.6
;
zl
ll
ol
>l
Fig.1.2 EXTERIORDRAW,|NG OF
SCAN/VERUNIT, TYPE NKE.1O75A
1-9
{I
l--
.xl I I
6l I o)
.ll
xl
ol ul
(EI H O
Lt -t
a-i -l
oll I
toa
n3 GI
LIJ
><
st8 {t
t|t
z
Z
=
t
O
i-LJ
=
F
=
i
z
l
E.
LIJ
z
Z
L)
a
€
.3
s
8.3
{;5
ft=
fr.=
F€
<E
f^\ _
\E
't'-
t. FJ
e9
Fig.1.3 EXTERTORDRAWTNG OF
SCA'V/VERUNIT, TYPENKE-1089-7
1-10
Jtt I o)
frt
'llll| | I
o)
XI IIJ
o{r!tg
m
ct H t(4l O
4t -t J tft
qql fl' I
tdt I
ffi91 l* LIJ
< t ct 4 l tn E!
>t qa |lrl *
z.
c5
z.
=
t- E-
-
LTJ
z_
I
-
:)
O
ts
Z
:)
E
LLJ
Z.
Z-
E
2
!-
*3
iQ=
n--
FI:
H€
*:
\E
h6
t..
t' !r
e2
Fig.I.4 EXTERIORDRAWTNG OF
UNIT.TYPE NKE.1089-9
SCA'V'VER
1-11
4l
(o
.vt
rf)l I
I I
tol I l...'
,il
ct ul
I q
qH !n O
oJ{ rJ) e
o-t ff
?
11
IE
I
ad
cl
IIJ
UIJ
stE t + E ><
I lt af
z.
(J
z
=
E
-
LU
Z
I
F-
=
O
F-
Z.
)
tr
Lll
z.
z.
=
€
3
:
.t*
€ .:!
ll=
n3
B-9
;\:
tnE
\E
T\E
t'.
blr
8g
Fig.1.5EXTERTORDRAW,NGOF
SCA'VA'ERUNIT, TYPE NKE.1087.6
1-12
JI I
rl I
@tl
tl >.
)il I {
ol ru O
o(IH o
(o
Et d 3 ,m
<l =
tt
@l d LIJ
?Id t 1!
6l
\l
z(Jt T !
z.
C5
z.
=
E.
O
LTJ
=,
I
|-
l
f-
Z
l
E
Li_l
Z
Z
r)
0
g
E
e
*;
iE3
<nl il=
6l
-l
L=
g-
u)l
zl FE
= tl{*Ie iE
-t
- \I
lr' l\-
C BI ? t-
Fl" T. FJ
=l 89
3l
Fig.1.6 EXTERIORDRAWINGOF
SCA'V'VERUNIT, TYPE NKE.1O87-9
1-13
E
-:a
G' E
e E
Fig.1.7 EXTRIORDRAWTNG OF
T RANSMITTER-RECEIVER UNIT
TYPE NTG.3O37/30374
oc
l.
CV
x {
-x
E
(U
e
U)
Fig.1.8EXTRIORDRAWINGAF
TRANSM ITTER-RECEIVER UNIT
TYPE NTG.3O28
1-15
:
:?l
6l .o F
FI
=.9 P e
:iH "e
!*n 6 =
*€ri +
=== _E
.=;di :
,I;{o L
b:lF 2
:;ch
'= =l
"l
s5l* = lil
!s
&l
ft
H
!a
ifl
E
ci
z
= A
:
€l
E
g
=
LIJ
e7
<4
3a B
=
zlt+{
--l t , Q
+ttz,
-^l
4p I
=
z
-lES
:
Fig.1.9EXTRIORDRAWINGOF
DISPLAYUNIT,TYPE NGD.4263
(SELF-STANDTNGTYPE)
1-16
Srilor Calrr:ll $:rilbss Trrlrrr
IIASS: APPR0IL
25Kg
U n i tm
:
F! ' F25Ke
*fi: m
2 3 i n c h -m o nl t o r w l t h a s t a n d .
23,l?4t: *SttE
Fig.l.10 EXTRIORDRAWINGOF MONITORUNIT

TYPENWZ-158(DESKTOPTYPE)
b0: {: I
\c; \rr; :
i
><
$i *
d.
o- R,-
<i
u!et:
ai
ai
<:
=a & df;
$N z
a 1i-{
z, 1 . ,
gtl oo o @ o o o oo
F
ul
s
= :-
F\
I
Lll
F.
6
fu0tr $!fl1$tfil
Fi9.1.11EXTRIORDRAWINGOF
CONTROLUNIT,TYPENDC.1279T
(DESKTOP TYPE)(OPTTON)
1-18
ao
-:<
o
CE
tl-
<
<
:
DRAWINGOF KEYBOARDUNIT
Fi9.1.12 EXTERTOR
TYPENCE-7721T(DESKTOPTYPE)(OPTION)
1-19
aa aaaaaaaaoaaaaaaaaaaooaaaaaaaaaoaaaoaa
1 GENERALSYSTEMDIAGRAM
Fig.l.13 GENERALSYSTEMDIAGRAMOF RADAR,TYPE JMA-9933'SA
Fig.I.'14GENERALSYSTEMDIAGRAMOF RADAR,TYPE JMA.9932€A
Fis.l.l5 GENERALSYSTEMDIAGRAMOF RADAR,TYPE JMA-9923'7XA
Fig.1.16GENERALSYSTEMDIAGRAMOF RADAR,TYPE JMA-9923'9XA
Fi9.1.17GENERALSYSTEMDIAGRAMOF RADAR,TYPE JMA-9922'6XA
Fig.l.18 GENERALSYSTEMDIAGRAMOF RADAR,TYPEJMA-9922'9XA
1-20
aaaaaaaaaaaaoaaaaaoaaaaaoaaoaaaaaoaaaaa
NKE-I079 SEAN!{ERUNTT
0.6/1kV-DPYCY-1.5
SHIP'SMAIN COAXIALCABTE
CIRCUITBREAKER
AC100/110V HF-zOD(JRCSUPPLU
60/00H2,1d, 200YV
(omoN)
14 CORES OOMPOSITECABLE
H-2695110058 UMT
NTG-3037 TMT{SMTTTER-RECETVER
i,lAx 30 T d23 (,JRCSUPPLY)
t4 coREscoMPosncAal-E
H-269511005{l
MAX3sMT 6 23 (JRCSUPPLY)
NCO-4263DISPLAYUNIT
SHIP'SMAIN
4C100/110V
5O/6OHz,1 6
AC220/zgOV
5O/6OHz,
l6
800v4
4C220/2&V
GYRO 50/60H2,1@ MEDonly
LOG/DLOG
GPS ECIDS
Ats CONNING
ECHOSOUNDER
AI-ARMMONITORING
Note:Eliminatingthe interferenceon frequenciesused for marinecommunications and navigation

due to operationof the radar.
All cablesof the radarare to be run awayfrom the cablesof radioequipment.
(Ex. Radiotelephone. Communications receiverand directionfinder.etc)
Especiallyinter-wiringcables betweenscannerunit and displayunit of the radar should not run
parallelwith the cablesof radioequipment.
Fi9.1.13GENERALSYSTEMDIAGRAMOF RADAR' TYPE JMA-9933€A
1-21
aoaaaaaaaaaaaaoaaaaoaaooaaaaoaaaaalaaoa
NKE-1075 SCANNERUNIT
0.6/rkv-DPYoY-1
.5
SHIP'S MADI CIRCUN BREAKER

ACt00/rr0v
(oPnoN)
I,I CORES CO POSIET C,qBLE

H-26961I 0056
MAX 65MT 6 23(JRC SUPPLY)
NCD-4208 DISPLAYUNIT
SH:P'SMAIN
AC10o/tlO/220/230\l
50,/60H4| d
4C220/230V
QYRO 50,/80H:,3 6
800v4
LOG,/DLOG
GPS ECIDS
AIS
CONMNG
ECHOSOUNDER
ALARMMONITOFING
SYSTEM
Note;Eliminalingthe interferenceon frequenciesused for marine communications and navigation

All cablesof the radarare to be run away fromthe cablesof radioequipment.
(Ex.Radiotelephone. Communications receiverand directionfinder.etc)
Especiallyinter-wiringcablesbeiweenscannerunitand displayunitof the radarshouldnot run
Fi9.1.14GENERAL SYSTEMDIAGRAM OF RADAR, TYPE JMA-9932-SA
1-22
aaaaaaaaaaaoaaaaaaaoaaaataooaaaooa aooaa
NNKE-10&9-7 SCAI.INERUNIT
14 CORES COMPOSIETCABLE
SHIFS MAIN CIRCUN AREAIGR
ACIqr/l10v
H-289511{Xt50
MAX3OMTd 23 (JRCSUPPL\')
NTG-3028 TMNSMFTER-RECETVER
UNIT
14 CORES COMPOSIETCABLE
H-2095110050
rrAx 3sMT d23 (JRCSUPPLY)
NC}./t263 DISPLAYUNIT
SHIP'SMAIN
AAlOO/1rO/22O1/23tN
50/6OHz,I tb
AC220/2 V
GYRO
s6
6(X)VA
LOG/DLOG
GPS ECIDS
Ats
CONNNG
ECHO SOUNOER
ALARM MONITORNG
SYSTEIT

due to ooerationof the radar,
Especiallyinter-wiringcablesbetweenscannerunil and displayunitof the radarshouldnot run
Fig.1.15GENERALSYSTEMDIAGRAMOF RADAR,TYPEJMA-9923-txA
1-23
aoaaaaaoaaaaaaaoaaaaoaaaaaaaaaoooaaaaoa
NKE-108S-9 SCA}INERUNTT
0.6/1kV-DPYCY-1
.5
14 CORESCOMPOSIETCAALE
SHIP'S MAIN CIRCUITBREAKER
H-2895110050
AC100/1 10V
MAX3OtT d23 (JRCSUPPL\')
NTG-3028 TRANSMTTTER-RECETIGR
UNTT.
CABLE
14 CORESCOMPOSIET
MAx 35MT 023 (JRCSUPPL9
NCD-4203DISPLAY
UNIT
SHIFYSI''IAIN
4C100/llo/220,/zsov
50,r00H2,1d
AA220/2tOV
50/80H2,3 6
GYRCI 800v4
LOG/DLOG
GPS ECIDS
AXS
cot{lu{c
ECHO SOI'NDER
ALAFN' MONTTORIIIG
SYSTEM
Note:Eliminatingthe interferenceon frequenciesused for marine communicationsand navigation

All cablesof the radar are to be run away from the cables of radioequipment.
(Ex. Radiotelephone. Communicaiions receiverand direction1lnder.etc)
Especiallyinter-wiringcablesbetvveen scannerunit and displayunitof the radarshouldnot run
Fi9.1.16GENERALSYSTEMDIAGRAMOF RADAR,TYPEJMA-9923-9XA
1-24
aaaoaaaaaoaoaoaaaaaaaaaaaoaaaaaoooaaaaa
Nffi-1087-0 sc NNERUl,[T
0.8/tkv-DPYcY-1.5
SHIP'S I'ASI CIRCIJITBREAKER

ACl00/tlov
(oPnoN)
lil CORESCOMPOSTT
CABLE
H-26951r0050
MAX 85MT6 23(JRCSUPPLY)
NC[F'1263 DISPLAY UNIT
s! P'SMAtt{
AClm/110/220/230V
5O/6U111t$
AC220/230\t
5ll/00Ha 30
GYRO 000v4
LOG/DLOG
GPS ECIDS
Ats
CONMNG
ECHOSOUNDER
ALARM MONNOruNG
SYSTEM

All cables of the radar are to be run away from the cablesof radio equipment.
Especiallyinter-wiringcablesbetweenscannerunitand displayunit of the radarshouldnot run
Fi9.1.17GENERALSYSTEMDIAGRAMOF RADAR,TYPE JMA-9922-6XA
1-25
aaaaoaaaaaaoaaaaaootaaaaaaaaaaaoooaoaoo
NKE-I087-9 SCANNERUNIT
0.6,/tkv-DPYGY-1.5
SHIP'S I|iATN CIRCUIT BREAKER

ACt00/11W
(oPnoN)
14 CORESCOTTPOSITECAALE
H-2005110058
MAX65MTO23(JRCSUPPLY)
NCD_4263 DISPLAY UNIT
SHIP'SIINN
AClm./1rO/220/230\t
50,/E0Hz,
|{
rczm/?3ov
5{l/60H2. 3 {
GYRO
d00vA
LOG/DLOG
GPS ECIDS
Ats
CONNING
ECHOSOUNDER
ALARMMONITORING
SYSTEM
Note:Eliminatingthe interferenc,eon frequenciesused for marine communications and navigation

Especiallyinter-wiringcablesbetweenscannerunitand displayunitof the radarshouldnot run
parallelwiththe cablesof radioequipment.
Fi9.1.18GENERALSYSTEMDIAGRAMOF RADAR,TYPEJMA-9922-9XA
1-26
aaaaaaooaaooaaaaaaaaoaaooaaaaaaaaaaaoaa
1! COLLISIONAVOIDANCE
in Navigation'' ' ' ' ' '
Problemsof GollisionAvoidance
Marinecollisionavoidanceis one of the problemsthat have been recognizedfrom of
old. Now,il will be describedbrieflywho the collisionavoidanceis positionedamongthe
navigationalaid problems.
The navigationpatternof all mobile craft constitutesa system with some closed loops
regardlessof the media through which the mobile craft travels, whether air, water,the
boundarybetweenair and withanothermobilecraftand the otheris a loopof fundinga
right and safe way to reach a predestinatedestination.
Fi9.1.19shows the conceptualdiagram of navigationpatternby MR.E.W.Anderson.
The closed loop of collisionavoidanceis shown on the left side and closed loop of
findinga rightcourseon the rightside.
Shiptravelingin controlledcondition
Fig,1.19 NavigationPattern
Maring Accidgnts and Gollisiolls" .. " r r r r r " " "' r"

Among marine accidents,collision accidents have been highlightedas the tonnages
and speed of shipsbecomehigheralong with the increasein trafficat sea. lf a tanker
carryingdangerousarticlessuch as crude oil collideswith any other vessel,then not
onlythe vesselsinvolvedwiththe accidentbut othervesselsin the vicinity,portfacilities,
inhabitants in the coasial area as well as marine resources may also suffer
immeasurable damagesandlroubles.Collisionaccidentshavea highpercentageof the
marineaccidentsthat haveoccunedin recentyears.To cope withthese problems,any
effectivemeasuresare neededand some equipmentto achievecollisionavoidance
requirementshave been developedat rapid strides.
1-27
ooaaaaaaaaaaaotaaaoaaaaaaaaaaoaaaaaaaaa
Basic Gonceptof Collision Avoidancg" " r'' r "' r r r''

There are two aspects in collisionavoidance:collisionpredictionand avoidance.
Collisionpredictionis to predictthat two or more vesselswill happenio occupy the
same pointat the same time, while collisionavoidanceis to maneuvervesselsnot to
occupythe same pointat the sametime.
In practicaloperationof vessels,a spot of collisionhas to be deemedto be a single
pointbut a closedzone.The closedzone is conceptuallydefinedas CPA(ClosestPoint
of Approach).ln collisionprediction,the time to be taken until a ship reachesthe CPA is
definedas a TCPA (Time of CPA).
Fig.1.20showsa diagramcalled"CollisionTriangle".
CPA TCPA (Timeof CPA)

--\\\{argetvessel
/-"'
Relative vector
CPA RING
Fi9.1.20CollisionTriangle
Relative Vgctorand True Vgctor"' I " r t ! I t " I' t r "' It

Formtwo pointsof view,collisionpredictionand avoidance,it is necessaryto obtainthe
relativevector of other ship for predictionand the true veclor of other ship for collision
avoidancein order to grasp other ship'saspect.The relationshipbetweenthe relative
vectorand true vectoris shownin Fig.1.21.
Both rough CPA and TCPA can be obtained easily from the relative speed vector of
other ship.This methodhas an advantagethat the risksof collisionwith all other ship
can easilybe obtainedfrom its true speed vector,enablingother ship's aspectto be
seen at a glance.Thus, the aspectsof other ships (transverse,out sail, parallelrun,
reverserun,etc.)as describedin the Act of Preventionof Collisionat Sea can be readily
grasped.lf there is a risk of collisionwith othership,the operatorcan determinewhich
rule to be appliedand how to operateown ship.
1-28
aaooaaoaaaooaaaaaaaaaaaaaaoaaaaaaaaaaaa
Vo: O\rmship'sspeed
0 o: Own ship'scourse
Vr:Other ship'slrue speed
Vr: Other ship'sreativespeed
I r: Olher ship'stue couse
6 Otherships realivecouse
":
0 A:Asp€ct
Fi9.1.21RelativeVectorand TrueVector
Radarand GollisionAvoidancg''''' r' r'' r''''''' r''

Radaris stillplayingan importantrollfor collisionpreventionand positioning.
A plotteris
used to furtherenhancethe radar functionality. The plotteris capableof plottingother
positionsof othershipsin 3 to 6 minuteintervalsto monitortheir movements.The plots
of other shipsrepresenttheirtracksrelativeto own ship,and it is shownwhetherthere
is a there is a risk of collision,namelyCPAand TCPAcan be obtained.This method
using a plotter is fairly effective,but the numberof target ships,which are manually
plotted,is limitedand it takesseveralminutesto measurethose
1-29
SEGTION2
NAMEAND FUNCTIONOF
CONTROLPANELSWITCHES
AND FUNCTIONOF
SOFTWAREBUTTONS
ilil,,,,,,,,u
lillillll
lllllllll
NAMEANDFUNCTION PAf'lELSW|TCHES.......................2-l
OF CONTROL
FUNCTIONOF SOFTWAREBUTTONS
aooaaaaooaaaaooaaoaooooooooooaaaaaaoaoo
NAMEAND FUNCTIONOF CONTROLPANELSWITCHES
ScreenDisplay Example
g3g
I
s33:33ssae
q
!n3
,g
I
3 t
I H d
bq
!l
z=
es
@c
E
.'
.;
I
a
1
!
g
.l
!
o
j
E t
a',l
s
rg
J
fl
g
F e
A
a g
E I
..! z
5^ z5 E
t<
t=
FJ
33sil .gl
'E :l
iEl
Ftr4 i
I !l
?l
,td
*. bEl l't
E f lI
!l a
q
I
!!
n
{
{ .9
q :t€
I .;
g
.!
tflc€
:iE€
i ii E
;iF
f€l
tulsEJ
2-1
aoaoaaaaaaaoooloooaaaaooaaoaaafaooaa
Nameand Function of Control PanelSwitches
@@B
o@ @@e@
2-2
ooaoaooooooooooaooaoaoaaoooolaooaaaaooa
O IPOWERI(PowerSupply) Switch
Thisswitchis usedto turn the poweron and off. The lamplightswhen this switchis on.
Whenthe poweris on and it cannotbe turnedoff for some reason,depressingthis switchfor five
secondswill force the power off.
Switch
@ IPWRACR (PowerAlarmAcknowledgment)
Whenthisswiichis setto ON,the lamplightsto startthesystem.
a powersupplyseparate
In orderfor thiskeyto work,an externalbatteryis required(normally
fromthe AC unit).
@ ITX/STBf'I (Operation) Switch

The[STANDBYI willappearat the upperleflof theradardisplayabout3 minutesafter
the[PWR]switchis setto ON.Then,pressthisswitch,andtransmission willbe started.
Pressingthe switchduringtransmissionsets the equipmentto the state.
standby
@ IALARM ACKI (Alarm Acknowledgment) Switch

a failure,approach
Pressthisswitchto acknowledge alarm.
of a target,or collision
@ ITUNEI(Turning)Gontrol
Tunesthe target signalsto displaythe targetsmost clearlyon the radar display'
SwitchingbetweenAUTO and MANUALcan be done by pressingthe knob.
@ IRAIN](Rain/SnowGlutterSuppression)Control
Reducesthe clutterecho causedby rain and snow.
Be carefulnot to set this adjustmenttoo high. Settingthis adjustmenttoo high may causethe
targetto be erased.SwitchingbetweenAUTO and MANUALcan be done by pressingthe knob.
Control
@ ISEAI(SeaClutterSuppression)
Reducesthe clutterecho causedby the surfaceofthe sea.
Be carefulnot to set this adjustmenttoo high. Settingthis adjuslmenttoo high may causethe
targetto be erased.SwitchingbetweenAUTO and MANUALcan be done by pressingthe knob.
@ [GAlNl (ReeeivingSensitivity) Control

Controlsthe radarreceivingsensitivity.
Adjustthe GAINto a pointwherethe backgroundstaticdoes not interferewith operation.
@ IRANGE+/-l (RangeScale Select)Switch

Selectsa rangescalefrom 0.125to 96 (or 120)nauticalmiles.
@ IEBLIl(ElectricBearingLine1) Switch
Selectsand displaysEBL1. SwitchesbetweenON and OFF, and the functionfor which this
switchif valid.When depressedfor two secondsor longer,this switchselectsQN/OFFfor the
floatingsetting.
@ lEBL2l (ElectricBearing Line 2) Switch

Selectsand displaysEBL2. SwitchesbetweenON and OFF, and the functionfor which this
switchif valid.When depressedfor two secondsor longer,this switchselectsON/OFFfor the
floatingsetting.
@ [EBL](ElectricBearingLine)Control
Rotatesthe bearingof the EBLthat is selectedby EBL1and 2.
@ [VRM{](VariableRangeMarker1) Switch
Selectsand displaysVRM1.
switchesbetweenoN and oFF, and the functionfor whichthis switchif valid.
2-3
ooooatooaaoooooaaaaaaoaaaaoaaoaoaaoaoaa
@ tVRMzl(VariableRangeMarker2) Switch
Selectsand displaysVRM2.
SwitchesbetweenON and OFF,and the functionfor whichthis switchif valid.
@ IVRMI(VariableRangeMarker)Gontrol
Changesthe rangeof the VRM that is selectedby VRMI and 2.
@ filR VECTI(TM/RMMode Select)Switch

Selectsthe ARPAvectordisplayin the TM or RM mode.
@ IIGT DATAI{TargetDataSetup) Switch

This switch.isusedto displaynumericdataof ARPAbeingtrackedandAIS beingdisplayed.
When this switch is depressedfor two seconds,the numericdisplaynext to symbolswill be
turned on and off.
@ IACQMANUALI(ManualAcquisition)Switch
This switchturnson and off manualacquisitionof ARPAtargets.
When this key is pressed,the cursormode is changedto the manualacquisitionsettingmode.
@ [ACQ CANCEL](Acquisitioncancel) switch

This switch cancelsthe symboland vector of an ARPAtarget being tracked, and stops tracking
the target.
lf depressedfor two secondsor longer,that trackingof all targetswill be cancelled.(ARPA
display)
When usingwithAlS, pressingthis for two seconds,all targetswill be pausedand displayed.
@ IDAY/NIGHT](DaylNightMode Select)Switch
Switchesthe screen color and brillianceaccordingto the DAY DAY2, NIGHTI and NIGHT2
setting.
@ lArs/ARPAI
Selectswhetherto use the ACQ MANUALandACQ CANCELkeyswithARPAorAlS.
@ IHL OFFI (HeadingLine Off) Switch

The ship'sheadingline(HL)can be cancelledas long as this switchis depressed.
@ IDATAOFFI
Whilethis switchis depressed,graphicsotherHL, the rangering,EBL and VRM be deleted
temporarily.
@ IPANELI(OperationPanelBrightness)Switch
Conirolsthe brightnessof the controlsand switcheson the operationpanel.
@ lusERl
The registeredfunctionis called.Also,if an optionis connecled,then this is usedto operatethat
option.
At the time of facloryshipments,it is set as ON of the function,which switchesthe vector length
of "ARPA"in 60 minutes,and OFF.
@ loPTroNll functionis called.Also, if an option is connecled,then this is used to operatethat

The registered
option.
The call of a MENUis assignedat lhe time of factoryshipments.
24
aaaaaoaaaaaaaalaaoaaaaaaaaoooaaaaoooaaa
@ [oPiloN2l
The registeredfunctionis called.Also, if an optionis connecled,then this is usedto operatethat
option.
The callof a TEST is assignedat the time of factoryshipments.
@ ftrackball]
is usedto movethecursorto arbitrary
Thetrackball onthescreen.lt is usedto make
locations
seftingsin the variousmodes.
It is used to specifythe center positionof floatingEBLs and specifythe off center position.
@ lLeft Trackball Button]

Thisbutton modes
is usedto selectvarious andconfirm input.
numeric
In the MARKmode,it is usedto confirmthe screenmark. Duringmanualacquisitionof ARPA,
it is usedto confirmacquisition.
@ [Right TrackballBuftonl
IntheMARKmode,thisbuttonis usedto deletescreen
marks.
Duringmanualacquisitionof ARPA,it is usedto releaseacquisition.
@ IBRILLIControl
Controlsthe brillianceof the entiredisplaypanel.
Brillianceknob is locatedright hard if a screen.
2-5
aaaaaaaooaaaaoaaaoaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaoooaao
FUNCTIONOF SOFTWAREBUTTONS
This radar provides software buttons on the screen which can be used to set importantfunctions
directlyand swiftlywithoutopeninga menu.
By positioningthe arrow cursor on the buttons indicatedby O to @ in the figure above and then
pressingthe lefttrackballbutton,the settingscan be changedin the ways describedbelow.
2-6
oaooooaaooaaooaoaaooaoaaaaaaaoaaoaaaaoa
o Range selection
Changesthe radarrange.
u+"' Increaseslhe rangeby one step. (Themaximumrangeis 96 or 120 nauticalmiles.)
(Theminimumrangeis 0.125nauticalmiles.)
@ RINGSindicator selection
Tums on and off the fixed distancescale display. When this is turnedon, the intervalsof the
rangeringswill be displayed. When this is turnedoff,then "OFF"will be displayed.
@ Pulse width selection

Selectthe pulsewidth. There is three pulsewidths: Shortpulse(SP),middlepulse(MP)and
long pulse (LP). The pulse widthsthat can be used dependon the range being used. lf a
changecannotbe made,then nothingwill be displayed. This settingis storedfor each range.
@ Tuning indicator mode

Setsthe tuningmo{e to MAN
I MANUAL | ---
(Manualtuning) --- (Aulomatictuning)
@ Bearing mode selection

This has the same functionas the [AZl MODE] switch. li switchesbetween North-up(true
bearing),Head-up(relativebearing)and Course-up. Eachtime this buttonis clickedit will step
throughthe settingsin the followingorder: "N UP" -+ "C UP' + "H UP"
@ Motion mode selection

The screen display is changed between the True Motion (TM) and Relative Motion (RM)
displays. Clickingthis buttonwill switchbetween"TM"and "RM."(R) indicatesa relativetrail.
(T) indicatesa truetrail.
@ Transmission/Standbyselection
Aboutthree minutesafterthe [PWR]switchis turnedon, the 'PREHEAT'indicationon the upper
leftof the screenwill changeto 'STANDBY."
STANDBY: Indicatesthat the unit is in the standbystate. Clickingthe switchat this timewill
changethe unitto the transmissionstate.
TRANSMIT: Indicatesthat the unil is in the transmissionstate. Clickingthe switchat thistime
will changethe unitto the standbystate.
@ GhangeInterSwitchconnection
This is displayedif InterSwitchis connected. The indicatorshowsthe connectedscannerand
the connectionstatus of the indicator. When this switch is pressed,a menu to changethe
connectionstatus of the scannerand indicatorwill be displayed. The scannerand indicator
connectionstatuscannotbe changed,unlessthe masterindicatoris in the standbystate.
@ AIS target refreshed (ACT)

Whenthis switchis pressed,the AIS trargetwill be activated.
@ AIS target deactivated (DACT)

Whenthis switchis pressed,the activatedAIS targetis paused.
@ ARPAsymbol indicator selection

Turns the ARPA symbol indicatoron or off. The settingis changedeach time this buttonis
clicked.
@ AIS symbol indicator selection

Turns the AIS symbol indicatoron or o{f. The settingis changedeach time this buttonis
clicked.
2-7
aaaaaoootaoaaaaaoaaaaoaooaaf aaaaaaooaaa
(D Radarinterferencereflectorfunction selection
(lR). The lR is turnedon or off eachtimethis
reflector
Turnson andoff the radarinterference
switchis clicked.
@ Radar reception scale (GAIN)

This indicatesthe degreethe knob has beenturned.
@ Sea clutter suppression function (SEA) selection

Selectseithermanualor automaticsea cluttersuppression. The bar on the rightindicatesthe
positionin the manualmode.
(D Sea scale
This indicatesthe amount the knob has been turned in manual mode. When in aulo mode,
"AUTO"will be displayed.
@ Rain/snow clutter suppression function (RAIN) selection

Selects eilher manual or automaticrain/snow clutter suppression. The bar on the right
indicatesthe positionin the manualmode.
@ Rain scale
This indicatesthe amount the knob has been turned in manual mode. When in auto mode,
?UTO" will be displayed.
@ Own ship's trail indication interval function (TRACK)selection

Turns on and off the own ship's trail indicationinterval.
@ Radartrail indicator function (TRAILS)selection

for radartrails. OFF,0.5MlN,1MlN,3MlN,or 6MlNcan be selected.
Setsthe timeintervals
@ lmage processing function (PROC)selection

mode. OFE PROC1,PROC2or PROC3can be selected.
Setsthe image-processing
6i\
vr) Radar trail mode selection
Sets true trail or relativetrail when operatinglhe radartrail funciion.
"T" is displayedwhen true trailsare usedand "R" is displayedfor relativetrails.
This setiingis also limitedby the radar-bearing mode.
Whenthe North-up(N UP) mode is used,switchingbetween"T" and "R" is possible.
When the Course-up(C UP) modeis used,only "T" is set.
Whenthe Head-up(H UP) modeis used,only "R" is set.
v9 Radar image enhance (ENH)function selection

Turnson and off the radarimageenhancefunction. lt is turnedon or off eachtimethis switchis
clicked.
@ Cursor mode selection

Sets the cursor mode. Clickingthis buttonwill displaya pull-downmenu. After settingthe
mode,the cursorcan be movedand the lefttrackballbuttonusedto makevarioussettings.
Becauseall lhe modes are to be used during radar transmission,a mode may not operate
properlyif it is selectedin the standbystate.
@ Off center mode selection

This has the same functionas the [OFFCENT]switch. Shiftsthe own ship positionwithinthe
screen(within66% of the scope'sradius)to displaya widerrangein an arbitrarydirection.
When this buttonis pressedwhen the system is alreadyin the off center mode,then the off
center functionwill be turned off.
2-8
aaaaaoaaaaaooaaaoaaoaaaaaaooaaoooooataa
@ Heading line off setting

Hasthe samefunctionas the [HL OFF] key. Whilethis switchis clicked,the headinglines(HL)
displaywill be turnedofi.
@ CPA RING indicator selection

Turnon and off the CPARINGdisplay.
When the vectormode is TRUE,the CPARINGcannolbe turnedon.
@ MAP SHrFT
This is usedto mode mapsmade by users.
@ DEPTH
This displaysthe depth receivedfrom externaldevices.
The I u I buttoncan be usedto turn on and offthe depthgraphdisplay.
@ DAY/NIGHTsetting
This buttonselectsthe day or nightmode. The modechangeseach timethis buttonis clicked.
Thereare four settings: DAY1--+DAYZ-+ NIGHTI -+ NIGHT2.
€D PANEUBRILLVIDEO/BRILLARPA setting
are switched.
The modesPANEL,ViDEO,and ARPA,whichadjustluminosity,
The mode changeseach time this buttonis clicked.
Thereare threesettings: PANEL-+VIDEO-+ARPA.
@ Brillianceadjustment
Each time this switch is clicked,it will go to the next of four (BRILLVIDEO) or five (PANEL,
BRILLARPA)brilliancesettings.
@ Process setting function (FUNC)selection

Sets the processsettingmode. OFF, FUNC1, FUNC2,FUNC3, FUNC4,or FUNC5 can be
selected.
@, @, @ , @ : EBL and VRM settings

The EBL1,EBL2,VRM1,and VRM2 switchesare usedto acquireoperationrights.
They functionin the same way as the EBLI and 2 and VRM1 and 2 switcheson the control
paner.
The numericindicatorswitchesare used to turn on and off the various EBLs and VRMs.
When a numericindicatordisplays"OFF,"that meansthe corresponding indicatorin the PPI is
off.
The switcheson the controlpanelare usedto movethe EBLsand VRMs.
nm
o nm
+ WhenON: The numericdisplayis off.
WhenOFF: Thenumericdisplayis on.
Thisis usedto turnON andOFFeitherEBLor VRMoperation, andturnON andOFFthedisplay.

The functionthal is validis indicatedby the inverteddisplay,
EBL and VRM intersectionidentificationmarks
2-9
aaaaoof oaaaaaooaaoaaaaaaoaaoaaooaoof oao
@ EBL1 starting point mode

Sets whether the EBLI starting point is placed al the center of the own ship or at an arbitrary
positionon the radarscreen. This hasthe samefunctionas depressingthe EBLI switchon the
conlrolpanelfor a longperiod.
tt: CENTER Indicatesthat the EBLI startingpointis at the own ship position.
@: OFFSET lndicatesthatthe EBLI startingpointis not at the own ship position.
In this strate,the startingpoint may be at the cursorposiiionor it may be fixedat an arbitrary
positionon the screen. When the buttonis clicked,the startingpoint will move with the
cursor posilion,then when the left buttonis clickedthe startingpoint will be fixed at the
cursorlocation.
{: After movingthe L/L FIX EBLI startingpoint,the startingpoint is fixed by the latitudeand
longitudevalues.
lf the startingpoint moves out of the screen,then it will be resetautomaticallyso that the
startingpojnl is at the own ship position.
Note: When the EBL1 starting point moves, the mode O or L is indicatedby the position
selectedamongthe EBL OFFSETORIGINmenu.
lfdl EBL2 starting point mode
Sets whetherthe EBL2startingpoint is placedat the center of the own ship or at an arbitrary
positionon the radarscreen.
Everythingelse is the same as that for the EBL2 startingpoint mode.
@ Speed unit setting

Setsthe speedunit.
Clickingthis button will open a pull-downmenu, A unit can be selectedfrom one of the
following. An alarmis activatedif the selectedspeedunit is not e,onnected
to the radar.
Options: MANUAL,LOG (1-axislog), 2AXW (2-axisover water),2AXG (2-axisover ground),
GPS
lf the speedunit settingis "MANUAL,"then placingthe cursorover the numericsectionand left

clickingwill allownumericinput.
(D SET/DRIFT
Turnson and off SET/DRIFTcorrection.
lf CORRECTIONis on for this setting,then "CORR"will be displayednext to the button. The
'CORR' at this time will be valid. Also, correctioncan only be set
numberdisplayednext to
when the speedunit is in the MANUALor LOG (1-axislog) modes.
SET setting
Placingthe cursorover ihe numericsectionand left clickingwill allow numericinput.This
settingis onlyvalidif CORRECTIONis ON.
DRIFTsetting
Placingthe cursorover the numericsectionand left clickingwill allow numericinput.This
settingis only validif CORRECTIONis ON.
@ Date display mode

Setsthe date modeto be displayedon the screen.
g : Turnsoff the time display.
til ; Globallimedisplay(UCT).
E : Localtimedisplay(LOCAL).
@ ARPA, PAST POSN vector mode setting

These set the vectordisplaymode.
T True vector
R: Relativevector
These settingswork concurrently.
2-10
aoaooaaaaaooaaooaaaaaoooaoaoaaoa
functionsetting
@ Guardzone1 ON/OFF
Tumsthe guardzone1 functionon or off.
@ Guardzone2 ON/OFFfunctionsetting
Turnsthe guardzone2 functionon or off.
@ MAINMENUsetting
Thisbuttonhasthesamefunctions as the MENUswitchon theconlrolpanel.
thisbuttonwilldisplaythe
Clicking "MAIN MENU.'
@ Pl menusetting
thisbuttonwillopenthe"Pl"menu.
Clicking
Thismenu is usedto set and displaynarallqfindexlines(Pl).
@ GZ menu setting
Clickingthis buttonwill openthe "GZ" menu.
This menu will turn on and off the range settingsfor guard zone 1 and 2.
@ TESTmenu setting
Clickingthis buttonwill openthe "TEST' menu.
Checksthe operalionalstatusof the radarequipment.
@ Navigationinformation readout (NAV)

Opensa list of navigationinformationfilesstoredin the NAV/MAPINFO Menu.
o Personalcode name (PlN)

Opensa list of personalcodefiles in the PIN Menu.
2-11
SECTION3
BASICOPERATION
llllltil,'ililllll
Select Pulse Length

Select Beaing Display Mode [AZl MODE] ...-.......,.-................sta
PowerON and Startthe System Cancel Ship'sHeadingUne [HL OFF].....-......-.............................
s4s
Obseve and AdjustVideo 34 Cancel Atl Oisplay ltems E cept Radar Eibo,VRM,EA|-HL,RR, and
CrcssCu.sorMe* I+l IDATA
DisplayPl (Pan el lndexLines)[Pl]...............................,......,..,....3-50
MoveOwn Ship'sDisplayPosition{OFFCENTERI.-............i-ss
Disday OtherShip'sTrailsITRAILS].............................................es4
As ay awn Ship'sTrecksandOwnSynbolsIOWNIRACKI...-....................&55
MarkingIMARK]... ..............................................s-
DisplayRangeRingsIRANGERINGS]........ -.- -....-..................
&ss
DisplayVariableRangeMarkers[VRM1NRM2]......................3-se
SetGuardZonesIGUARDZONE]...........--.-..---.- ...................s41
ResetAlarmBuzzerIALARMACK]................................................
..-...........i-6s
SetAlarmSoundLevel.............................---......-........-^-
FUNCT|ON....,........ ..........................,..,,...,.........,,3-
Brilliance Control +14 ExpandTargets
Day/l,lightMode SelectionIDAY4N
lGHn 3-22 DisplayProcessed Videos...........................................................
ColorSetting .........
..
ICOLORJ...................... ReduceRadarlnteference ........................,....,............................
Personal --....--.-.....-..............3-6s
|nformation........................................
lnformation
Displayof Navigational ...............,...........,....................3-rz
Futclidl d USER Swltch/ OPTION SwiLh ..............................................
.......3-88
- --......- -.-..,.,..
ODerationof Peiormance monitor..... -..-.....,,......
3-ae
EBL Maneuvering ..............................................s-s5
Set Floating EBL
..---......................
SetectRange{RANGE|...........................-...^..-.. 3-47
Set MaximumRange...
........
........
. ...................................................i-47
aaaaaaaaaaaooaaaaaaaaaooaaaaaaaaoaaaaaa
3.1 FLOWOF OPERATION

Attention
a Do not put anylhingon the operationpanel. lf you put anythinghot on it, it

may be deformed.
a Do nol apply sudden force to the operationpanel, trackballand controls.
Othenuise,some failureor damagemay result.
POWERONAND START
THE SYSTEM
OBSERVEANDADJUST
VIDEO
TUNINGOPERATIONS
ACQUIREAND
MEASUREMENT
DATA
ENDTHEOPERATIONAND
STOPTHESYSTEM
Eachoperationwill be describedin detailbelow.

oaaoaaaaaoaaaaoaaaoaaaaaaoaaaaalaoaaaoa
PowerON and Startthe System''

Attention
o Waitapproximately10 secondsbeforeturningon the poweragain.

I A malfunctionmay occur if the power in the ship is suddenlyintemlptedduring
operationof the radar. In this case,the powershouldbe turnedon again.
lmmediatelyafterthe radar is installed,if the systemis not used for a long time,
or afterthe magnetronis replaced,warm-upthe equipmentin the standby mode
for 20 to 30 minutesbeforesettingit to the transmitmode.
o lf the warm-up time is short, the magnetronmay cause sparks, resulting in an
unstableoscillation.
Start transmission on a short-pulse range and then send long pulses
sequentially. lf the transmissionis unstiablein the meantime,resetthe system
to the standbymode immediatelyand maintainit in the standbymodefor 5 to 10
minutesbeforerestartingthe operation. Repeatthese steps untilthe operation
is stabilized.
3-2
aaaoaaaaoeaoaaoaaaaaoaaaaaaoaaaaaoaaaaa
Gheckthat the ship's mainsare turnedon.

r-n
2 Pressll(""*.lll.
":"
Orangelampon -+
timewillappear.
Thewarm-up
Wait for completion of warm-up

Whenthewarm-uptimeexpires, thewarm-up iimescreendisappears and
tne 8$tttffi: displayon the upper-leftcornerof the radardisplayis
chansedto .&ile$lDlFtrt.
-fr
Press .
FEY/
Theradartransmission andthe scannerstartrotating.
The ,,ttffilffi corneron the radardisplayis changed
on theupper-left
to.td4i{$ll!it::.
Attention: Even if is presseduefore r:$f.*trtDBlf?,.l

is disptayed,radar
@
transmission is not performed.
The method of transmission in case of emerqencv.
1 Gheckthat the ship's mainsare turnedon.
Press
Orangelampon -->
The warm-uptime will appear.
3
-fl
A push of thetsT6'i/ 5 secondsor more vanishesthe display
of warm-up time.
Theradartransmission startrotating.
andthescanner
cornerontheradardisplayis changed
The f$ilf;itlWli l ontheupper-left
tof;iffi$l$n;ltr].
Note:
ln the momentsag of a power supply,and the caseof an unusual
operationoutbreak,it can transmit,immediatelyafter rebootingthe power
supply.
Pleasedo not use emergenttransmittingoperationexceptthe above,
The life of a magnetronwill be shortenedif the warm-upis not completed.
3-3
aaoaaoaaaaoaaaoalaoaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
ObserveandAdjustVideo ' i " ",
Press to set the rangeto the scale requiredfor

target
observation.
A\
2 Turn the (K I) or monitor brillianceknob.
V
@
Adjust to obtain the clearest targets.
Aftention
o In the AUTO SEA mode,there are cases in which the targetsare not displayed
becausethe sea clutterreturnsare suppressedin a simpleway.
Usethe normal[SEA]controlduringsailingundernormalconditions.
. In the AUTO RAIN mode,thereare cases in which the targetsare not displayed
becausethe rain/snowclutterreturnsaresuppressed in a simpleway.
Usethe manual[RAIN]controlduringsailingundernormalcondilions.
o The AUTOSEAand AUTO RAINmodecannotbe usedconcurrently.lf one is
setto AUTOmode,theotherwillbe setto MANUALmode.
3-4
ooaaaaaaaaaaaoaaoaaaaaaooaaoaoaooaaaaaa
In case of UsinqAUTOSEA/SEMIAUTO:
FIH:
er""@ . Or,whentheFEA buttonon ISTIITTT
@
IMI-NIHflfll
the screen is pressed,AUTOis set. TRACKI SminI
TheAUTOMenuwill appear.
TRAILS
lTffiinl
SEAF-UTdis displayedat the lowerleftof the radar PRocFme-n
screen.
ffiJ
ITre_]
[!!@@ r er"==@. or,whenthe154button
on tMiNtFi*tI
@ TRACKI SminI
the screen is pressed,SEMlAUTOis set. TRAILSlTl5mfi-l
The SEMIAUTOMenuwill appear. PRoclFRdc-n
SEAI is displayedat the lowerleftof the radar
screen.
0
Fffil:
r]:Tl
MlNtffitl
3min I
!![!@ r button TRACK|
eress@. or,pressthelSEA
TRAILS
tTHinl
@ PRoc lPROel
on the screen .
AUTOis released.
Note: WhensettingAUTOSEA/ SEMIAUTO,the AUTORAINis set to the MANUAL

mode. BothAUTOSEAand AUTORAINcannotbe set at the sametime.
3-5
aaf aaa.raaaaaaaa!aaoolaaoaaaooaolaoaora
GAINHHTI]I]
lsETllT:l
EE@ r e."""@. or,presstheMl MiNHHT]
TRACKI 3minI
@ TRAILS
lT5mfil
button on the screen . PROC IFROEN
nruruF[rE is displayed
ontheradar
screen.
6a1pHHtl
tstrAt
r:TI
AUTO is releasedusing the same
procedurethat was used to set it.
mi-Ntmro-l
:
TRACK| 3min I
TRAILSIEsIn-ilI
PRoc ffioel
J-b
aoaoaaaoaaaaaaoaaaaaaaaaaaaoooaaoaaaaao
TuningOperations'.
Attention
When the receiveris detuned,the best video may not be obtainedeven if the
maximumbar graph is displayedon the AUTO TUNEtuningindicator. In this
case,adjustthe [UNE] controlmanuallyso that the bestvideois presented.
Press and select any range scale from 0.125to 96

(or 120)NM.(Thecurrentrangescaleis
displayedat the upper left of the radar
display.)
The rangescalebecomesshorterby -t pressingand longerby

pressing
+
ROTATE
ffi
V
(@
Adjustthe videoto presentthe clearesttargets.

lf thereis no adequatetarget,adjustI|UNE] controlto indicatethe maximum
bargraphon thetumingindicator at the upperleffof the radardisplay.
AUTO
1.
@ I Press@ or,pressMENUA! 2.TUNE

Duttotb fJunruutI auro
"AUTO"in "2.TUNE" will be setand'14![Q['will
appearat the upperleftof theradardisplay.
Repeatthe proceduresup to step 2

in caseof usingAUTOTUNE.
"MANUAL"|n"2.TUNE"will be setand"FUfd'at
the upperlefiof the radardisplaywillchangeto
IMANUAU'andAUTOTUNEmodewill be
cancelled.
o. EXIT
3-7
aaaaaaaaoaaaaaaoaaaaaaaaaaaooaaoooaaaaa
Data
Acquireand Measurement
'BASIC
For detailed operationsfor data acquisitionand measurement,refer to Section 3.4
OPERATIONS" and Section4 "MEASUREMENT OF MNGE AND BEARING'.
Endthe Operationand Stopthe System'' '

{ Drerss'='
f
will end and the scannerwill stop rotating.

The radartransmission
will be changedto ir$fANOSffi:.
TheindicationlilB4ls$l\,i1n1|
[-Maintainthe "STANDBY" modeif radarobservationis restarted

in a I
I relatively
shorttime. can
Observation be restarted
simply by pressing I
I\- merrxsrBYl switch. )
f:t
2 PressllF""*Jll.
":-
The POWERwill be turnedoff. Orangelampoff -+
Note; When "PWR" is lit, data is'being written to internal memory so do not
open the shipboardbreaker.
Also, when turning on the power supply again, be sure that the green
PWRswitch lamp is off beforepressing'PWR'.
3-8
aaaoaaaaaaaoaaaaaaaaaaaaaoaaaaaaaaaaaaa
3.2 MENUCOMPOSITION
The Menusystemof thisradarequipment
consistsof the Mainmenu,Subl menu,Sub2
menuandTestmenu.
GlicklMENUlbuttonon the screen.
MAIN MENU
1.lR
t. I
Eorp EoH
2.TGTENH 2.
Elopp noH 3. INFO
3.PROGESS
4.
5. ARPA
l.FUNCOFF 6.
5.EBL1
7. ISW
Ecenren E orrsrr
6.EBL2 8 EBL MANEUVER
I orrser
EIoENTER 9. SU82MENU
DATA
CODEIN
EXIT EXIT
TESTMENU SU82MENU
1.
2, P
3. ATEST
4.MAG CURRENT
Elorr flon
5.PM
Eorr !or'r
6. ERRORL
7. o
EXIT
o. EXIT
The Main menu consistsof the itemsof signalprocessing

functionsand EBL control,and
otherfunctionsare included the Subl menu.Thevideocolorsettingis includedin the Sub2
in
andSelf-diagnostic
menu.TheTestmenuconsistsof the itemsof inputmonitoring functions.
Note: When the unit is shipped from the factory this is set in "OPT|ON2"or the "MENU" key.
3-9
aao.oaoaaaoaaooaoaaoaaaoaaaaaaoaaoaaaof
A. Main menu
MAIN MENU
1.tR
1 Displayingthe Mainmenu. lorr E ou
2.TGTENH
EoFF n oru
on the S.PROCESS
ClickthelMENUlbutton
screen. 4.FUNCTION
Themainmenuwillappear. l .FU N C OFF
5.EBL1
Icelren !orrser
6.EBL2
norrser
EoENTER
7.
2. Endingthe Mainmenu. 8. SUBl MENU
9. CODEINPUT
Click the lEXlTlbutton
on the
screen.
o. EXTT
The MAIN Menuwill be closed.
B. Subl menu suBl MENU I

I
Displayingthe Subl menu. r.[-- serrNGT--l
-
z.l- LEVET---I
Click the 81 MEN buttonon s. I NAV/MAFIN.o-_-]
the screen. r.[-_-TRAcr--___l
TheSUBl Menuwillappear. s.[ nnpn-- ]
o.f------ pnr--------l
r. t rsw------___l
-l
e.I EeLirANEuvrR
-l
9.T suBzri,rEr.ru
Endingthe Subl menu.
Click the lEXlIlbutton on the

screen.
TheSUBI Menuwill be closed. 0. i EXIT I
Note: When the unit is shipped from the factory this is set in 'OPTION2' or the
"MENU"key.
3- 10
aaaaaoaaaaooaaaaoaaaaaaaaaaoaaaaaaoaaaa
C.Sub2Menu
t sTJB2MENU ]
Displayingthe Sub2 menu. ---E6[GR----___-]
r. f
then
Press |MENO, 81 MEN and
82 MEN or press lMENUl,

then
mENUland
IMENO.
The Sub2Menuwill appear.
2. EndingtheSub2menu.
o. I EXIT
uL
PresslExtrorlnrtett
The Sub2Menuwill be closed.
D. Test menu
Displayingthe Test menu. TESTMENU
PANEL
clickFFSi.
ARPA
TheTESTMenuwill appear. 4.MAG CURRENT
Elorp D oN
5.PM
@orr D ou
OGGING
Endingthe Subl menu. INFO
cticklbfln or hltEttuL
The TEST Menuwill be closed.
3-11
aaaoaaaaaaaaoaaaaoaaaaoaaaaaoooaaoaaaaa
3.3 PREPARATION
Tuning[TUNE]
A
V
@
Thiscontrolis usedto tunethe receiver.
lf the receiveris detunedfrom the best level,the receivingsensitivityfalls,and the targetson a long
rangeor the smalltargetson a shortrangemaybe overlooked.
In manualtuning,rotatethe IIUNE] controlclockwiseor anticlockwiseand adjustso that the target
echoesare the clearest. lf no suitabletarget is present,adjustthe controlso that the tuning
indicator bargraphat the upperleftof the radardisplayis maximized.
After settingthe radar to the TRANSMITmode, it take about 10 minutesuntil the oscillation
frequencyof the magnetronis stabilized.Therefore,tune the receiveronce againafterabout 10
minutes.
Forautomatic tuning,set "TUNE"to "ON"in theAUTOMenu. (Referto page3-8).
SensitivityGontrolIGAINI
A
V
@
Thiscontrolis usedto controlthe radarreceivingsensitivity.
Clockwiserotation of the [GAIN] control increasesreceivingsensitivityand extends the radar
obseryationrange. lf the sensitivityis too high, the receivernoise will increaseto reducethe
contrastof the targetswith the backgroundvideoand makethe targetsobscureon the display. To
observe densely crowded targets or the targets on a short range, rotate the [GAIN] control
anticlockwise to reducethe sensitivityso that the tiargeisare easy to observe. Be carefulnot to
overlooksmalland important targets.
DisplayBrillianceGontrol
Thiscontrolis usedto adjustthe brilliance

of the entiredisplay.
Clockwiserotationof the [BRlLLlcontrol increases the brillianceof the entiredisplay. Adjustthe
IBRILL]controlto obtainthe best-to-seedisplaywithoptimumbrilliance.
3-12
oaaaaaaaaaaaoaaaaaf aoaaaoaaaaaaaaaaaoao
ContrastGontrolIBRILLVIDEO]
The contrastof the radarvideo displaycan be adjustedin four levels.Pressthe PANELbuttonon

the screen,then selectPiDFd. Eachlime the brilliancebutton G is clicked,the screenwill switch
to VIDEO C-O*O-*O . The cunentmode is displayedon the lowerrightof the radar
screen.(The VIDEOindicationwill changeto the PANELindicatedin severalsecond.) Adiustthe
[BRILLVIDEO]switchto obtainthe best-to-seevideowith optimumcontrast.
Attention
In the AUTOSEA mode,thereare casesin whichthe targetsare not displayed

in a simpleway.
becausethe sea clutterreturnsare suppressed
Usethe manual[SEA]controlduringsailingundernormalconditions.
In the AUTORAINmode,thereare casesin whichthe targetsare notdisplayed
becausethe rain/snowolutterreturnsaresuppressed in a simpleway.
Usethe manual[SEA]controlduringsailingunder normal conditions.
SeaClutterSuppression[SEA]
A
V
@
This controlis used to reducethe receivingsensitivityon a short rangeto suppressthe sea clutter
returns.
Clockwiserotationof the [SEA] control can suppresssea clutter returns more effectively. Be
carefulnot to suppresssea clutterexcessively.Otheruise,smallbuoysand boatsmay disappear
fromlhe radardisplay.
When setting"SEA"to "SEAFUTd' , sea clutterreturnscan be suppressed dependingon their
intensitylevels. This settingis used for the case in which the sea clutterreturnsare differentin
theirdirections.
Switchingbetweenmanualand autois doneby clickingthe "SEAAUTO"/ "SEMIAUTO' buttonon
'SEA" knob.
the lowerleft of the screen,or pressingthe
Note: lt is not allowed to use both the AUTO / SEMI AUTO SEA mode and the AUTO
RAIN mode at the same time.
3- 13
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaoaJooaaaaaaaoaaaaoaaaaaaa
Rain/SnowGlutterSuppressionIRAIN]
A
V
@
This control is used to suppressrain or snow clutter returns. Clockwiserotationof the [RAIN]
control makes clearer those targets that may be hidden among rain/snowclutter returns. Be
carefulnot to overlooksmalltargetsin lhe clutter. This controlalso has the effect of reducingsea
clutter,so that it is moreeffectiveto use this controltogetherwiththe [SEA]control.
Rotatethe controlaniiclockwise to the maximumin the normalcondition.
WhensettingISEA/RAINI to AUTO RAlNlin the AUTO Menu,rain/snowcluttercan be suppressed
dependingupon the intensitylevel. When setlingFE MiN] to FAr'luEL] in the AUTO Menu,the
modeis changedintothe MANUALmode.
Switching betweenmanualand autois doneby clickingthe "RAINBUIq'button on the lowerleftof
the screen,or pressingthe "RAIN"knob.
Notel lt is not allowed to use both the AUTO RAIN mode and AUTO SEA mode at the
same time.
BrillianceGontrol
Press[emrel]. Or pressthe @ rightsideof "PANEL"on the screen.
The BRILLIANCE switches[PANEL],IBRILLVIDEO],and [BRILLARPA]are used to adjustthe

brillianceof the panel,video and ARPA markers. Each time a switchis pressed,the brillianceis
increasedby one levelup to 4 or 5levels. When the maximumlevelis reached,the brillianceis
resetto theoriginalpanel.
IPANEL] Adjuststhe lightingfor the characterson the controlsand switcheson the

panel.
operational
wnen lffigLl on the screenis pressed,the adjustmentstatusof "BRILL
VIDEO"and"BRILLARPA'arechanged.
Then,eachof the levelscan be set if the brilliancelevelbuttonon the rightis
pressed.
VTDEOI
IBRTLL of radardisplay.
Adjuststhe brilliance
ARPA]
[BRILL of ARPAinformation
Adjuststhe brilliance
Controlby MenuOperation
Brilliance
IRANGE RINGAI Adjuststhe brillianceof the fixedrangescale.
lvRMl Adjuststhe brillianceof the variablerangescale(VRMI andVRM2).
IEBLI Adjuststhe brillianceof electronicbearingcursor(EBLI and EBL2).
[CHARACTER] Adjuststhe brilliance of characters.
3-14
aaaaaaaaaaaaooaaooaaaaaaaaoaaaaaoaaaaoa
1 Glickthe IMEN0on the screen.or pressttreloFTloM button.
The MainMenuwillappear.
Glick UB1 MENU
TheSubl Menuwill appear.
3 clickfvE!.
The LEVELMenuwillappear.
Click the level setting section of GE RIN

.RANGERIN will be selectedandthefollowingpull-downmenuwill
appear.
SUB1MENU
LEVEL
4.LEVEL4 E
4.LEVEL4 Ul
6ARPA
FrEvel.sul
T.BUZZER
D.LEVEL7----F
3-15
aaaaaaaaaaaaooaaoaaaaaoaaaaaoaaaaaoaoaa
5 Selectany levelfrom 1 to 4 for RANGERINGSbrilliancein

the pull-down menu and press it.
valueissettoF'IEVEL4I.
Thedefault
6 Clickthe levelsettingsectionof FRE
will be selectedandthe followingpull-downmenuwillappear.

P.VRMI
SUB1MENU
LEVEL
l.RANGERINGS
3.EBL l.LEVELI
2.LEVEI2
4. 3.LEVEL3
5.VIDE
6ARPA
s.LEVEL5 -
T.BUZZER
't. 7
o. EXIT
Selectany level from 1 to 4 for VRM (VRMI and VRM2)

brilliancein the pulldown menu and press it.
Thedefaultvalue is set to |4.LEVEL4|.
3- 16
aaaaaaoaaaaaaaaaoaooaaoaaaaaoaoaaaaoaao
8 Glickthe levelsettingsectionof IFB!.
will be selectedand thefollowingpull-downmenuwillappear.

I3.EBU
SUBI MENU
LEVEL
l.RANGERINGS
4.LEVEL4 ffi
2.VRM
E
4 l.LEVELl
2.LEVEL2
3.LEVEL3
s.LEVELs F-
7. E
o. EXIT
Selectthe brightness of the electronic cursor (EBL1,EBL2)

from the pull-down menu,select 1 through 4 with the
trackball,then click.
Thedefaultvalueis set to
3-17
aaaoaoaaaaaooaaaaoaaoaaaaaaaaaaoaaaaaaa
10 Glick the level setting section of
will be selectedandthe followingpull-downmenuwillappear.
SUBI MENU
LEVEL
l.RANGERINGS
4.LEVEL4
2.VRM
4.LEVEL4
3.EBL
4,LEVEL4
T.BUZZER
7 7
o. EXIT
11 Selectthe characterbrightnessfrom the pull-down menu,

and set 1 through 4.
The defaullvalueis set to
3-18
aoaaaaoaooaaaoaoataaaoaooaf aaaoaaoaaaaa
12 Cllckthe levelsettingsectionof MiEEd
.VIDEO(ECHOwill be selectedandthe followingpull-downmenuwill

appear.
SUBI MENU
LEVEL
LEVEL
.LEVEL
4.CHARACTER
4
EXIT
aaaaaoolaaoaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaoaaaaaaaaaaa
13 Selectthe echo brightnessfrdm the pulldown menu, and set

1 through4.
Thedefaultvalueis setto | 4.LEVEL4

I.
1 4 Glick the level setting section of Anpa
FFRFX wittbe selectedand the followingpull-downmenuwill appear.
SUB1MENU
EVEL
l.MNGE RINGS
2.VRM
4.LEVEL4
3.EBL
4
4.CHARACTER
s.vrDEg(EeHp)_--_-_.-
| 4.LEVEL4 El
1 5 Selectthe ARPAbrightnessfrom the pulldown menu,and

set 1 through 5.
The defaulivalue is sei to I S.LEVEL4|
3-20
aaaaaaoaaaaaoaaaaaaoaaaoaaaooaaoaaaoaaa
Afterthe brilliance
levelsare adjusted,
the followingmenuwill appear.
SUBlMENU
L
1.MNGERINGS
4.LEVEL4
2.VRM
4.LEVEL4
3,EBL
4.LEVEL4
4.CHAMCTER
4,LEVEL4
S.VIDEO
4.LEVEL4
6.ARPA
5,LEVEL4
T.BUZZER
7.LEVEL7
o. EXIT
The menudisplayafteradjustment
showsthe levelvaluesset for the individual
items.
brilliance
Glick IEXITl.
The Subl Menuwillreappear.
GlickEiTl
TheSubl Menuwillbe closed.
levelsaresaveddepending
Theseset brilliance uponthe Day/Nightmode.
3-21
oaoaaaaaaaaaaaoaaaaoaaaaaoaaoaaf oaaaaao
Day/NightModeSelectionIDAY/NIGHTI'
Wheneverthe [DAY/NIGHT] switch is pressed,the mode is changedover from IDTYI --- F-Afa--
N|GHTn --- lNGHTtl and the currentmode is indicatedat the lower rightof the radardisplay. The
brilfiancelevelsselectedfor each mode are saved. For brillianceadjustment,reterto page3 -12.
Forselectionof DAY/NIGHT modeby menuoperation, referto "ColorSetting"on the nextpage.
Golor Setting [COLOR]

The colorsof the Day/Nightmode [Day1,2/N|GHT1,2], system,backgroundcolor outsidethe
bearingscale,background colorinsidethe bearingscale,echoes,characters,
dials,ownship'strack,
and radartrailsareset up.
ColorAdjustmentby MenuOperalion
IDAY/NtGHTI of DAY/NIGHT
Register mode
ISYSTEMI Systemcoloradjustment
louTER PPrl Adjustmentof the background coloroutsidethe bearingscale
INNERPP|l Adjustmentof the background colorinsidethe bearingscale
[CHARACTER] Adjustmentof charactercolors
lDrALl Adjustmentof dialcolor
lEcHol Adjustmentof echo colors
ITRATLSI Adjustmentof the colorof radartrails
lowN TRACKI Adjustmentof the colorof own ship'strack
[@@ll 1 GtickthelMENulon
thescreen.
The Main Menuwill appear.
Click 81 MENU
TheSubl Menuwillappear.
Click UB2 MEN
The Sub2Menuwill appear.
4 ClickICOLORI
TheCOLORMenuwillappear.
3-22
aaaaooaaoaaaoaaoaaaaooaaaaaaoooaaoaoooa
Left-clickthe selectionsection(comboUoxlotlDaVlttteil
be selectedand thefollowingpull-down
11.DAY/NIGHTIwill menuwill appear.
SUB2MENU
COLOR
4.INNER
PPI
.BLACK
5.CHARACTER
tltrvHrrE----El
6.DI,AL l.WHITE
7.E l.YELLOW
S.TRAILS
1.SKY
g,OWNTRACK
o. EXIT
Selectthe Day/Nightmode from the pull-down menu, select 1

through 4 with the trackball,then left-click.
aaaaaaaoaraaoaaaaaaaaaaooaaoaaoaaaaoaaa
7 Left-clickthe selectionsection (combo box) of ISYSTEMI
FSySTEM will be selectedandthefollowingpull-downmenuwillappear.
SUB2 MENU
COLOR
l,DAY/NIGHT
5.CHARACTER
6.DIAL l.tvHtTE
7.ECHO ow
S.TRAILS
ll.sKY E
g.OWNTRACK
o. EXIT
Selectthe Systemcolor from the pull-down menu,select 1

3-24
oaaaaaaoaotaaooaoaaaooaaoaaaoataoaaaaoo
9 Left-clickthe selection section (combo box) of DUTER PP-i
B.OUTERPPllwillbe selectedandthe followingpull-downmenuwill appear.
SUB2MENU
I.DAY,/NIGHT
tt"oF------El
2.SYSTEM
4.tN
Ir.wHrrE El
6.DIAL l.WHITE
7.EC I.YELLOW E
S.TMILS
ti-ER----E
g.OWNTRACK
I.SKY El
o. EXIT
10 Selectthe backgroundcolor outside the bearingscale from

the pull-downmenu,select1 through3 with the trackball,
then left-click.
3-25
aoaaaaaaaaaaaaoaaaaaaoaaaoaaaaaooaaaaao
1'l Left-clickthe selectionsection(comboboxl otllttNeR*Fp'tl

Ft-ruNenpHl willbe selectedandthefollowingpull-downmenuwill appear.
SUBzMENU
COLOR
I.DAYINIGHT
I.DAY
2.SYSTEM
llBLUEI-EI
3.OUTERPPI .
l,BLACK
5.
S.TRAILS
1.SKY
g.OWNTRACK
1.SKY
o. EXIT
12 Selectthe backgroundcolor inside the bearingscale from

the pull-down menu, select 1 through 3 with the trackball,
then left-click.
3-26
oaoaaaaoaaaaaaaaaaaaooaooaaaaaaoaaaaoaa
13 Left-clickthe selectionsection (combo box) of HARA
will be selectedandthefollowingpulFdown
menuwillappear.
SUBzMENU
COLOR
I.DAY/NIGHT
2.SYSTEM
F.e-LU-Er----El
S.OUTER PPI
l,BLACK
4.INNERPPI
l,BLACK
S.TRAILS
F=r<v------El
g.OWNTRACK
lr=w------Et
o. EXIT
14 Selectthe charactercolor from the pull-downmenu, select 1

3-27
oaaooaaaaoaaaaaoaaaaooaaaaooaaaaaoaaaaa
15 Left-clickthe selectionsection (combo box) of lDlA!
will be selectedandthefollowingpull-downmenUwillappear.
l6.DlAU
SUBzMENU
COLOR
1,DAY,/NIGHT
l,DAY
2.SYSTEM
1,BLUE1
S.OUTER PPI
l.BLACK
4.INNERPPI
l.BLACK
s.CHARACTER
l.WHITE
g.OWNTRACK
tl.sKY El
16 Selectthe dial color from the pulldown menu, select 1

3-28
aoaaaaaoaaaaaaaoaaaaaaaaoaaaooaoaaaaooo
17 Left-clickthe setectionsection(combofox) otEEtld,
FECHd wi|tbe selectedand the followingpull-downmenuwill appear.
SUBzMENU
COLOR
1.DAY/NIGHT
FDN El
2.SYSTEM
ll.B-LU-m--E]
3.OUTERPPI
l.BLACK
4.INNERPPI
l.BLACK
5.CHARACTER
l.WHITE
8.
l.SKY
o. ExIT
Selectthe echo color from the pull-down menu,select 1

aaaaaooaalaaaaaaf oaaaaaoaaaaooaaaoataaa
19 Left-clickthe selectionsection (combo box) of FRAILSI
willbe selectedandthefollowingpull-downmenuwillappear.
lS.TRAlLq
SUB2MENU
COLOR
1.DAY,/NIGHT ---El
i15F--
2.SYSTEM
s.ourenPPI
l1.BLA0( El
4.INNER
PPI
5.CHARACTER
l.WHTTE
z.ecso[.ver-r-ow--E
20 Selectthe radartrails colors from the pulldown menu,select

1 through 3 with the trackball,then left-click.
3-30
oaooof aaoaaaooaoooaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
21 Left-clickthe selectionsection (combo box) of

TRAC
.OWNTRAC will be selectedandthe followingpulldownmenuwillappear.
SUBzMENU
COLOR
.DA
PPI
3.OUTER
1
l.BLACK
5.CHARACTER
l.WHITE
l.
T.ECHOIl.YELLOW
EI
E.TRAILS
1.Stff
Selectthe own track colors from the pull-down menu,select

1 through 6 with the trackball,then left-click.
3-31
aaaaaoaaaaaoaaaaaoaaaaooaaaaaaaoaaoaaao
After the colors are adjusted,the following menu will appear.
SU82MENU
COLOR
I.DAY,/NIGHT
l-i5iF------E
2.SYSTEM
1.BLUE1
S.OUTER PPI
l,BLACK
4.INNERPPI
l.BLACK
S.CHARACTER
l.
T.ECHoJl.YELLowEl
E.TRAILS
1.SKY
g,OWNTMCK
I.SKY S
o. EXTT
The menu display after adjustmentshows the colors set for

individual items.
GlicklEFfl.
TheSub2Menuwill reappear.
cticklExrl.
TheSub2Menuwillbe closed.
3-32
aaooaoaaaaaaaaoaaaaoooaaaaaaoaaaaoaaaaa
RadarInterferenceRejection(l RI .
Left-clickttrelO IRl.This switchselectsONIOFF.
o When setting from the menu

I GrickMENUI.
The MainMenuwill appear.

-.l.
Glick "ON" radio button of [lR
"ON"in"1.lR"will
be set.
Then,thernrrr l6lR-lat thelowerleftof theradardisplaywillbeshownand

the radarinterference
in turnedon.
MAIN MENU
1.tR
Eorr EoN
2.TGTENH
Eorp noN
3,PROCESS --El
tzPRocr
4,FUNCTION
llruNc oFF---El
5.EBL1
EcerureRE oppser
6.EBL2
E cenrenn orrser
-l
z.[- oernorr
r 8. I SUBI MENU
9, I CODEINPUT I
EXIT
1 Click"OFF"radiobuttonof l-ln I .
"OFF"in"1
.lR"issetandthe radarintllrf"r"n"" rejecterturnedoff.
clicklExtr.
The MainMenuwillbe closed.
Attention
o Whenwatchinga radarbeaconor a SARTsignal,set the followingparameter
to
suppressthevideo.
lR OFF(lnterference
RejecterOFF).
3-33
aaaaaaaaaaaaoaaaaoaa aaaoaaaaooaaaoaaaaa
3.4 BASICOPER/AIIONS
MoveGrossCursorMark[+] by Trackball'' ' '
Trackball
Trackball section Trackballsection

left button right button
Scrollbutton
No used
The crosscursormark[+] is usedfor positiondesignation and otherpurposesin variousoperating

procedures. The crosscursor mark [+] movesin conjunctionwith the trackball. lf the trackballis
rotatedup and downor left and right,the crosscursormarkfollowsthe movementsof the trackball.
The distanceand bearingbetweenown ship and the cross cursor mark [+] are indicatedon the
upperrightof the radardisplay. Beforeoperatingothercontrolsand switches,the operatormustbe
familiarwith manipulation of the trackballand the movementsof the cross cursormark. When
rotatingthe trackball,the cross cursor mark [+l will not move if the palm is apart from the hand
sensorsection. Approachthe palmto the handsensorsectionandoperatethe trackball.
the "+" cursorwillchangeto

Whenmakinga menuor buttonselection,
"rro* \
Click: In thismanual,"clicking" refersto pressingthetrackballbutton.
Left-bufton= This is called"left-clicking".
Methodsfor SettingMenultemswith the Trackball'' ' '

In additionto the methodfor settingmenuitemswiththe switches,thetrackballcan alsobe usedto
setmenuitemsin almostthe samemanneras withthe controlpanel.
Thereare severalmethodsfor settingan itemin a menuwiththe trackball.
3-U
aaaaooaooaaaaaaaaaaaaaooaaaaaaaaaaaooaa
I I I Changethe Settingof RadioButtonType

When an ilem has alternativeselections,for example,ON and OFF, radio buttons are
providedto set the itemin manymenuitems.
oIoN ll|o"
Whenthe cunentitemis set in the OFFpositionas shownin FigureO,
@[q"- OFF
Movethe arow cursorto the ON positionwiththetrackball.
@R"-
With the arrowcursoron the ON position,pressthe left buttonof the trackball.
@ffio*
__-_1)
The SettingwillchangefromOFFto ON.
WhenchangingfromONto OFF,operatein thesamemanner.
3-35
oooaaaaaoaaaaaaaaaaaaoaaaaaaaoaaaaaaoa
I II I Changingthe Setting of Pull-down Menu

This methodis usedwhen thereare threeor moreselections:
O WhenPROCIis setas shownbelow:
2.PROCI lv
@ Movethe anow cursorto the positionthat is shownbelow(downwardtriangle).
@ Set the arrowcursoron the positionin Figureas shownbelowand pressthe left buttonon
the trackball.
@ The pull-downmenuwill appearandselectionitemsare displayedin the menu.
3. PROC2
4. PROC3
@ Movethecursorwiththe trackball.
2. PROC1
@ Set the cursoron the itemto be selectedand pressthe left-buttonon the trackball.
@ The pull-down
menuwill be closedandthe settingis established.
3 .P R O C 2 lv
J-JO
aa aa aaaoaaaaaoaaaoaaaaoaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
tEl Changingthe Settingof Pull-downMenu

This methodcan be usedin mostof boxeswherea numericvalueis to be entered.
^l
(D o.o-roo.orts 10.0 V
When the valueis set as shownin the figureO:
The minimumandmaximum(min-max) on the Ieftsideandthe unitis also
aredisplayed
displayedif present.
.A.,
@ o.o-1oo.okts 10.0 V
To increasethe value, move the arrow cursor to the positionin the figure @ (upward
triangle)withthetrackball.
10.0 a\,
@ o.o-ioo.okts Y
With the arrowcursoron the positionin the figure @, click the trackballsectionleft button
once.
^l.
@ o.o-ioo.okts 10.1 V
The valuewill be increasein the minimumstep.
@ fo increasethe valuecontinuously:
Holddown the trackballsectionleft buttonin the figure @.
@ To decreasethe value:
Movethe arrowcursorto lhe downwardtrianglein thefigure@.
The followingprocedures arethe sameas for increasing.
3-37
aaaaaaoaaaaaaaaaooaaaoaoaaooaaaoaooaaao
[Ml Ghangingthe Setting of Pull-downMenu

Thismethodis usedwhena numberof itemshavealternative of ON andOFF in
selections
one menu.(ln thiscase,onlyone itemis presented.)
O T NAV LINE
Thestatusin the figureO meansthatthe itemis OFF.
@ l\d
-\>
NAV LINE
Movethe arrowcursorto the positionin the figure@ withthetrackball.
@ NAV LINE
lR.l
------\)
With the arrow cursoron the positionin the figure @, press the trackballseclionleft
button.
@ ffi r.rnvLINE
andthefunclionwillbe turnedon.
A checkmarkwillappearin thecheckbox
Toturnoff the function:

Withthe checkboxand arrowcursorpositionas shownin the figure@, pressthe
leftbutton.
section
trackball
3-38
aoaaoaaaaooaaaaoaataaaaaaaoooaoaaoaaaaa
[V] Switch Type

the currentmenuto the next.
Thismethodis used,for example,in switching
o SUB1MENU
A menuhas an itemas presentedin the figureO.
t:l
@ I suBl MEN\!
| \\ ||
\2
Movelhe arrowcursorto the positionin the figure@ withthe trackball.
@ I-_\) suerMENH
I
With the arrowcursorover SUB1MENU , pressthe trackballsectionleft
button.
@ fne Subl Menuwillappear.
In some selectionsof this type, the key color will changein the step @ enteringa
certainmode.
Toresetthe setting,selectthe sameitemagain.
Example:SelectNAV/MAPINFOMenu"SHlFT".
NAVSHIFTmode
3-39
aoaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaoaaaooaaaaaaaaa
[VIl Vertical Scroll Type

The displayis scrolledvertically.
Thismethodis mainlyusedfor functionssuchas displayof a storedfile.
O
**** A
**,F trr
,t* \
Theverticalscrollbaris providedin a menuas shownin thefigureO.
****
**d.
rl. *
Whenscrollingthe display,movethe anow cursorto the positionin the figure(upward

triangle)withthetrackball.
****
*rFrt
**
With the arrow cursoron the positionin the figure @, click the trackballsectionleft
button.
td(*
** Scrollto the Upperitem.
******
displayupward:
@ Toscrollcontinuously.the
sectionleftbuttononthetrackballinthefigure@.
Holddownthetrackball
@ Toscrollthe displaydownward:
trianglein thefigure@.
Movethearrowcursorto thedownward
procedures
Thefollowing arethesameas fortheupwardscrofl.
340
aoaaoaaaaoaaaoooaaaaaaaoaaaaooaootooaaa
Use EBLs(ElectronicBearingLines)
The EBLs (ElectronicBearing Lines) are indispensableto measure distrancesand bearings of
targets.
Beforeoperation,the operatormustbecomefamiliarwiththe operationof EBLs.
EBL1Operation
lf EBL2is selected,0r"". (ili) to selectEBL1beforeoperation. (Thecurently selectedEBLis
indicatedby selectedcharactersin the lowerrightof the radardisplay.)
Press
@r
tl EBL1willbe displayed
in reversevideo.
Press
% EBL'lwilldisappear.
341
aaaaaaaaoaaaaaaaoaoataaooaaoaaaaaaaalaa
lf EBL1is selected,0r"., (il) to selectEBL2beforeoperation. (ThecurrentlyselectedEBL is
indicatedby charactersin the lowerrightof the radardisplay.)
Press
@r
tl
EBL2will be displayed
in reversevideo.
Press
P_l EBL2willdisappear.
EBL Bearinq Displav

The bearingvaluesof EBL1and EBL2currentlydisplayedwithinthe PPI video
at the lowerrightof the radardisplay. Forthe currentlyoperable
are indicated
EBL,the characters EBL1or EBL2aredisplayedin reversevideo.
StartinqPoint of EBL
The startingpointof the currentlyoperatingEBL can be changedover to the
centerof the radardisplay(CENTER)or to anyoffsetposition(OFFSET).
Note: For OFFSETof the EBL's starting point, it is possible to determine whether the
starting point is fixed at the specific latitude and longitude.
342
aaaaoaaaaaaaaaaoaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaoaaaa
Set FloatingEBL'
Tooffsetthestartingpointof EBL1duringitsoperation:
l-EBLtl ro37o' fc I
Clickthe rightfigureC. ,'-
. Use the trackballto movethe startingpointof "EBL1".
. The startingpoint can be fixed by clickingthe left trackballbutton.
When adjustingfrom the menu,

MAINMENU
t I I clickMEN-UI. 1.IR
EoH
nopr
The MainMenuwill appear. 2.TUNE
Elopp noH
S.PROOESS
2.PROC1
Click"5.EBL1". 4,FUNCTION
"OFFSET"in "5.EBL1"will be set. 1,FUNCOFF
5.EBL1
n oprser
E cerureR
6.EBL2
Movethestartingpointof EBL1withthetrackball. E cenreRE oppser
7. DATAOFF
Clickthe trackballsectionleft buttonto fix the startingpoint
8. 1 MENU
of EBL1.
9. CODEINPUT
To resetthe startingpointof EBL1to thecenterof the radar o. EXIT

display.
Click"5.E8L1".
'CENTER"
in "5.EBL1"
willbe set.
crickFEB!.
The MainMenuwill be closed.
t[ ] Continueto press eaLrf alsoallowyouto setthe startingpointof EBL1.

I
topress
Continue "OFFSET"
in "5.EBL1"
willbe set.
?
'CENTER'in "5.EBL1"will be set.
Continueto press
Note: For OFFSETof the EBL's starting point, it is possible to determine whether the
starting point is fixed at specific latitudeand longitude.
3-43
aaoaaaaoaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaoaaaalaaoaaooa
Tooffsetihe startingpointof EBL2duringits operation:
MAINMENU
I I ] clickIMENUI
.
1.IR
The MainMenuwill appear. florr Eon
2.TGTENH
Eopr noN
3.PROCESS
Click"6.EBL2".
ROCI
"OFFSET"in "6.EB12"will be set. 4.FUNCTION
l.FUNCOFF
5.EBL1
ElceureRlorrser
pointof EBL2withthe trackball.
Movethe strarting 6.EBL2
Ecenren [orrser
Clickthe trackballsectionleftbuttonto fix the startingpoint
7. DATA OFF
of EBL2.
8. SUB1MENU
9. cooE
To resetthe startingpointof EBL2to the centerof the radar
display. o. EXIT
Click"6.EB12".
'CENTER'in "6.E8L2"will be set.
.
Click|0.EBU
TheMainMenuwillbeclosed.
tI I to press
Continue pointof EBL2.
alsoallowyouto setthestarting
La|
"OFFSET"in "6.EBL2"will be set.
"CENTER'in "6.EBL2"will be set.
3-44
aaaaaaaaaaaaoaaoaaaaaaaaoaaaaooaaaaaaaa
Set FloatingEBL
When this functionis turned on and the startingpoint of EBL is moved to a position,the starting
pointcan be fixed at the latitudeand longitudeof that position. This functionis effectivewhenthe
bearingfrom a certainpointis repeatedlymeasured.
With this functionOFF,the startingpointof EBL is pastedon the radar display. Whenown shiois
moved,the startingpointwill remainat the samepointon the display.
'MENU', "SETT!NG1",
Selectin the followingorder:"MENU',
and "SETT|NG2".
The SETTING2Menuwillappear.
Glick L OFFSETORIGI
The EBLOFFSETORIGINmenuwillappear.
fi Setting the Mode when the EBL1StartingPoint is Moved
SUB1MENU
Performthe operatingprocedure1 .
The EBLOFFSETORIGINMenuwillappear. SETTING2
"EBL1L/LFIX' is setto the initialmode"OFF". I EBLOFFSETORIGIN I
Whenthe EBL1startingpointis moved,the l EB'1l L/L Flx
startingpointof EBL1willremainat the set Iorr Doru
2.EBL2ULFIX
positionon the radardisplay. Iorr EoH
Select the "ON" radio button.
"EBL1UL FlX"willswitchfrom"OFF"to "ON".
Whenthe EBLI startingpointis movedto
anotherposition,the startingpointof EBL1will
be fixedat the latitudeand longitudeon that
position.
Select "OFF',
Placethe cursoroverthe "OFF.radiobutton, o. EXIT
and left-click.
345
aaaoaooaaaaaaoaaaoaaoaoaaaoaaaaaooaaaoa
n[ Settingthe Mode when the EBUI StartingPoint is Moved
SUB1MENU
Performthe operating procedure1
and 2. SETTING2
The EBLOFFSETORIGINMenuwill appear. EBL OFFSETORIGIN

"EBL2UL FIX' is setto the initialmode"OFF". l.EBLl L,/LFIX
Whenthe EBL2startingpointis moved,the

Iorr Doru
2.EBL2L/L FIX
startingpointof EBL2will remainat the set oFF noru
positionon the radardisplay.
Select the "ON" radio button.

"EBt2 UL FlX"willswitchfrom"OFF"to "ON".
Whenthe EBL2startingpointis movedto another
position,the startingpointof EBL2will be fixedat
the latitudeand longitudeon that position.
Left-clickthe "OFF" radio button.

The settingwillswitchfrom"ON"to'OFF". o. EXIT
clickffi.
The SETTING2Menuwill reappear.
Glick
lExtr.
TheSETTING2Menuwill be closed.
Notes . The course data and the own ship's latitude and longitude data are required
to activatethis function.
With this function ON, the starting point will be returned to the center if the
starting point of EBL is moved to outside the radar display.
346
aaaaaaaaaaoaaaaaaaaaooaaoaaaaaoaaaaaooa
SelectRangeIRANGEI
Rangescale(NM)
,*,,
l-{12
f---2
l+l
-*__l
t
Rangemarker(NM)
Any rangescaleis selectablefrom0.125,0.25,0.5,0.75,1.5,3,6, 12,24,48' and96 (or 120)

nauticalmiles.
,-
Pressing [ - J decreasesthe range and pressing| # | increasesthe range in each step.
The selectedrangescaleis indicatedat the upperleftof the displaytogetherwith the rangering
intervalwith it.
Set MaximumRange'
Themaximumrangeavailablemaybe setto 96nmor 120nm.
Select in the following order:

"MENU","MENU",and "
"1.SETT|NG1 SUBI MENU
SETTINGT
l.SET GYRO
TheSETTINGImenuwillappear. o.o-35e.e'
t----ooEl
2.SELECTSPEED -E
Select radio button of "8.RANGE ElAXrs
SELEGT". 3. I SET MANUALSPEED
Eachtimethisswitchis pressed,
the 4. SELECTNAV
maximumrangeis changedbetween96 nm or 5.
1 2 0n m . 6. Y
7.PRF
Note: When the maximum range is set to 120nm,the next EniGF-E
range of 48nm is 120nm and so the range of 96nm S.RANGESELECT
cannot be selected. [96nm [120nm
9. SETNNG2
.
cricklExrTl o. EXTT
TheSubl Menuwill reappear.
clicklExltr.
The Subl Menu will be closeo.
347
aaaaaaaaaooaaaaoaaaaaaaf aaaaaaaaaoaoaao
SelectPulseLength .. .. '
Ptacethe cursoroverthe ITSE, and left-click.
The transmissionpulse lengthcan be changedover in three levels ( fJLSpl , F-l*l-rr,reJ, ano

n _[-lt-el ) everytime the [PL] switchis pressed. The selectedpulselengthis indicatedat the
upperleftof the radardisplay. The pulselengthcan be changedonlywhenthe rangeis set to one
of 0.75,1.5,3, and 6 and 12!1V1.f fJlSPi is selected,the rangeresolution
increases,
making
smalltargetsclearer. f f J ILPJ is selected,the rangeresolutiondecreases,but lhe sensitivity
increases, makingsmalltargetslargerwithhigherdefinition.
SelectBearingDisplayMode[AZlMODEI'' '
The bearingpresentation modeis changedoverin the orderof INORTHUP] (truebearing),[HEAD
UPI (relativebearing),and [COURSEUP] (course-upbearing)modeeverytime the [AZl MODE]
switchis pressed.Whenthe currentlyselectedmodeis North-upor Course-up, it will be changed
overto Head-upby pressing thisswitch,andto anothermodeby pressing
thisswitchonceagain.
RM H UP_+PM11gp---RMC UP--RMH UP
(Example)
r>FUFI
II
I lN uPl
t:t
Llc uPl
The Bearing Mode [NORTHUPI

The videois displayedso thatthe zenithof the PPI (0" on rangerings)pointsto the
due north. Fixedtargetsdo not flickerand are easilyidentifiedon a chart,and the
truebearingof a targetcan readilybe readout.
RelativeBearing Mode IHEADUPI

The videois displayedso thatthe ship'sheadinglinepointsto the zenithof the PPI
(0' on rangerings). Sincetargetsare displayedin theirdirectionsrelativeto the
ship'sheadingline,the operatorcan watchthe videoin the samefieldof viewas in
operatingthe shipat sea.
Thismodeis suitablefor oceansailingandfor watchingoverotherships
348
aaaaaoaaaaaoaaaaoaaaaooooaoaoaaoaoaaao
Mode[GOURSE
Gourse-Up UPI
By pressingthis switch,the ship'sheadingline is fixedpointingto the zenithof the
PPI (0'on rangerings). In the sameway as in the North-upmode,fixedtargetsdo
even if the ship is yawing. The bearingof the heading
not flicker,but are strabilized
line varies by the same shift of own ship's course. lf the course is changed,the
headingline can be reset to the Course-upmode by pressingthe switch several
times.
North
North-uoMode Head-upMode
GancelShip's HeadingLine [HL OFF]
The ship'sheadingline(HL)that presentsthe courseof own shipis alwaysdisplayedon the radar

display. The headinglineis canceledwhilelhis switchis beingpressed,so thatthe targetson the
headinglinescan be seeneasily.
CancelAll Displayltems ExceptRadarEcho,VRM,EBL, HL,

' ' r' '
RR,and Cross Gursor Mark [+l [DATAOFF]
All display informationsuch ARPA vectors, symbols and navigationdata may be cancelled
temporarilyby the following exceptRadarecho,VRMs,EBLs,HL,and crosscursormark
operations,
[+] andrangerings.
@ 1 thescreen.
ctickmENUlon
The MAINMenuwillappear.
349
aoaaaaaaaooaaaaooooaaaaoalaaaaoaaaoaaaa
2 GlickE7\rAEFE. MAIN MENU
All the displayitemsexceptradardisplay, I.IR

VRMs,EBLs,HL,crosscursormark[+] and
!oFF Eoru
z.TUNE
rangeringswilldisappearfromtheradar Eorr noN
display. 3.PROCESS
4.FUNCTION
l .FU N C OFF
!@@ 1 GrickE-ArAoFF 5.EBL1
Eonfe orflwill be resetand,the EoENTEREorpser
information
temporarily
cancelled
will 8.EBL2
reappeaL EIoENTER
EOrrser
7.
cticklExi. 8. SUB1MENU
The Main Menu will be closed. 9. CODEINPUT
EXIT
DisplayPl (Parallellndex Lines)IPll' '
Parallelindexlinescanbe displayedin a semicircular

area.
[@@l| 1 ctickthe lEl on thescreen.

PI
The Pl Menuwillappear. l.MODE
Elopp Eot't
Select"ON" radio buftonof '1.1R". 0. EXIT
"ON"in "1.MODE"will be setandparallel
indexlineswill appearon the radardisplay.
Thedirectionof Pl will be changedby rotating
the [EBLIconlrol,andthe lineintervalswill be 1'*d'
t
changedby rotatingthe IVRMIconlrol.
INTERVAL
---
l- **.tlnm
of "1.MODE".
Select'.OFF"
"OFF"in "1.MODE" will be setandthe Pl will
disappearon the radardisplay.
Click IEXITl.
ThePl Menuwillbe closed.
3-50
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaf aaaaaoaaaaaaoaaaaaa
Note: The bearing of the parallel index lines that are displayed in the Pl menu
representsthe true value when the bearing display of the radar reads N UP or C
UP and the relativevalue when it reads H UP.
Operationof ParallelIndex Lines

@ Rotatethe PL (Parallellndex Lines)in the same directionof rotatingthe [EBL]control
(Oand@).
@ The intervalof the Pl can be decreasedas The [VRM]controlis rotiatedanliclockwise
(@ and increasedas the [VRM]controlis rotatedanticlockwise (@).
@ Tne rotationand intervalof the Pl are controlledefiectivelyonly from the Pl Menu.
Whenthe Pl Menuis closed,the parallelindexlinesarefixed.
@ Repeatthe aboveproceduresfromthe first stepto movethe Pl again.
Display of Parallel Index Lines
@@
@ Click I Pl | , and the Pl Menu will be closed and the Pl will be fixed.
Pressany"@
@ @,".0@
The Pl will be fixedandthe Pl Menuwill be closed.
3-51
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaoaaooaaaaoaaaaaaaaaaoaa
@1C|ickthe|RM|buttonontheupper|eftofthescreen.
The RelativeMotionmodeis changedto the TrueMotionmode. In theTrue
Motionmode,the positionof ownshipon the displaymovesdependingupon
its courseand speedandthe influenceof the current. Landandother fixed
rangesare fixedon the displayandonlyactuallymovingtargetsmoveon the
radardisplay. WhentheTrueMotionmodeis selected,ownship'sposition
willbe set to about66%of the displayradiusin theoppositedirectionto its
courseallowingfor the influenceof the current. Ownshipwillstartmoving
dependinguponits courseandspeedandthe influence ofthe tide.
Subsequently, when own shipanivesat the positionof about660/o of the
displayradius,the shipwillbe automaticallyresetto its initialpositionat about
65%of the displayradiusin the oppositedirectionto its courseallowingforthe
influenceof the current.
Fixed on the radar display
Moving depending on own ship's speed
TrueMotion Display
E@1G|ickthembuttonontheupper|eftofthescreen.
TheTrueMotionmodeis changelo the RelativeMotionmode.
Oneshiowill be resetto centeroosition.
3-52
aoaaooaoaooaaaaaaaaoaoaaaaaaaoooaoaaaaa
MoveOwnShip'sDisplayPositionIOFFCENTERI
Own ship'spositionat the displaycentercan be movedto an off-centeredpositionwithin66% of the
displayradius. Thisfunctionis convenientto observea widecoveragein anydirection.
OFF
CENTER
Glick on the upper right of the screen.
The boldcrosscursormark[+]will appearat the positionof ownshipon the

radardisplay.
Move the cross curs;ormark [+] (own ship's position) to

anotherpositionwith the trackball.
Press the left button of the trackball.

Theown ship'spositionwill moveto the positionof thecrosscursormark[+],
whereit will be fixed.
Pressthe left button of the

trackball.
Return Own Ship's Position to the Center
@ 1 ctick,n"I :fi;-lon theupperrightorthescreen.
3-53
aaaaaoooaaoaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaoaaaaaoa
DisplayOtherShip'sTrailsITRAILSI ' ' ' ' '|
Othership'smovementand speedcan be monitoredfrom the lengthand directionof its trail,serving

for collisionavoidance.The traillengthcan be changedover4 levelsof 0.5 min,1 min,3 min,and
6 min.
C l i ck ano"rRnt@f
ThelevelFsmidwittbeselected
will appear at the lower lefi of lhe radar display.
The trails (of 0.5 min long)will appearafter other ship'ssymbols.
Glick and'TRAILFminf'willappearat
Thelevellt midwittbe selected
the lower left of the radar display.
The trails (of 1 min long) will appear after other ship's symbols.
The levelFminlwill be selectedand 'TRAILFminil'willappearat

The trails(of 3 min long)will appearafterother ship'ssymbols.
Click The levellominlwill and"TRAILlominlwillappearal

be selected
The trails (of 6 min long) will appear after other ship's symbols.
Glick 'TRAIL
FFFI will appearat the lowerleftof the radardisplayand
the trailsof othershipswill disappear.
HL
Trail
Othership
3-54
aaaaaaoaaaooaaaaooaaaaaaaaaaaaoaaaaaoaa
DisplayOwn Ship'sTracksand Own SymbolsIOWNTRACKI

In the case thatAnv NavioationEquiomentis Connectedto This Svstem
When navigationequipmentis connected,the own ship'strack data of up to 1024pointsthat is
senl from the equipment can be stored and displayed. The data storage interval can be set
over 4 levels,3 minutes(distancethat the own ship moveswithin 3 minutes),10 minutes,15
minutes.and 30 minutes.
rrTT-i.lTrrn
The setting can be changedby GAINF;,,1

left-clickingthe button on the lower left SEA MUTO-I
of the screen (right figure@). RA|Nliiilii"l
t#.-L-
,z
TRACK| 3min I
TRATLS|T-smin-] l-tl
PROC lPROCll
O When setting from the menu:
1 ClickthelMENUlbutton
on the screen.
The MainMenuwillappear. SUB1MENU
Click UB1MEN l.TMCK

EoFF f]or.r
The Subl Menuwillappear.
2.INTERVAL
TIME
clict FnaCE. 3. CLR ALL

TheTRACKMenuwill appear.
Select"ON" radio buttonof "1.1R".

"ON"in "1.TRACK'willbe set and own shio's
past track originatedits cunent positionwill
appear.The currentstoragetime intervalwill
appearat lowerlefton the radardisplay.
0. EXT
Select "OFF" radio button of "1.1R*.
"OFF"in "1.TRACK" willbe setandown ship'strackandthe storagetime
intervalwill disappear.
3-55
aaaaoaoaaooaaaaaaaaaaaaoaaaoaaaaaaaoaaa
Repeatthe aboveprocedureup to SUB1MENU

Step3.
cticr lttlTFnVA! .
.INTERVALTIM willbe selectedandthe
pull-down
menuwillappear.
2. lOmin
3. 15min
Selectthe intervaltime in the 4. 30min
pulldown menu, select 1 through
4 with the trackball,then left-click.
ClickIEXlrl.
TheSubl Menuwill reappear. 0. EXIT
clicklExT.
The Subl Menu will be closed.
}"IL
3-56
aooooaaaooaaooaaaoaaaaoaaaooaaaaaoaooaa
Repeatthe proceduresof changingstoragetime intervalof

own ship up to step1.
SUB1MENU
2 GtickELRAi!. l.TRACK
ICLRALUwill be selected.Whenclearingall
I orr I or,t
the pasttrack,clickIiYFSlto lhe question z.INTERVALNME
"CLRALLOK?".lf P.NOIis clicked,all the ti:3;il---E
trackwill be cleared.
CLR ALL OK?
t. lvts-l 2.[NoI
cricklExrrl.
The Subl Menuwill reappear.
clicklExtr. 0. EXIT
The Subl Menuwill be closed.
3-57
aoaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaoaaaoooaaoa
MarkingIMARK]
A maximumof 20 markscan be displayedat arbitrarypositionson the radarvideo.
A markcreatedon the displayholdsthe latitudeandlongitude.
o
^/
tll PlottingMarks. cuRsoR(R)
\)
Placethe cursor over the upper right section of the screen

(right figure),then right-click.Next,select "MARK".
( ) attheupperleftof theradardisplay.
lli ,Sfiitl]willappearintheCURSOR
Put the cross cursor mark [ + | on the position where the ltr]
mark is inserted.
Press trackball section left button.

Thecrosscursormark[ + ] will be changedintothe [o] markandfixedon the
radardisplay.Whenenteringmore[ol marks,repeatthe procedures fromstep
2. Up to 20 markscanbe entered.
Note: lf more than 20 marks are created,the oldest mark is cleared and the newly
created mark is disPlayed.
O
^/
IIU ClearingMarks cuRsoR( R)
Placethe cursor over the upper right section of the screen

(right figure),then right-click.Next,select "MARK'.
jfrffi-Kl, is displayed ( ) attheupperrightof theradardisplay.

on CURSOR
Putthe crosscursormark[ + ] on the positionwherethe ltr|

markis inserted.
Presstrackballsectionright button.
Whenclearinganother[n] mark,repeatthe
The [o] markwilldisappear.
procedurefrom step2.
3-58
af aooaaaaoaaaaaooaaaaaoaaaaaooaaaooaaaa
DisplayRangeRings IRANGERINGS]
Therangeringswillappear.
Pressthe switch section (section

indicatedby the arrow in the right figure) 1
of the fixed distancescale on the upper
left of the screen. ffi@
The rangeringswill appearand the intervalof
the rangeringswill be digilallyindicated
at the
upperleftof the radardisplay.
When the fixed distancescale is displayed,press the switch

on the right figure.
The rangeringswill disappear.
DisplayVariableRangeMarkers[VRM1ruRMzl
Thisfunctionis to displayand set up variablerangemarks(VRMs). TwoVRMsareavailable.
VRMl is represented as a brokenlineandVRM2as a dottedline. WhenEBL1is displayed, VRMI
markerappearson the EBLI. WhenEBL2is displayed, VRM2markerappearson the EBL2.
lf the startingpointof an EBL is offset,the centerof a VRM markeris positionedat the startingpoint
ofthe EBL.
VRM l
VRM markerspresentedon EBL
OMark:VRMI
OMark:VRM2
EBLl,VRMl: EBL2
EBL2,VRM2:
3-59
aaaaaoaaaaaaaaaaaoaaaaotaoooaaaaaaoaaaa
lf VRM2is selected,press I vRMl lto selectVRM1beforeoperation.
(ThecurrentlyselectedVRM is displayedin reversevideo at the lower right of the radar

display.)
Press
VRM1will be selected.
Press
VRMl will disappear.
lf vRMl is selected,
0r.". ffiJ to selectVRM2beforeoperation.
(ThecurrentlyselectedVRM is displayedin reversevideoat the lowerrightof the radar

display.)
Press
@'r
d
VRM2will be selected.
Press
VRM2willdisappear.
VRM RanqeDisplav
The valuesof the VRM1 and VRM2 that are currentlydisplayedon the PPI will be
on the lowerleftof the radardisplay.
indicated
TheVRMI or VRM2thatis currentlyoperablewill be selectedcloseto its rangevalue.
The variablerange markersare displayedcenteringon the own ship. When rotatingthe

[VRM] control clockwise,the VRM will be larger. When rotating the [VRM] control
counterclockwise,the VRMwill be smaller.
3-60
aaaaaaaaooaaaaaaaaaaooaaaaaaaaaaoaaaaaa
Set GuardZones[GUARDZONE]
A fan-shapeguardzonecan be set up to keepa watchover the intrusionof othershipsor targets,or
to automaticallyacquireothershipsthat haveintrudedinto the zone.
By leftclickingthe "G21,2" sectionon the screen,it is possibleto seton or ofi.

In thiscase,the zonethatwasset the previoustimewill be turnedon.
tll Guardzone
Creationof Fan-shaped
1 Click I GZ I
GUARDZONE
TheGUARDZONEMenuwill appear. l.GUARD
ZONEI(GZI)
E opp noH
Select"ON" of 'GUARDZONE1"to
2.GUARDZONE2(GZz)
Eopr noN
createa guard zone 1 and "GUARD 3.
ZONE2"to createa guard zone 2. (0.5NM-32NM)
WhenGuardZone1 and2 are set."ON"will 4, I MAKEGZ2
sel. oFNM:5ZNMt-
s.SETACQ AUTOKEY
3 Click ilttAKEGA to create GUARD

zoNE1.
4 clicr llvlEreC22ltocreateGUARD
zoNE2.
Thecursorwill moveto theechodisplay . EXIT
o.
section.
Note: Guard Zones I or 2 can be set in any area within a range of 0.5 to 32
NM.
Use the IVRMIand [EBL] knobs to placeVRMand EBL over

the starting point of the guard zone, then left click the cursor.
Thestartingpointof theguardzonewill be set.
Movethe EBL to makefan-shapedzone enclosedby the

current cross cursor position.
Left+lick when a desiredguard zone is made.

Theshapeof the guardzonewill be set up.
(Thewidthof a guardzoneis fixedto 0.5NM).
3-61
aaaa.aaaoaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaoolaaaoaaaaaaa
f 1 GricklEXtror@.
The GuardZoneMenuwill be closed.
HL
Checkwith the first [ENTIkey.
Check with the second [ENT] key.
Whena targetappearswithina fan-shaped guardzone,an alarmwill soundand a mark

V will appearon the target. Thetrack modebecomeseffectiveafterabout 1 min.
In creatinga guardzone,a circularguardringmay be createdif the startand end points
of the guardzone ate set to the samepointby omittingstep5 above.
The guardzone is displayedonlyduringradartransmission, but also not appearduring
the standbyoperation.
llll GlearingGuardZonesfrom RadarDisplay
Left-clickthe switch "G21,2" on the screenand the guardzone.
OTo turn this off from the menu,

GUARDZONE
Executethe proceduresfor I I ] l.GUARD
ZONE1(GZl)
Creationof Fan-shapedGuard EIoFF LloN
z.GUARD
ZONEa(GZ2)
Zone up to step 2. EoFF []oN
3. MAKEGZ1
TheGUARDZONEMenuwill appear. (0.5NM-32NM)
4. I MAKEGz2 |
(0.5NM-32NM)
Press 1 to clear Guard Zone 1
from radar display,and press 2 to
cfear Guard Zone 2.
"OFF"will be set for GuardZone1 or 2,
whichwill be clearedfrom radardisplay.
Executethe Exit step in the same

proceduresfor I I I Creationof o EXIT
Fan-shapedGuardZone.
3-62
oaaaaaaaaaooaoaoaoaaaaaaaooaaaaaaaaaaaa
ResetAlarm BuzzerIALARMACK]
ALARMACK is the functionof acknowledging the alarmitemwhenan alarmsoundsand stopping
an alarmsoundas wellas cancelingflickeringdisplay. (lf therearetwo or morealarms,it is
necessaryto operatethe switchfor each alarmindication.) The alarmsoundcan be stopped,but
the alarmindication
is notcancelled.
Or left-clickthe alarm display areaon the screen.
Thealarmsoundwill be stopped.
Set Alarm Sound Level
Thisfunctionsetsthe soundandvolumelevelof the alarm(alarmsound)to be delivered

fromthe
keyboard.
SettinoAlarm Sound level
1 GlickthelMENUion
the screen.
The MainMenuwillappear. SUB1MENU
LEVEL
Click UB1MEN l.RANGERINGS
The Subl Menuwillappear. 4.LEVEL4
2.VRM
4.LEVEL4
cticrEEvE!. 3.EBL
The LEVELMenuwill be selected. 4.CHARACTER
4 cticrJeuzzFE. s.VtDEO(ECHO)
S.BUZZER will be selectedandthe oull-down 6.ARPA

menuwillappear. 5.LEVEL4
Select any levelfrom 1 to 7 for l.LEVELl

BUZZERvolume level in the 2.LEVEL2
pull-downand click it. 3.LEVEL3
4.LEVEL4
5.LEVEL5
6.LEVEL6
3-63
aaaaoaa aooaaaaaaaaaaaoaaaoaoaaaaoaaaaaa
1 Glick lEXlTl.
cticklEFli.
TheSubl Menuwill be closed.
Note: Ghangingthe "LEVEL" of the buzzerwill cause the levels of all the
atarmsto be changed as well as the key touch sound.
The level of any alarm cannot be set to 0 as well as the key touch
sound,
3-64
oaaaaaaaaaooaaaaaaaoaaaoaaaaaaaaaaaoaaa
..
FUNCT|ON.
FUNCTION is a functionof settingthe processsuitedfor eachconditionduringnavigation

to
enhancethe targetdetectionperformance.
Settingitems:The followingnodescan be switchedover.

FUNCI:Effectivein observingthe echoeson shortranges.
FUNC2:Effectivein observingthe echoeson longranges.
FUNC3:Effectivein observingthe echoesin roughweather.
FUNC4:Setby servicepersonnel. Theinitialsettingis the sameas FUNC1.
FUNCS:Set by servicepersonnel. Theinitialsettingis the sameas FUNC1.
Clickthe FENUIonthe screen.

MAIN MENU
1.tR
DorP EoH
2 cricklFuNciloNl 2.TGTENH
l4ffif|o-Nlwill be selectedandthe EIopp floN
pull-downmenuwill appear. 3.PROCESS
1
Selecta desired process-sefting

item from the click.
The process-setting itemwillbe changedand
the currentsettingstatewillappearat the
lowerrightof the radardisplay.
For changing the sefting item, open DEGAUSS

the pulldown menu in step 2 above
again and select a desiredprocess
setting item. o. EXIT
cticklEFttr.
Executethe proceduresto function up to step 2.

willbe selectedandthe pull-down
14.FUNCT|ON| menuwillappear.
Glick lEXll'l
o-trf,
FruN-c will be set and"FUNCFFF| willappearthe lowerrightof the
radardisplay.
3-65
aaaaaaoaaaaaaaaaaoaaaaaaoaaaooaaoaaaaoa
can changethe processsettingitemsof FUNC4and FUNCS.

Servicepersonnel
o Settinggain of inputtargetsignal(sensitivitypreset)
. Settingstandardvalueof inputtargetsignal(noiselevel)
o Settingradarinterference rejection(lR):lR1to lR4 (Effective
whenlR is ON)
a Settingtargetenhancement (TGTENH):EXP1 to EXP4(Effectivewhen TGT ENH is
oN)
Settingtargetprocessing (PROCESS):MODE1 to MODES(Effective
whenPROCESS
is ON)
a range(Maximumand minimumvalues)
Settingsensitivity
a Settingsea cluttersuppressionrange(Maximumand minimumvalues)
a Settingrain/snowcluttersuppressionrange(Maximumand minimumvalues)
Note:Do not use FUNC2and FUNG3on short ranges. Otherwise, detection of ship targets
mov-nghigh speedsmaybecomepoor'
'
For FUNCI to FUNC3, the recommended parameters have been preset by the
manufacturer,but the preset parameterscould no be changed after delivery.In using
FUNCI to FUNG3,lR, TGT ENH and PROCESSshall be set to ON (PROCI to PROC3).
ExpandTargets ': "'

on the radardisplaycan be expanded,
Targetsdisplayed of the pulselengthselected.
regardless
The "ENH" section at the button left MAIN MENU

of the screen can be clicked to 1.IR
changethe ON/OFFsetting. lorr Eoru
2.TGTENH
E opr floN
cticrlttlEt't0. S.PROCESS
The Main Menu will appear.
4.FUNCTION
OFF
1.FUNC
Select "ON" radio button of
5.EBL1
Ecenrenn orrser
'ON"in'ZTGTENH"willbe setand"ENH 6.EBL2
appearat the lowerleftof theradar
E ceruren
n orpser
QtlJ'will 7. DATA OFF
disptay.
8. SUB1MENU
Then,thetargetson the radardisplaywill be
expandedfor higherdefinition. 9. CODEINPUT
ClicklMENUl o. EXIT
2 Select"ON" radiobuttonof trGTENHl

"OFF'in'2.TGTENH"willbe setand"ENHp!!|'will appearat the lowerleft
of the radardisplay.
Theexpandedtargetson the radardisplaywill be resetto theiroriginalsizes.
cticklExti.
3-66
oaooaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaoaaaaaatooaaaaaao
Display ProcessedVideos
noisewill be reducedto highlight
Unnecessary targets.
Attention
ln watchinga radarbeaconmark,SARTsignalor a fast movingtargeton the

radardisplay,set the systemto : PROCESSOFF (ProcessedVideoOFF).
It is mostsuitableto usethisfunctionin theTM mode.

In usingthisfunctionin the RM mode,use it in the NORTHUPor COURSEUP
mode. In usingthe functionin the HEADUPmode,thevideomay be bluned.
Glicking"PROC'on the screenwill changethe setting.
O When sefting from the menu:
ctickIMENUI
.
MAIN MENU
The Main Menu will appear.
1.IR
lorr EoH
Click the setting section of 2.TGTENH
"3.PROCESS". Eorr loN
3.
|3.PROCESS|willbe selectedand the
pull-down
menuwillappear.
4.FU
3 Click a setting from 1 to 4. 5,EBL1
6.EBL2
3-1 When "2.PROCl"is selected. norrser
ElcerureR
FFnOCil wittbe set and the targetsmoving 7. DATA OFF
at highspeedswill be selected. 8. SUBl MENU
The targetsmovingat low speedswill be 9. DEGAUSS
darkened.
Thisfunctionis recommendable
on the radar o. EXIT
rangesof 1.5NM or less.
3-2 When "3.PROC2"is selected.

beset.
lSPRod2lwill
Thisprocessing
speedis in a rangebetweenPROC1and PROC3.
3-3 When"4.PROC3"is selected.

FpnOCglwiltbe setandthetargetsmovingat lowspeedswill be selected.
Thetargetsmovingat highspeedswill be darkened.
This function is recommendableon the radar ranges of 3 NM
or more.
3-67
oooaaaoaaaaaaaaaaaaoaaaaoaaaoaaaaaaaaaa
Executethe proceduresto displayprocessedvideosup to

step2.
ctickloFE.
ll.OFFIwill be set.
1 clickffi.
ReduceRadarInterference'
o In watchinga radarmarkor SARTsignalon the radardisplay,setthe systemto:

lR OFF(RadarInterference Rejection
OFF)
Thisfunctionis usedwhen the interferencefromothership'sradaris strong.
By left.clickingthe H
H button on the lower right of the screen,
it is possibleto set on or off.
1 GlicklMENUl.
The MainMenuwill appear
2 Glick"ON" radio button of ln i.

"ON"in "1.lR"will be set and the radllinterferencerejectionwill be set to ON
reduceradarinterference.
1 CticklMENUl.
Glick"OFF"radiobuttonof lTRl .
"OFF"in "1.|R"will be setandthe radarinterference will be setto
rejection
OFF,
Glicklbtln.
3-68
aoaaaaoaaaaoaaaaaaoaaaaooaaoaooaaoaoaaa
PersonalInformation..
The operatingstatusof the radarequipmentis recorded. lf thereare two or moreoperatorsto
operatethe radar,each operatorcan registerand recallthe operatingstatusthat is suitablefor the
operator. The operatingstatusfor up to 5 operatorsand eachstatuscan be named(usinga
maximumof 10 alphanumeric characters).
* PersonalDatato be Stored:
. Bearingmode
o DAY/NIGHTmodesettino
o Brilliance
o Alarmlevel
r Vectorlength/mode
r Variousvideoprocessing
methods(lR, ENH,PROC,andFUNC)
@G|ickthe..P|N|--__-l.,onthe|owerrightofthescreen.
Openthe LOADmenu.Executethe procedurefrom step 5.
.
crickIMENUI I suBrMENU I
The MainMenuwillappear. ---l
f-PrN
-----l
1.[-LoAp
Click 1 MEN
2.[--- rA_Vn---_']
a. I ERASE----]
clicklFiNl.
The PIN Menuwillappear.
.
ct.ckEoAEI
The PfN Menuwill appear.
Select any number on the LOAD

Menuand click any of 1 to 5.
The registeredoperatingstatuswill be
recalled. o.[r.ttr l
Click lT.YESltothe question "FILEERASEOK?" to recallthe
registeredoperatingstatus.
Glick [.[d to stop the recall.
3-69
ootaoaaaaaaaaaaaaaooooaaaoaaaaaoaaaaaaa
I suBi MENF---]
GlicklExT. -rr-N------_-l
The PIN Menuwill reappear. t- LoAE---']
--____]
r. f rot<vo
click1b01. 2.[-T**T****a*_l
The Subl Menuwillreappear. 3.[_____-___----l
- ------l
4.f---
cticklEFti. -l
s.[-_
ReqisterinqOperatinqStatus o. I EXIT i
Executethe proceduresto recallingoperatingstatus up to

step 3.
GlickFAVE. SUB
The SAVE Menu will appear.

- sAVE-----l
Glick any of 1 to 5 to save the 1. TOKYO
operatingstatus item assigned by 2.
any number1 to 5. 3.
TheINPUTNMEMenuwillappearandthe 4.
selectednumberto savewill be set up.
5.
Use the trackballtoselectan

alphabetcharacterfrom A to Z that
is displayedin the menu, press the
left trackball button, and input one
characteror one numberof the
name used for saving.
A maximumof 10 characters
canbe entered. o. EXIT
Epgg!_step 4 untilthe name to save is made up, and select

"lEhlfEE' in INPUTNAMEMenu by using the trackballand
click the trackballsection left button.
Theoperatingstatuswillbe saved.
3-70
oaaaaaaaaoaaaaoaaoaaoaaaaoaoaoaaaaaaaaa
Click lEXl'l .
The PINwill reappear.
ClickExtr.
crckExn.
CancelinqReqisteredOperatinqStatus
Executethe proceduresto recalling operatingstatus up to

step3. --l
t . =0Br MENU-----l
ctictlEnnsel. t--------FrN
The ERASEMenuwill appear. t------Eilstr-----_l
r. f---TdxYo---__l
Click any of 1 to 5. z.[ ****-t::taa-I.
The registernumberof the operating
statusto s.[--------------l
erasewill be selected. r. [---------------]
- -
'FILE s.[-- l
ClickFEEto the question
ERASEOK?" to erasethe
FILEERASEOK?
registerednumber.
r.[TEs]2.LE
Click lNOltostop the erasing.
clicklETil. o.l EXn I

ThePIN Menuwillreappear.
cticklExtn.
Gtick
lExttr.
3-71
aaaaaaaaoaaoaaaaf aaaaooaaaaaaaaaaaaaalf
Information''' ' ' ' '

Displayof Navigational
Navigationalinformationsuchas waypointmarks,and a maximumof 256 pointof NAV lines,

coastlines,depthcontoursand NAV markscan be created,displayed,readout, saved,edited
and cancelled.(Thisfunclionis effectiveonlywhen navigationequipmentis connectedto this
system.)
lU DisplayingWaypointMarks
lf waypointinformation is senlfromnavigation
equipment, a waypointmarkwillappearon the
as "oWP".
radardisplay.lf the waypointappearswithinthe radardisplay,it is displayed
1 Glickthe lMENUlonthe screen.

The MainMenuwill aDoear. SUB1MENU
INFO
Click UB1MEN l.WPT
m oFF n oN _--_,
2.I NAVDISP
/MAP
V/MAPINFOI
INF .
GlickINAV/MAP
INFOMenuwill appear.
The NAV/MAP
Click "ON" radio button of WPt'l.

'ON" in l /PTlwillbe set andthe selected
h
waypointmarkwill appear.
ClicklExlTl.
Geodeticsystemnamedisplay
clickExtr. area:Thedisplaychanges
The Subl Menuwillbe closed. to the geodetic

according
systemNo.in the rightinput
area.
3-72
ooaoaoaaaaaaooaaoooaoaoaaaoaoaaoaaaaaaa
tlll Setting NAV INFOto ON/OFF

The followingnavigationalinformationcan be displayedor cancelledby pressingthe
conesponding switch.
O OwnshipmarkIOS MARK]
@ NAVlanes INAVLINE]
@ Coastlines[COAST]
@ Depthcontour[CONTOUR]
@ Mark1 tMARKll X
@ Marr 2 [MARK2] *
@ Mark3 [MARK3] A
@ Mark4 [MARK4] .?
Glick|MENUl.
The MainMenuwill appear. SUBI MENU
V INFO
Click UB1MEN
T 1.OSMARK
T 2.NAVUNE
Glick V/MAPINF
fl S.COAST
The NAV/MAPINFOMenuwillappear.
fl 4.CONTOUR
4 GricklNAVEtsE. E s.MARKl V
The NAVDISPMenuwillappear. I 6.MARK2
I
T 7.MARK3
Click the check box next to the I 8.MARK4
I
\1,/
numbers I though 8 that are to be

turnedON or OFF.
The menuitemset to ON will be markedwith
a checkmarkin the"n". o. EXIT
.
GlicklEXlTl
The NAV/MAPINFOMenuwill reappear.
GlicklExtr.
The Subl Menu will reappear.
cticklExF.
3-73
aaaaaaaaaooaaaoaaaaaaaaoaaaooaaaaaooaa
flll Makingand Editing NavigationInformation
Click lMENUl.
Click 81 MEN
TheSubl Menuwill appear.
C l i ck V/MAPINF
TheNAV/MAPINFOMenuwillappear.
.
cticr ll.tntrrlwiFfl
TheNAV/MAPMenuwill appear.
cticklEDti.
The EDITMenuwill appear.
Note: Latitude and longitude data from the GPS and bearing data
from the GYROare required.
SUBI MENU
NAV/MAPINFO
NAV/MAP
EDIT
Clearall NAVINFOor eachNAVitemon display
L
2. Makeup navigational
information
3.
4. Coneclone pointin navigational
information
5.
Deleteone pointnavigational
information
Insertoneelementof NAVline,Coastlineor Depth

Contour
Remainpointsof navigational thatcanbe

information
EXIT created
3-74
aaaaoaaaaoaoaaaaooaaaaaaaaoaaooaoaaaooo
1 CLEAR(Clearall NAV INFOor each NAV item on disolavl
Click FLEARI.
The CLEARMenuwillappear.
Press any of 1 to 8 to clear any item navigationinformation.
Clearall navigational
information
on display.
ClearNAVLINE. f suBrMENU l
f NAVTMAPrNFo___l
ClearCOASTLine. [-----mwmF--_-l
f-Epr-----__l
f--q-eAn-----_]
ClearCONTOUR. _-l
1. [-ALL
2.[- r.rAV
LnrF--__l
ClearMARK1. --'-l
3.f coASr
4.l-conrouR-___-l
ClearMARK2. s. [-MARKT---]
6. [* MARKT----*]
ClearMARK3. 7. f-MARK3----l
8.FMARK4 l
ClearMARK4. -----l
o.[----- mr
The NAV INFO to be clearedwill be selected.
3-75
aroaaaaaaaaaaaoaaaaaaooataoaaaaaaaaaa.a
2 MAKE(Makeup naviqationalinformation)
click IMAKE.
TheMAKEMenuwill appear.
Press any of 1 to 8 to clear any item navigationinformation.
MakeNAVLINE.
I SUBIMENU I
MakeCOASTLine. I-----NAVTffiP INFi'--__l
[-----EMMAP-__l
MakeCONTOUR. f-Epr---_l
fMAxe-----___-.l
r.Fmvuile- -l J
MakeMARK1. z.[---- coesr --___l
s.I coNrouR-
MakeMARK2. +. I tvtlnxt-- ]
s. [----- -rvrlnxg
rr,rAnre---__l
_--l
o.l=--
MakeMARK3. r.[ unnx+---___-.l
*_l
a.l=..'_ ENr
MakeMARK4. REMAINPOINT - ]
[2s6
o.[--Exrr-l
Whenone of 1 to 7 is selected,l{Iffi;lllA6E will appearin the CURSOR( ) at
the upperrightof the radardisplay.
Movethe cross cursor mark to the starting point of a line or

any elementof a mark using the trackball,and click the
trackballsection left button.
Thestartingpointof a lineor the elemenlof a markto markwillbe set up.
Repeatstep 3 above. lf a line or mark is completed,click the

lENTl.
Then,a lineor a markwill be made.
Repeatthe steps 2 to 4 to make another line or mark.
6 GlicklEXlTlwhen all NAVINFOitem is made.

The EDITMenuwillreappear.
3-76
ooooaa aaaoaaaaaaaaaaoaaoaoaaaooaaaaaaoa
Note: Navigationinformationcan have a maximumof 256 points

plofted. Note that the value of REMAINPOINTS(the number
of points that can be still plotted)is decreasedwhenever
lines and marks are plotted.
I suBl MENU I
___l
fNA/frrAP rNFo
1 Glick ICORRECI'I ---_l
[-----NAVTMAP
EdRRflCI will be selected.6OnRf$,T *itt --Epr-----
appearin the CURSOR() at the upperrightof
t---- l
the radardisplay. r.t cr-ern I
z.[---- MAKF----]
Move the cross cursor mark to any 3.@
line element or mark to correct using +.1= oelere I
the trackball, and click the trackball -----l
s.[-- rnsenr
section left button.
A dottedlinestartingfromthe lineor markwill be REMAINPOINT
drawnas the crosscursormoves. TlZs6*--l
Movethe cross cursorto the point to

correctusing the trackball,and click
the trackballsectionleftbutton. o. I EXIT I
One elementof the line or the mark will be
moveo.
I suBl MENU I
fNArJirAPtNFo-' l
1 Click IDELETB NAVTMAP*---__]
f
FEffi willappear
willbe selecteU.$&,.OEE
in the cuRSoR( ) at the upperrightof the radar
r-------Epr------_l
display. l. [-c]-liR I
2.FMAKE---I
Move the cross cursor mark to any s. T---eORREcf---_l
line elementor mark to deleteusing 4.-llil
the trackball, and click the trackball --
s.f rHsenT ]
section left button.
One elementof the line or the mark will be REMAINPOINT
deleted. f256--l
o.f exi l
3-77
aoaaaaaaaaoaaoaaaaaoaaaaaoaaaaooooaaoaa
(Example)
5 INSERT(lnsert one elementof NAV line. Coast line or Deoth Contourl
ClickllNSERI. suBl MENU I

IN$EFITwillbesetected.'lr!.ffiliNS
willappear I NAViMAFTNF6-]
in the CURSOR( ) at the upperrightof the -_-.]
I NAWMAP
radardisplay.
[- EDrr-]
Move the cross cursor mark to any r.@
__l
line elementto which another 2.[ MAKE
elementis to add, using the g.I cdnFecf-l
-__-.l
trackball,and click the trackball +.I oer-ere-
section left button. 5EE!il
Move the cross cursor to the point REMAINPOINT
at which anotherline elementis to t--z5E-l
be inserted,using the trackball,and
click the trackball section left
button. EXIT
o.l
Onelineelemenlwillbe inserted.
(Example)
-=+
3-78
aaaaaaaaaaaaaooaaoaaaaaaaoaaaaaaooaaaaa
6 EXIT(End makinEand editinq naviqationalinformation)
click IEXITI
.
The NAV/MAPMenuwill reappear.
cticklExti.
The NAV/MAPINFOMenuwill reappear.
cticklExtr.
cticklExtr.
IMI Setting Navigationallnformation
.
GlickIMENUI
C l i ck UB1MEN
Click V/MAPIN
The NAV/MAPINFOMenuwill appear.
4 CIicKFAWMAH
The NAV/MAPMenuwillappear.
3-79
oaaaoaaaaooaaaaaooaaaooaa oaaaoaaaoaaooa
SUB1MENU
NAV INFO
NAV,/MAP
own ship'spositionmanually
N 00'00.000'
w 00'00.000' out navigationalinformalion
navigationalinformation
savednavigationalinformation
Make,cancel,add and movenavigational

information
navigationalpositionsexceptown ship'smark
r shiftednavigationalpositions
EXIT
1 OS POSN(Enterown ship's positionmanuallvl

Set this functionto use the navigationalinformationat any other positionthan
ownship'sposition.
Glickthe latitudeand longitudenumericsectionunder

'os PosN".
ll.OS POSNIwill be selected.
Thenumericinputdialogueboxwill be displayed.
n
Press: or 5F .
N (northlatitude)or S (southlatitude)will be selected.
Enter a latitudevalue (XX'XXX.XX')using any of 0 to 9.
Press
FEi.
The latitudevalueenteredmanuallywill be set up.
n
Press- or 1tr .
or W (westlongitude)
E (eastlongitude) will be selected.
6 Entera longitudevalue (XX"XXX.XX')using any of 0 to 9.

3-80
aoooaaaoootoaaaaoaoaoaaaoaaoaaoaoaaaaao
Z Pressl$E'l'].
valueenteredmanually
Thelongitude will be set up.
Note:The own ship's positionenteredmanuallyis effectiveonly in the NAV/MAP

INFOMenu.
In the case that any electronicpositioningequipmentsuch as GPS is

connectedto the system,or that own ship's positionis enteredmanually,the
datacan be readout.
clicklL@.
TheLOADMenuwillappear. I suBlMENU I
t NAWM-AF rNFb-l
ctict<loEvtcE . f------NAWmAF---__--l
andthepull-down t-------IdAp-----l
beselected
li.DEvtcelwitt
menuwillappear.
-E-
o.- l
3-81
oaaaaoaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaooaaoaaaaa
3 Readout Navioational Information Displav (Radar Internal Data)

Only when navigationalequipmentis connectedto the system or when own
ship's position is entered manually,the readoutfiles can be selected.The
selectingmethodis differentdependingupon the type of deviceto load the
readoutdata.
When Settins DEVIGEto INTERNAL
ctick[oADl: ] SUB1MENU I
The LOADMenuwillappear. f---TNiMAP tN-Fd---l
t-- NAWMAP---I
Placethe cursor over the i---------Lol!--l
navigationinformationfile name -
f LoADD+\TA ]
(0 through 9) to be read,then l.
doubleclick. 2.
3.
4.
GlickFFSIto the question "FILE 5.
LOAD OK?" if the file name is right. 6.
7.
8.
Theselectednumberof navigational 9.
0.
will be readout.
information
EXIT:
To cancelfile loading,click INQ PRESSfEXtfI
The selectedfile name will appearat the lower right of the

radar display.
3-82
aaaaaaaooaaaaaaooaaoaaaoaooaaaaaoaaaaoa
SAVE (Savenaviqationalinformation
ln the casethatany electronic navigation
equipmentis connected to the system,
or that own ship'spositionis enteredmanually,the datacan be saved.
clicklsAVE.
SUB1MENU
The SAVEMenuwillappear.
NAV/MAPINFO
NAV,/MAP
Placethe cursor over one of the
numbers I through 0 (ten in all),
then click. 1.
2. ,i**:i:F
The INPUTNAMEMenuwillappearandthe
selectednumberto savewillbe set up. 3. INPUT
******,iiiriri
4.
Use the trackball to select an 5.
alphabetcharacterfrom A to Z that 6.
is displayedin the menu,press the 7.
left trackball button, and input one USETB&NUM
8.
characteror one numberof the EXIT: -
9. PRESSIEXIT
name used for saving. - -
0.f
A maximumof 10 characters
canbe entered. EXIT: -
PRESS IEXIT,
Bgpgelglep 3 until the nameto save is made up, and select

"EIfEE" in INPUTNAMEMenu by using the trackball and
click the trackball section left button.
Thecurrentlydisplayednavigational
information
will be saved.
3-83
ataaaoaaaaaaooaaaaaalaaaaoaaaaaaoaaaaaa
ERASE(Erasesaved naviqationalinformation
lEil5E .
ctict< I SUBI MENU
I NAV/MAP INFO
The ERASEMenuwillappear. -----.]
t NAWinP
-
Placethe cursor over one of the f- EMsE- ]
numbers1 through0 (ten in all), 1.T- roKYo----_l
then click. z.[ **TF*.--]
---------
3.f
GlickFES|tothe question "FILE 4. FILE ERASEOK?
ERASEOK?' to erase the a. 1 .Y
1 E S i 2 . 1N O I
information.
6.
7.
Theelectednumberof navigational 8.
information
willbe erased.
9.
ClicklN9 to stop erasingthe o.[----_l
EXIT:
information. PRESS
6 SHIFT(Shift navioationalpositions except own ship's mark)

The positionof any navigational
information SUBl MENU
such as NAV lines, coastlines,and depth ,/MAP INFO
contours,and othermarksexceptownship's
markcan be conectedmanuallv. I - NAV/MAP
I.OSPOSN
N
1 Gtick
FHtFn. 00' 00.000'
Nd l$H|fTwitt
FHIFi willbeselected. 2. LOAD
appearin the CURSOR( ) at lhe upperright 3. SAVE
of the radardisplay. 4. ERASE
5. EDIT
Move the cross cursor mark to an 6.
elementof a line such as NAVline,
7. CLEAR
coastline,depth contour line, or a
mark using the trackball.
Click the trackballsection left o. EXTT

button.
A lineor markto correctwill be set up.
Movethe cross cursor mark to any point to which a line or

mark will be shifted, using the trackball.
Click the trackballsection lefr bufton.

The pointto whicha lineor markis to be shiftedwill be set up,andall linesand
oaaaaoaaaaaoaaaaaoaaaaaoaooaoaaaaaaoaaa
markswill be shifted.
7 SHIFTCLEAR(Glearthe corrected positions of naviqationinformation)
Glick IFT C
FHFiEIETR willbe selected.
The latestcorrectionto navigationinformation(onlyoneconection)will be
cleared.
Note: Only the latest correction is clearedand the previous

navigationinformationis restored.
The informationcannot be further restored.
GlicklExtr.
The NAV/MAPINFO Menu will reappear.
cticklExjl.
cticklExi.
The Subl Menu will be closed.
3-85
aaaaaaaaaaoaaaaaaaaoaaaaaaooalooaaaaaoa
[V] Setup and Displayof GeodeticSystem

information,
In makingup any navigational to set up the geodetic
it is necessary
system used by the connectednavigationequipment.When any saved
navigalionalinformationis loaded, the geodetic system used when the
information
navigational was savedwill alsobe displayed. Then,checkthatthe
geodeticsystemon displayis the same as that for the connectednavigation
equipment. lf both geodetic systems are different, the positions of the
navigalionalinformationon radar displaymay be deviated.Therefore,it is
to setthe samegeodeticsystemas the navigation
important equipment.
SUB1MENU
GtickMENO. NAV/MAPINFO
Glick 81 MEN
NA
The Subl Menuwill appear.
Glick V/MAP INF

The NAV/MAPINFOMenuwillappear.
4 GricklCEopErTd
FEeooertd willbeselected.
5 Selectby pressjngffi ,nthemenu.

Thisis set by ;l o-rthe numeric
input dialogue-Eox.
Geodeiicsyslemnamedisplay
Selectthe number of geodetic area:Thedisplaychanges
system. accordingto the geodetic
(SeeTableof GeodeticSystems) systemNo.in the rightinput
Whenthe numberof geodeticsystemis atea.
entered,its nameis changed.
clicklExTi.
cticklEFli.
3-86
aoaoaoaaooaaaooaaaaaaaaaaoooaaaoaaaaaaa
TABLEOF GEODETIC
SYSTEM
NO. NAME REPRESENTATION
0 wGs-84 wGsi84
I wGs-72 wGs-72
2 Japan Japan
3 NorthAmerican1927(U.S) 1927NorthAmerica
4 NorthAmerican1927(Ganada& Alaska) 1927Canada.Alaska
5 European1950{Europe} European1950
6 Australiangeodetic1966(Australia) Australiangeodetic1966
7 OrdnanceSurveyof Great Britain(England) UK
I NAD,83 NAD.83
I No use
10 No use
11 ADINDAN(Ethiopia& Sudan) ADINDAN
12 ARC (Botswana) ARC 1950
13 AUSTRALIANGEODETIC1984 (Australia) AUSTRALIAN
GEODETIC
1984
14 BERMUDA1957 (the Bermudas) BERMUDA1957
15 BOGOTAOBSERVATORY (Columbia) BOGOTAOBSERVATORY
16 CAMPOINCHAUSPE (Argentine) CAMPOINCHAUSPE
17 CHATHAM1971(Chathamlsland) CHATHAM1971
18 CHUAASTRO(Paraguay) CHUAASTRO
19 CORREGO ALEGRE(Brazil) CORREGOALEGRE
20 DJAKARTA (VATAVIA)(S m
u atra) DJAKARTA
21 EUROPEAN1979(Europe) EUROPEAN1979
22 GEODETICDATUM1949(NewZealand) GEODETICDATUM1949
23 GUAM1963(Guam) GUAM1963
24 HAYFORD 1910(Finland) HAYFORD 1910
25 HJORSEY1955(lceland) HJORSEY1955
26 INDIAN(lndia& Nepal) INDIAN
27 IRELAND1965(lreland) IRELAND1965
28 KERTAU1948(WestMalaysia) KERTAU1948
29 L.C.sASTRO(GaymanBlacklsland) L.C.sASTRO
30 LIBERIA1964(Liberia) LIBERIA1964
31 LUZON(Philippines) LUZON
32 MERCHICH (Morocco) MERCHICH
33 MINNA(Gameroon) MINNA
34 NAHRWAN(Oman) NAHRWAN
35 NAPARIMA,BWI (Trinidadand Tobago) NAPARIMA,BWI
36 OLD EGYPTIAN(Egypt) OLD EGYPTIAN
37 OLD HAWAIIAN(the Hawaiilslands) OLD HAWAIIAN
38 PICODE LAS NIEVES(the Ganarylslands) PICODE LAS NIEVES
39 PROVISIONAL SOUTHAMERICAN1956(SouthAmerica) PRoV|SIoNAL 1956
S.AMERtCAil
40 PROVISIONAL SOUTHCHILEAN1963(SouthChile) PROVISIONAL
S4HILEAN
1963
41 PUERTORICO(PuertoRico and Virgin lslands) PUERTORICO
42 QORNOQ (South Greenland) QORNOQ
43 RT90(Sweden) RT9O
44 SANTABRAZ(SaoMiguel,SantaMarialslands) SANTABRAZ
45 SOUTHAMERICAN1969(SouthAmerica) SOUTHAMERICAN 1969
46 SOUTHWESTBASE {Faial, Pico.
Graciosa, Sao andTerceira
Jorge lslandsfSOUTHWEST BASE
47 TIMBALAI1948(BruneiandEastMalaysia) TIMBALAIl948
aaaaoaaaaaaoaaaooaoaaoaoaaaaaaoaoaf aaoa
Function of USERSwitch / OPTIONSwitch
USERSwitch
ON/OFF
thevectorlengthmaximum
Intheinitialsefting, is registered.
Onlyservice personnelcanchangethesefunctions.
FunctionsRegisterable in USERSwitch:
@VectorLengthMaximum: ON/OFF
ON:Vectorlength 60 min (max)
OFF:Vectorlength Timeset on VECTORTIMEMenu.
INFOMenu:ON/OFF
@NAV/MAP
ON:TheNAV/MAP INFOMenuwillappear.
OFF:The NAV/MAPINFOMenuwill be closed.
@ParallelIndexLineDisplay:ON/OFF
ON:The parallelindexlinesset on the Pl Menuwill appearon the radar
display.
OFF:Thedisplayedparallelindexlineswill be cleared.
OPTON Switch
OoProrutswitch
The registeredfunctionis called.Also,if an optionis connected,then this is usedto
operatethatoption.
The callof a MENUis assignedat the timeof factoryshipments.
@OPfOruZSwitch
The registeredfunctionis called.Also,if an optionis connected,then this is usedto
operatethatoption.
The callof a TESTis assignedat the timeof factoryshipments.
3-88
aaaooaaaaaaaaaaoaaaaaoooaaaaaoooaaooaaa
Operationof Performancemonitor'
Thisfunctioncanbe usedonlywhentheradarequipmentis equippedwiththe NJU-63/64
PerformanceMonitor.
ln the case that the equipmentis providedwith radar InterSwitch,the

Interswitchshallbe set to the MasterRadarmode.
ctickFEfi. TESTMENU
1. SELFCHECK
2. PANELTEST
Click "ON" radio button of
3. ARPATEST
"5.PM".
4.MAGCURRENT
"ON"in "S.PM"will be set andthe radarwill
Eorr lon
be setto RM,OFFCENTER
automatically 5.PM
OFF, IR OFF,PROCESSOFF,TGTENH loFF Eon
OFF,FUNCTION OFFand24 NM range. 6. ERRORLOGGING
The PM patternfor checkingthe receiving 7. SYSTEMINFO
systemwillappearandthe [PM]indicator
bargraphwillalsobe in theTESTMenuto
be usedfor checkingthe lransmittedpower. titxTtt-t
cticklExtr. o. EXTT
TheTESTMenuwill be closed.
Note: All target acquisitions by ARPAfunctionswill be cancelled.

The target acquisition cancelled when PM is ON will not be
recovered.
The radar image is suppressedto make the PM image easy to
see,
So, the test menu should be always closed after the PM has
been checked.
3€9
aaaaaoaaaaooaataaoaaaaaoaaaoaaaaaaaaaaa
12to 18NM
The valueof the TRANSMITPOWERindicatorbar graphin the test menuindicatesthe

valueconesponding to the transmission outputpower. lf the indicatedvaluebecomes
extremelyshort againstthe bar lengthcheckedat the initialtime, it is necessaryto
requestfor checkingof the transmittersystemby a serviceengineer.
3-90
aaaooaaaaaoaaaaaaaaoaoaaaraoaaaaaooaaaa
Checkinq procedure
O Reada cunentvalueA on the bar indicator.
@ Refeningto the CalibrationCurve l, obtain a relativeattenuationd (B) for the initialbar

indicatorlengthB thatis specifiedin the INFORMATION LABEL.
@ Then,obtaina relativeattenuationd (A) for the valueA refeningto the CalibrationCurvel.

The value given by d (A) - d (B) representsthe attenuationof lhe currenttransmission
outputpowercomparedwiththe valueat the initialtime.
@ lf the attenuationvalue given by d (A) - d (B) is 10 dB or more (due to the life of the
magnetron),it is necessaryto requestfor checkingof the transmitlersystemby a service
engineer.
22 dB CalibrationCurve I
20 PERF.MONITOR
INFORMATIONL,{BEL
18
lnitial bar
16 length
E i\
t4 Date and time
c
.9 of initial setting
o
5
tz Maximumrange
c pattern
o
10
d
o
.2 8
-g
o
4 6
4
,
0
345678
Lengthof Bar lfdicator I
Figure1
3-91
aaaaaoaooaaaaoaaaaaaaaalaaaaaaoaaaaaaao
(Example)
Assumingthat the initialbar indicationis B = I and the cunentbar indicationA = 6, the relative
is d (B) = 3.5d8, d (A) = 7dA. Thus,d (A) - d (B) = 3.5d8.
attenuation
Thisclearlyindicatesthatthe currenttransmission outputpoweris attenuatedby approximately 3.5
dB.
Example of Checkinq TransmitterSvstem
Currentbar indication
4=6
PM
Initialbar indication
B=8
22 dB GalibrationCurve I
20 PERF.MONTIOR
INFORMANON I.ABEL
18
DATE BARLENGTH
16 VD
E
Vzo 8.re
c
o 14
o
=
c
o .12
II
o
.: 110
I
.E
o Ir 8
E
(A)
6
4
(B)
9
,A
0
45
Length of Bar Indicator/
Figure
2
3-92
aaaaaaoaaaoaaaaaaaaaaaoaalaaaoaaoaaaooo
The maximum range of the PM pattem on display indicatesa deteriorationof the

sensitivityof the receiversystem.
Checkinq Procedure
@ Measurethe PM patterndisplayedon the displayusingthe VRM of the maximumrange
'max'fromthe PPIsensor.
'rmax' usingthe
@ Obtainthe degreeof sensitivitydeteriorationR (rmax)conespondingto
calibrationcurve ll and indicatethe degree of sensitivitydeteriorationof the current
receiversystem.
16
PERF.MONITOR
L4 INFORMATIONI,{BEL
x
tE
E
L
DATE BARLENGTTI
t LZ
E
'95
0
Vn 8/rt
(E
t0
o
o
o
tt 8
=
.:
.=
tn 6
c
o
U'
4
.)
0
012 13 14 ls 16 17 1S (NM)
Maximum range of RM pattern (rmax)
Figure3
3-93
aaaaaaf aaaaaoaaoaaaaaaoeaaooaaaaaoaaaaa
(Example)
Assumingthat the maximumrangeof the initialPM patternis €max = 18 NM accordingto the
INFORMATION LABEL,and if lhat of the cunent PM patternis rAmax= 16 NM, the delerioration
valueisAR (rmax)= SdB,referringto Calibration
Curvell.
SdB.
This meansthat the receiversystemhassensitivitydeteriorationof approximately
Exampleof GheckinqReceiver Svstem

8-18NM 16-18NM
x
o
E 16
Galibrationcurve ll
d.
o T4
E
c
o
.E
.MOMTOR
o RMIITIONTÂBEL
L l0
o
o DATE BARTTNGTH
€
bt r/m 8/tt
>l
ol
cl
ol
O(
I
I
II
^Rl
I
II
I
I
0 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 (NM)
rAmiu( rBma:r
PM patternmaximum range (rmax)
Figure4
3-94
oaaaaaaaaaaoaaaaaoaaaaoaaoaaoaaaaaaooaa
EBLManeuvering
Menu Composition
SUB1MENU
1.EBLMANEUVER
florr non
2.REACH
3.TURNMODE
I nnotusI nnre
4.TURNSET
0.1(F2I[nmt *.**81
HEADING
Efr. * *l
Ef-l..*E
I I ] InitialSetting
@@ 1 ctickmENul,then81 M EN MANE
Menuwillappear.
The EBLMANEUBER
2 Glickthe numericsectionof neACftl

FenCftlwittbe selected.
Thenumeric inputdialogueboxisopened.
3 Set the numericvalue in the dialoguebox.
4 PressIEND.
3-95
ooaaaoooaoaf aoaaaooaoaaaaaoaaooooaaoaaa
Glick RN MOD
FUntrttv|OoE*illbe selected.
Selectany turn mode.
RADIUS:Constantturn diameter(NM)
RATE: Constantturn speed(deg/min)
Click the numeric setting section of

IURN SET|willbe selected.
The numericinputdialoguebox is opened.
Set the numericvaluein the dialoguebox.
8 PressIENDI
Note: lf the initial setting is not correct, the maneuvercurve will be

affected.
3-96
aaaaaaaaaoaaaaaoaaaaaooooo aaaaaoaaaaaaa
I II ] GreatingManeuverCurve
@ I cricklMENul,then
81 MEN and L MANE
The EBLMANEUBER
Menuwillappear.
2 Glick "ON" radio button of L MANE

"ON"in '1.EBLMANEUBER' will be setanda supplemental
line,a maneuver
curveandWOLwill appearon the radardisplay.
Setthe startingpointof the supplemental

line usingthe
trackballand clickto fix it.
The positionof WOL(steeringpoint)willchangedependinguponthestarting
line.lf the WOLis behindownship'sposition,
pointof the supplemental the line
colorof the WOLsillchange.
line usingthe IEBLI

Setthe bearingof the supplemental
control.
linewillbe the bearingin whichownshipwill
The bearingof the supplementral
finallymove.The positionof WOLwillchangedepending uponthe bearingof
the supplementalline.lf WOLis behindownship'sposition, the linecolorof the
WOLwillchange.
Select by left-clickingthe trackball.

The settingwill be established.
However, if theWOLis behindownship's
position,
theentryof Clickwill be rejectedandthe settingwill not be
established.
Note:lf the [EBL] is pressedduring the EBL MANEUVER

operation,
the Menu will be closed and the maneuver curve creating
operationwill be stopped.
3-97
aaao aaaaaaaaaaoaaooaaaaaaaaaaaoaaaaaaoa
Click "OFF" radio button of BL MNEUVE

"OFF"in'1 .EBLMANEUVER" functionwill
wiIIbe set andthe EBLMANEUVER
setto OFF.
ClickExn.
SupplementalLine
':.\-;
REACH
R
W OL
o
Own Ship'sPosition ScheduledRoute
WOL : Steeringpoint
REACH: Distancebetweenwhen the wheel is steeredand when the ship beginsto turn
R : Turning radius
3-98
oaoaaaaaaaaaoaaaaaoaaaaoaoaaaaaoaaaaoaa
3-99
SECTION4
OF RANGE
D BEARING
Measurementby Trackball..............,..,.................
4-1
Measurementby RangeRings.............................
4.2
Measurementby EBLsand vRMs........ --....-..-...--
4-2
Measurementbetwe€nTwo OptionalPolnts......44
aoaoooaoaaaoooo aaoaaooooaoaoooaoaoaaoaa
Measurement
by Trackball'
1 . Checkthe target echoes on the radar display.
2. Movethe cross cursor mark to a target by the trackball.
The [CURSOR]on the radardisplayindicatesthe bearingand rangeof the

target.
fromownship'sposition.
The rangeis a distrance
CURSORil
TRUE 45.0' True bearingof the oursor relativeto own ship
5.0nm Rangebetweenthe cursor anda own ship
g REL wn strip
4fi
Target Cursor
,/
, ,,ls.ot..tu
v
Fig.4.1
4-1
aooooaaaooaaaaaoaaoaooaaaaoaaaoaeaaaaoo
Measurementby RangeRings
Press
TheRangeRingswill appearon the radardisplay.
The range betweenthe target and own ships can be determinedby visually
measuring thetarget'spositionthatliesbetweentwo rangerings.
(The range ring intervalis fixed and indicatesat the upper left of the radar
display.)
by EBLsandVRMs''''
Measurement
[!$@! 1. press to serectEBLIdisprayandoperation.

@
The"EBLf indication at the lowerrightof the radardisplaywill be selectedand
the EBLI willappearas a brokenJine on the PPIdisplay.
2. Tum the [EBL]controlto put EBLI on a target.
The bearingof the EBL1 will appearat the lowerright of the radardisplay.
The EBL1bearingrepresents thetarget'sbearing.
3. Press ([9 to select VRMI display and oPeration.
The "VRM1"indicationat the lowerrightof the radardisplaywill be selected

andtheVRMI will appearas a brokenlinecircleon the PPIdisplay.
4. Move the broken-line VRMI to the target by using the

trackball.
. Therangeof the VRMI fromownshipwillappearatthelowerrightofthe radar

display. The rangeof VRM1 signifiesa distancebetweenthe targetand own
shio.
Referto Fig.4.2 in the next page.

In thisfigure,the rangeandbearingare;
Range: 5.0nm
Bearing: 45.0"
4-2
aoaooaaaoaoaaaaoaaaoaooooaaaaaaooaooaaa
EBLl
270
EEII 45.0'
EBL2
Qllfll 5.0nm
O VRM2 nm
180
+
---------->
EBL Control
Fig.4.2
4-3
aoaof aooaaaaooaoaaaooaaoooolaaoaaa aof aa
betweenTwoOptionalPoints
Measurement
[@@| i. eressGD to selectEBL2displayandoperation.

The"EBL2"indication at the lowerrightof the radardisplaywill be selectedand
the EBL2will appearas a dottedlineon the PPIdisplay.
2. Leftclick the p switch at the lower right of the EBL2.
3. Using the trackball, move the starting point of EBL2 to one

(A) of the two points.
( S e eF i g . 4 . 3 . )
4. Turnthe [EBL]controlto move EBL2to the other point (B).
(SeeFig.4.3.)
5. Press to select VRM2display and operation.

[9
(r VRM marker)willappearon a dottedlineof the EBL2.
6. Using the trackball,move the VRM2 markeron a dotted line of

EBL2to the point B.
The VRM2markero movesawayfromthe center.ofthe displayby turningthe

trackballclockwise,and closerlo the center.
'VRM2"and
The bearingand rangebetweenthe two pointswill appearin the
"EBL2"areaon the lowerrightof the radardisplay.
4-4
taooaoooaoooooaaoaaaooaaaaooaaaaoaaooaa
E B Ll
VRM2Marker
l\ StartingPoint tf
V-l-gr1
zo\ 'i |
F+ttsilr',I+l
----\f
"
T
t
Own Ship
EBLl 340.0"
EEE so.o'
o vRMl nm
f$flfl 3.0nm
+
------__->
Fig.4.3
It is also possibleto use EBLl insteadof EBL2in measuring the bearingand

rangebetweentwo optional points. In the procedures above,changeEBL2
intoEBLI andVRM2intoVRM1,and left-click C of the EBL2in step2.
4-5
SECTION5
OPERATIONOF ARPA
lllilililr,r,,,,,
U s ingA RP A . . . . . . .....................................................................5-1
5. 1 t Nt T lASL E T TT N.......--........................
G ........................5-2
SeitingCollision Decision Criteria: SAFEL|M|T...............5-2
Automatio SettingMode(System Start)..............................5-4
SeftingRangeScale: RANGESCALE................... ..........54
SettingOwnShip'sSpeed........ ..............5-5
MYOD ES ET T | N G ...........................................5-7
5 . 2 Dt S P t _A
SettingMotionDisplay ModeITM/RMI.............-.................5-7
SeftingBearingDisplay Mode[Azl MOOEI........................5-7
5 . 3 T A RG ElDT N o .D | SP L AY ...................... .......................5-8
5.4 TARGET ACQU|S|T|ON ..................5-9
Automatic Acquisition [AUTOI.............................................5-9
M anualA c quis i ti o n N U AL
IMA .......-..................................5-11
I
Useof AutomaticandManualAcquisition Modes[G21, GZ2l
lA c QM A NUA L I ...................................5-12
5. 5 A RP ADA T A D tSP 1 AY .......................... .......................5-13
of V ec t o rs
Dis play .................. ..............5-13
Displayof PasiPositions IPASTPOSNI...........................5-16
aaoaaoooaaaaaaaaaoaooaooooaooooooaaoooo
UsingARPA
Attention
There are the followinglimitationson use of the target acquisitionand tracking

functionsof ARPA:
III Resolution between adjacent targets and swapping during automatic

tracking
Dependingon the particulardistanceand echo size, resolutionbetween
adjacent targets during automatictracking usually ranges somewhere
between 0.03 and 0.05 nm. lf multiple targets approacheach other,
resolutionwill become about 0.03 nm and this may cause the systemto
regard them as one target and thus to swap between them or lose one or
more of them. Such swappingor loss of targets may also occur if the
target image is affected by rain or snow clutter, sea clutter or if the target
movescloseto land.
tilI Intensity of echoes and the tracking function

The intensityof echoesand the trackingfunctionare correlated,and thus
the target will be lost if no echoes are detected for six consecutivescans.
Therefore,if there is a lost target, radar gain must be increasedto improve
targetdetection. lf, however,radargain is increasedtoo much,sea clutter
or other noise may be mistakenlydetectedand trackedas a target,and a
false alarm may result. In such cases,do not apply strongimpactto the
touchpanel,trackballor gain,becausedoingso may causea malfunction.
lrrl Adverse effects of error sources on automatic tracking

To execute accurate tracking,it is necessaryto accuratelyadjust the
[GAIN],[SEA] and [RAIN] controlsof the radar so that the target to be
acquiredand trackedis clearlydisplayed. Inappropriate settingsfor these
controlswill reducethe reliabilityand accuracyof automatictracking.
aaaaooooaoaoaaaaaaaoaoooooooaaaooooaaoa
5.1 INITIALSETTING
The initialsettingsfor usingthe ARPAfunctionsare describedin this section.
SettingCollisionDecisionGriteria: SAFELIMIT
Seesections3.4 "BasicOperalions" of Rangeand Bearing"for descriptions

and 4 "Measurement of
ooeration.
Attention
dependingon the vessel

Setthe optimumvaluesof collisiondecisionconditions,
type, water area, weatherand oceanographic conditions. (For the relations
betweenthoseconditions andalarms,referto section5.7"ALARMDISPLAY.")
Beforestarting,checkthe collisiondecisioncriteriasettings.
SUB1MENU
EE@! 1 Press onthe

mNU o'loFnor.tilkey l.CPA UMIT
screen. 0.0-9.9nm
z.TCPAUMIT
1-99min
3.CPARING
2 Glick U B 1M E N , thenFRPA/AIE|
EIOFF DON
TheARPAMenuwillappear. TRTAL----]
4. I
3 Set CPALIMIT(GlosestPoint of 5.GATE
Approach).
6. I AIS SETNNG I
(1) Left-clickthe "CPALlMlT"editbox.

The numericinputdialogueboxwillbe
opened.
o. EXIT
(2) Setthe numberby pressing

the "+"or "-u keysin dialoguebox.
to setupthevalueentry.
(3)Pressletrttr
The inoutnumberwill be fixed.
5-2
ooaaaoaaaoaaaaoaaaooaaa ooaoaaaaaaoaaooo
4 Displaythe GPALIMITring. SUB1MENU

AIS
l.CPA UMIT
0.(F9.9nm
I t.0 El
2.TCPALIMIT
(1)Clickthe "ON"of "3.CPARING". 1-99min f-loEll
"ON" in"3.CPARING "will be set and
'EPA RING| will appear on the radar 3.CPARING
Eorp DON
display.
5.GATE
lzFrcF----El
AIS SETTING
(2) Shouldthe CPAring not appear,click
the "OFF"of "3.CPARING".
"OFF" in "3.CPARING"will be set.
o. EXIT
Attention: The CPARINGis not appearingin the TRUEVectormode.
5 Set TGPALIMIT(Timeto CPA)

(1)Clickthenumeric of "2.TCPA
section LIMIT'.
The numericinputdialogueboxwill be opened.
(2) Setthenumberby pressing

the"+"or "-" keysinthedialogue
box.
(3)PressleM to setupthevalueentry.
cticklExii.
clicklExF.
Attention: The set values of CPA LIMIT/TCPALIMIT will appear on the

radardisplay.
5-3
aaaaoaaoaaoooaaaaoaoaaaaoa aooaaaoaaaaaa
AutomaticSettingMode(SystemStart)
See sections3.4 "BasicOperations"and 4 "Measurement
of Rangeand Bearing"for descriptions
of operation.
Fig. 5-1 Mode Settingat System Start
Mode Initialsetting Referto Section

DISPLAYMODE RM (relativemotion) 3.4
ACQUIRE AUTOOFF 5.3
TRIAL OFF 5.7
GUARDZONE OFF 3.4,5.6
SettingRangeScale:(RANGESCALE)
The ARPAfunctionscan operateon all rangescales. Usually,set the rangebetween1.5 to 24 NM
on the areaof operation.
depending
Attention: The ARPA acquisition range is 0.1 to 32 NM.
54
otoooaaaoooooaoooooooaoooooaaaooaaaaaoa
SettingOwn Ship'sSpeed
tII Whenthe LOG is not in operation(ManualSetting)

SUB1MENU
lf the LOGis not in operation,setthe estimatedship'sspeedmanually.
I.SET GYRO
0.0-359.9'
I pressthelMENulorFprtotr2
keyon
@!
the screen.
The MainMenuwillappear. 2. IAXIS
3. 2AX|SW
4. 2AXISG
Click UB1MEN , thenlSErnNGil 5. GPS
TheSETTING1Menuwill appear.
Left-clickthe "2.SELECTSPEED' edit E.RANGESELECT

box. fl9enm I t zonm
The"2.SELECT
SPEED"editboxwillbe
selected.
4 GlickIMANUA!
beset.
IIMNUALIwifi
Glick MANUAL SUBI MENU

SETNNG1
"3.SETMANUAL SPEED'willbe set. SET MANUALSPEED
The numericinputdialogueboxwillbe
ooened.
Set the numberby pressingthe "+"
"-" keys in the dialoguebox.
7 PresslEt-tito set up thevalueentry.

Ownship'sspeedwill be sel.
EXIT
5-5
oaaaaoaaaaaaaa aoaaaaaaoooaaoooaaaoaooao
ClicklEXlTl.
ctickiEFtF.
The Subl Menuwillbe closed.
ttrl Whenthe LOGis operating
Whenthe systemis settothe LOGmode,thespeedsignalwillbe enteredautomatically

andtheship's
speedwillappearon the radardisplay.
Thespeeddevices,whichare displayedon the screen,are as follows:

L O G . . . . . . . . . .1.-.a. .x.i sl o g
2AXW............ 2-axislog Speedagainstwater
z/XG .............2-axis log Speedagainstground
cPS...............Speed fromGPS
5-6
aaaaoaooaoooooooooooaaaoaoaaaaooaaaaooo
5.2 DISPLAYMODESETTING
SettingMotionDisplayMode[TM/RM]
Press :'F${$tXj.t&]. buttonon the upperleft of the screen,then selectthe true motion(TM)display
modeor the relativemotion(RM)displaymode.
In the initialstate.the mode is set to RM.
Forfurtherdetailson the TM/RMmodes,referto section3.4 "SelectTrue/Relative

Motion
DisplayMode."
SettingBearingDisplayMode[AZlMODEI.. .
Setthe bearingdisplaymodeby pressingl*gFVitl'PF/CtlF on the upperlefi of the screen.
Not
Forfurtherdetailson theTM/RMmodes.referto section3.4"SelectTrueiRelative
Motion
DisplayMode."
5-7
aaooaaoooaaaaaaaooaaaaaaaooaaooooaaaaoa
5.3 TARGETlD No. DISPLAY

ThetargetlD numberis a numberdisplayednextto thesymbolwhena iargetshipis acquired.
Thisnumberis allocated to targetshipsfrom1 to 50 in the orderthattheyareacquired. Thisnumber
is usedlo identifyeachtargetshipuntilthe targetshipis lot or released.
Attention: Whether the Target lD No. display is turned ON or OFF can be checked only
with a target acquired. For a description of acquisition, refer to 5.4 "Target
Acquisition".
Depress to turnTargetlD No.Display

oN or oFF.
@
WiththisdisplayON,thetargetlD No. is displayednextto lhe capturesymbol.
WiththisdisplayOFF,lhe entiretargetlD Numbers.are non-displayed.
However,the numbersremaindisplayedfor capturedtargetsof which numericdata
displayis specified.
Note
on howto specifythe numericdatadisplay,referto 5.6"DataDisplay.'
Fora description
5-8
aaaroaooaoaoootaaoooaaaaaoaoaaaaaaaooao
5.4 TARGETACQUISITION
Attention
o lt is importantto adjustthe controls[SEA]and [GAIN]properlyin the automatic

targetacquisitionmodeto minimizethe effectof sea clutter.
Targetacquisitioncan be performedin two modes,AUTO and MANUAL,and both

modescan be usedat thesametime.
AutomaticAcquisition IAUTOI
Aftention
o lf untrackedtargetsenterthe guardzonewhen the maximumnumberof targets

(50 targets)is alreadybeingtracked,targetswith lower levelsof dangerwill be
cancelledandreplaced.
@@! 1 GtickEZilor@onthescreen.
Automatictargetacquisition willstart. Thetargetacquiredwill be markedwith
"n" and its targetlD No.,whichwillmovewiththe target. lts vectorwillappear
withinone minute.
Attention: When the Target lD No. display is set to OFF,any acquired target ship will not
be given a target lD No.
aaaaaooaooaaooooaaaaaaaaoooooaaoaooaoao
In theACQAUTOmode,the targetswithina guardzonewill be acquired

automatically.The guardzonec:rnbe set arbitrarily. lf a guardzone is not set,
a guardzoneof 3 NMandt45 degreesin thedirectionof theownshipwillbe set.
(GuardZone 1: Headingdirection, GuardZone2: Sternward direction)
Forthe settingmethod,referto section3.4"SetGuardZones."
Guardzone1 will comeon whenild is clicked.WhenlGZl is pressedagain,

automatictrackingwillturnofi andthe guardzonewill be erasedfromthe radar
screen,butothershipsthatwerebeingtrackedshallcontinueto be tracked.
GuardZone
I
Y
Targetthat has entered the guard zone.
The guardzone intrudersymbol is displayed.
Targetthat has continuedto intrudein the guard

zonefor one minute.
The guardzone intrudedsymbol,acquiredsymbol
and vector are displayed,
Targetthat has moved outside the guard zone.

The capturesymbol and vector are displayed.
The guard zone intrudersymbol is cleared.
5-'10
aaoaaoaaooaaaaaoooaaooaaaaooooooooaoaaa
ManualAcquisition[ACQMANUALI.. . .
Attention
o lf lhe maximumnumberof targets (50) is alreadyacquired,then new targets

cannotbe acquired. To do so, cancelany cunenttargetsthal are not required.
E@ I Press@
Movethe cross cursor on to the target to be acquired,then
press the left trackball button .
The acquiredtargetwill be markedwith" " and it's target lD No. lts vector
willappearwithinoneminute.
Attention: When the TargetlD No. display is set to OFF,any captured target ship will not
be given a target lD No.
Numberof TarqetsandAcquisition
Area
Targetto be acquired
To use the manualacquisitionmode only withoutthe automaticmode on concurrently,

press[ACQAUTO]to turnAutomaticAcquisition OFF.
5-11
aaoooaaoaooaoaaoooaooooaaaooaaaaooooaoo
ManuallY target.
acquired
i--i <-
+ Targetthat has intrudedintothe zone for one minute.
?'- The acquisiiionsymboland vectorare displayed.
Useof Automaticand ManualAcquisitionModes[GZi, GZ2l

lAcQ MANUALI...'
Methodof Operation
Executemanualtargetacquisition
in the automatic
acquisition
mode,thatis, in the statein
mode[G21,GZ2]is ON.
whichtheAulomaticAcquisition
Auto/Manual
Useof Combined Mode
When both automaticand manualacquisitionmodesare used concurrently, important

targetsshouldbe acquiredmanually,and the rest shouldbe acquiredautomatically.lf
newtargetsenterthe zoneand they exceedthe maximumnumberof targetsthat can be
acquired,manualtargetswill continueto be displayeduntiltheyleavethe guardzone,but
acquiredtargetswill be cancelled
automatically accordingto theirdegreeof importance.
5-12
oaaaoaoaaaaaaaaaaaoaaaaaaoooaaoooaaaaoo
5.5 ARPA DATADISPLAY

(Referto the DisplayExampleon page2-1.)
Displayof Vectors
Aftention
o When a targetingor the own ship changescourseor when a larget is acquired,

the vectormay not reacha givenlevelof accuracyuntilthreeminutesor morehas
passedaftersucha coursechangeor targetacquisition.
Even if three minutesor more have passed,lhe vector may includean error
dependinguponthetrackingconditions.
a target'spredictedpositioncan be presentedin the TRUEvectoror RELATIVE

A veclorrepresenting
vector mode. In each mode,a vectorlengthcan be freely changedfor a time int€rvalof 1 to 60
minutes.
lU Vector Mode Selection
True Vector Mode

In the true vector mode,the directionof a target vector indicatesthe true courseof lhe
targetand its veclorlengthis proportionalto its speed.
In thismode,the ownship'svectoris displayed as shownbelow.
In this mode,the movements of othershipsaroundownshipcan be accurately andeasily
monitored. However, no CPARINGcanbe displayedin thismode.
The relativevector is not displayed.

Own ship's vector
5- 13
oaaaaaaaaaoooaaaaaooaaooaaaaaooaaaaoaaa
Relative Vector Mode

ln order to displaythe relativevector of a target,pressthe I T/R VECT I switchto select
the RelativeVectormode.
The relativevector does not representthe true motionof a target,but its relativerelation
with the own ship. This meansthat a targetwith its relativevectordirecledat the own ship
(passingthroughthe CPALIMITring)is a dangerous target.
In the RelativeVectormode,the CPALIMITof targetscan be seenat a glance.
HL
The true vector is not displayed.

CPARING
Relative vector
Therefore,theTRUE/RELmodescan be usedin thefollowing way: TheTRUEvectorcan

be used to knowthe true aspectofa target,and the REL vectorcan be used to knowthe
closestpointof approach(CPA)of a target.
5-14
ooooaoaaoooooooaoooataaooooooaaaaaoaaoo
fll VectorLength: VECTORTIME

The vector length of a target is proportionalto its speed, and the vector time can be
changedfrom 1 to 60 minutes.
The figurebelowillustratesa vectorlengthof a targetof six minutes. The tip of the vector
representsthe target'sexpectedpositionin six minutes.
Current position Futurepredictedposition

(Six minuteslater in this example)
Settinq Vector Time

In orderto displaythe relativevector,pressthe [TRUE/REL]keyto selectit.
Click the numericsection

of "vEcroR". vEcroRE
LIMIT
The numericinputdialogueboxis
l-----T5lnm
oDened. 1 mrn
PASTPOSN
GUARDZONE a
When changingvector constants,left-clickthe numbers0 to 9
or the "+" or "-" keys to changethe vectors.
3 clickffi
The numberinputwillbe appliedas the vectortime.
5-15
aaaaooaaaaoaaaaaoaaoaoaooooaaaoaaaaaaaa
Displayof PastPositionsIPASTPOSN]
Pressthe [PASTPOSN]switchto displaythe past positionof targets.
A maximumof six pastpositionsfor eachtargetcan appear. Everytimethe IPASTPOSN]
switchis pressed,thetimeintervalis changedbetweenO.5,1,2 and4 minutes. Whenthe
intervalis 4 and the switchis pressedagain,the past posilionson displaywill be turned
OFF.
The intervalis displayedunderPASTPOSNin the
ARPA information screen. When OFF is
displayed, thepastpositiondisplayis turnedoff.
The trail modeis interlockedwith the vectormode
to allowthe past positionsof a targetto appearin
the Trueor RelativeVectormode. In the Relative
Vector mode, the target's relative past positions
are displayed. ln the True Vector mode, the
target's true past positions are displayed after
calculatingthem from its relative bearing and
range,andthe courseand speedofthe ownship.
Fig. 5-2showsan exampleof a screen,and Table
5-1showsthe meaningsof the symbolson the radarscreen.
Guard zone
Lost target into the
Trackball
Dangeroustarget
(Cursor)
i.q Past positions

il
Untracked
NAV line
Safe target
Past Positions
(Straightcourse)
Fig.5.2 Exampleof Display(ln NorthUp andTrueVectorMode)

ln additionto the marksand symbolsshownabove,fixed/variable
rangemarkers,eleclronic
bearinglinesandothersymbolsareshownin an actualimage.
5-16
ooooaaooaaoaooaaaoooaoaaoaaaaa
Table5.1 Deflnitionsof Svmbols
Vector/Symbol Definition Remarks

Trackedtarget
Dangeroustarget Alarm characters (GPA/TCPA)appear

(cPA/TCPA) and an alarm sounds. The vector and
symbol blink.
t--'---: Initial acquisition Displayedafter a target is acquired and

!:
i..._..__.; mark uniil its vector is displayed.
Target with its data When designating a target's data

indicated indication with the trackball, the target's
tr symbol is changed into tr and the

target's lD is indicated. However, in
case of a lost target or a dangerous
target,its corresponding symbol is
displayed instead of n.
Lost target Alarm characters(LOST)appear and an
+ (This symbol appears alarm sounds. No vector is displayed,

when a target cannot but the symbol blinks.
be tracked for any
reason.)
Target that has Alarm characters(GZ) appear and an

V entered the guard alarm sounds.
zone The symbol blinks.
+ Trackball cross
cursor
Post positions of
This cursor is used to select a target
when acquiring manually,canceling
targets and for setting numerical data.
The symbols and vectors are only
targets displayedwhen [PASTPOSN] is ON.
The position interval can be set to 0.5, 1,
2 or 4 minutes.
5-17
ooooaaaaaooaaaaoaaaaaoaaaf aooaoooaoaoao
5.6 DATADISPLAY
Attention
o Whena targetor the own ship changescourseor when a targetis acquired,the

vectormay not reacha given level of accuracyuntil three minutesor more has
passedaftersucha coursechangeor targetacquisition.
Even if three minutesor more have passed,the vector may include an error
depending uponthe trackingconditions.
Typesof DataDisplay
TargetData
Targetidentification (l D) lD numberof the target
Truebearing:T BRG 0.1 degreeunits
Range: RNG 0.01NMunits
I rue course: l"uuE 0.1 degreeunits
Truespeed: .TSPD 0.1 knotunits
Closestpointof approach(CPA) 0.1 NM units
Timeto CPA(TCPA) 0.1 minuteuni8s
Bow crossingrange(BCR) 0.1 NM units
Bow crossingtime (BCT) 0.1minuteunits
Targetsthat have their numericdata displayedare indicaledwith the symbol."a"to

distinguishthem from otherlargets.
Note
lf a target'sdata is displayed,bui withoutthe symbol"n", sucha targetexistsoutside
the currentlyshown radar display.
5- 18
aaaaaaaaaaooaaaaaaaaaaaoaaaaaaooaaaaaoa
Methodof DisplayingTargetDataITGTDATA]
@ 1 Press@
f$fi'P Xwitt appearin the CURSOR( ) at the upperrightof the radar
screen.
Move the cross cursor to a target (being tracked) to indicate its

data using the trackball. Next, press the left trackball button
to select it. (Up to two targetscan be selected.)
Thedataof thedesignated targetwillbe displayed,
andthe symbolwill changeto
Thetargetdatawillremainon the radardisplayuntilthetargetis lostand its
vectordisappears,or untilanothertargetis designated.
lf a targetwiththe" i--; " symbolis designated,onlyitstruebearing(BRG)and
range(RNG)willappearuntilitsvectorappears.
Cancellationof DisplayingTargetDataITGTDATAI ' :' ' ' '
E@ 1 Press@
intheCURSoR(
?,illi!A?#willappear )atthe upperrightof the radar
screen.
Move the cross cursor to a target (being target)to indicate its

data using the trackball. Next,press the right trackball button
to select it.
targetwill be deleted,andthe symbolwill,changeto

Thedataof the designated
acouisition
mark.
5-19
ooaaaaaaoooaooaaaaoaaaaaooaaaoaaoaaoaoa
5.7 ALARM DISPLAY

TheARPAsystemprovidesthe followingalarms:
Dangeroustrargetalarm: CPA/TCPA
Guardzone intrusionalarm'.GZ
Losttargetalarm: LOST
Systemfunctionalarm: ARPA(DATA)
Gyroset alarm: SETGYRO
.'
DangerousTargetAlarm: (CPA/TCPA)
CAUTION
lf eitherthe CPALIMITor TCPALIMITis set to zero,thenthe
dangeroustargetalarmwill notoperate.
Sincethesealarmsmay includesomeerrorsdependingon the
officerhimselfshould
the navigation
targettrackingconditions,
makethe finaldecisionfor shipoperationssuchas collision
avoidance.
In the ARPA system, targets are categorizedinto two types: tracked targets and
dangeroustargets. The degreeof dangercan easily be recognizedon the displayat a
glance,so thatan officercaneasilydecideto whichtargethe shouldpayattention.
The typesof targetsand alarmsare shownbelow.
DangerousTargetAlarm
Symbolon Alarm Conditions

Status Alarmsound
CRT characters
o CPA>CPALIMIT
Tracking (oFF) (oFF) r O>TCPA
target
. TCPA>TCPALIMIT
Beeping . CPA<JPALIMIT
Dangerous CPA/ (pee-poh)
u LIMIT
target TCPA Acknowledgeable O<TCPA<TCPA
CPALIMITandTCPALIMITThesettingvalues
5-20
aoaaaaaaaaaaoaotaoooatloaoaaaaaof oaaaao
GuardZoneAlarm IGUARDZONE]
CAUTION
In settinga guardzone,it is necessary
to adjustradartuning,
gain,seacluttersuppression andrain/snow cluttersuppression
to ensurethattargetechoesaredisplayed in theoptimum
conditions.Theguardzonealarmis notgenerated for the
targetsthatare notdetectedby radar.
The guardzonefunctionis usedto seta zoneat an arbitrary

rangeandto soundan alarm
a targetintrudesintothiszone.
Referto section3.4 "SetGuardZones"on howto set guardzones.
Guardzone
GuardZoneAlarm
Symbolon Alarm
Status Alarmsound Conditions
CRT characters
Target Beeping(pipipi) An alarmsoundis
the
entering Acknowledgeable generatedwhen a target
guarozone n GZ entersthe 0.5 NM range
betweenthe outerand inner
nngs.
5-21
aaaaaooaaaaoooaaaaaooaoa aaaaoaaoaaaaaao
Lost TargetAlarm ILOSTTARGETI'' ' '

Attention
lf the radartuning,gain,seacluttersuppressionand rain/snowcluttersuppression

are not appropriate,the lost target alarm may be generatedfrequently,so that
adjustmentsshouldbe madecarefully.
Whenit is impossible to continuetrackinganyacquiredandtrackedtarget,the LOSTtarget

alarmwill be generated. The typicalcausesfor this alarmare shownbelow,buttheyare
not limitedto lhese:
. The targetecho is veryweak;
- Thetargethasenteredthe shadowof landor a largeshipanditsechois notbeing
received:
. Thetargetechois hiddenby sea clutter.
LostTargetAlarm
Symbolon Alarm Conditions
Status Alarmsound
CRT characters
Losttarget
+ LOST Beepsound(pee)
Acknowledgeable
Thealarmwillsoundonce
whena losttiargelsymbolis
displayed.
5-22
aoaaaooooaaooaooaoaoooaaaoooaaaoalaaaao
SystemFunctionAlarm [ARPA(DATA)I' ' ' ' '

Whenan abnormalstateof an inputsignalor a problemin the processingcircuitryoccurs,a
characterstring or alarm is generated. When an alarm occursfor any ARPAfunction,
ARPA(DATA)will appearin the WARNINGdisplayarea,but no indicationis madein the
ARPAinformationdisplay. The causeof the alarm may be an operationalenor in ARPA,
so pleasecontactlhe servicedepotor manufacturer.
Gyro SetAlarm ISETGYRO]

The NorthStabilizing Kit (NSK)in this systemreceivessignalsfrom a gyro. Evenif the
power is turned off, the system will track gyro motions. However,the system stops
trackingthe gyro if the powerof the mastergyro is turnedoff or if there are any problems
withthe line. Whenthe powerof the mastergyrois turnedbackon,the SETGYROalarm
will be generated.
lf thisalarmis sounded,setthegyro.
GyroSetAlarm
Alarm
Alarm souncl Conditions
characters
Thesignalsfromthe gyroarestopped,butthegyrois
SETGYRO Beepsound(pipi) recovered.
5-23
oooataaaf aaaaaoaoaooaaaaaoaooaoaa oooaaa
5.8 TRIALMANEUVERING
Aftention
a simulationis executedwiththe curent courseand speed

ln lrial maneuvering,
of thetargetship. Since fromactualshipmaneuvers,
the situationis different the
CPALIMITandTCPALIMITshouldbe setwithampleleeway.
Trialmaneuvering is usedto simulatethe courseand speednecessary to avoida collision

when a dangeroustargetappears. When the ship'scourseand speed are manually
enteredagainstthe dataof the acquiredtarget,a checkis madeto determine whetherthere
is anydanger.
The rangesof courseand speedto be enteredmanuallyare as follows:
Course:360degrees (0.1degreeintervals)..................
[EBL]control
Speed: 0 to 100 knols (0.1knotsteps)...... . . IVRMIcontrol
TrialManeuveringin the TrueVectorMode

In the True Vectormode,calculations are made accordingto the valuesset by TRIAL
SPEEDandTRIALCOURSE,and the resultis displayed as a boldJinethatrepresentsthe
changeof the own ship'svectoras shownin the figurebelow (an exampleof the course
changed to starboard).
In thisfigure,the dangeroustargetthat is aheadto the portside becomessafeas a resultof
the simulation.
The targetdata displayfield indicatesthe cunentCPA LIMITand TCPA LIMITvalues
regardless of the resultof the simulation.
NORMAL TRIAL
Trial speed (vector timc)
5-24
aoaaf aaaaaaaaaoaaaoaaaaaaaaaoooaoaaoaoa
TrialManeuveringin the RelativeVectorMode

The resultof trial maneuveringin the RelativeVectormodeis shownby a changein target
vector. ln the figure below(withthe sameconditionsas in the TrueVectormodeon the
previouspage),it is seen that the acquiredtargetis a dangerousone becauseits vectoris
crossingthe CPARING.
NORMAL TRIAL
Change in course
\"ro *,*o
The abovefigureshowsthatthe relativevectorofthe targethas changedas shownin the

(courseandspeed),so thatthetarget'ssymbolis changedto
figureas a resultof simulation
"o"; i.e.,a safetarget. As was the casein lhe TrueVectormode,the datadisplayfield
indicatesthe currentvaluesof CPALIMITand TCPALlMlT,not thoseas the resultof the
simulation.
The coursechangeof ownshipis displayed as a dottedline.
5-25
aaaaooaaaaaooafaaooaaoaoooaaaaaaaaoaaaa
Usingthe TRIALFunction'' ' '
E@! orloFTloMkeyonthescreen.
1 PressttrelnrtEnul
TheARPAmenuwill be opened.
Click UBl MEN , thenFRFffilano [Rln!.

TheARPATRIALmenuwill be opened.
Left-click"ON" under "1.TR|AL".

"1.TRIAL'will be turned"ON"andthe character "T"willblinkbelowthe own ship
thatthesystemis conducting
displayin the radarscreen,indicating a trial.
Makethe settings with the course [EBL] controland speed

wRMI control.
The plot data symbols are "A" for dangeroustargetsand "O"

for safe targets.
SelectOFFunderTRIALin the ARPATRIALmenu.

'OFF"will be setfor'TRIAL"andthe systemwillreturnto the normaldisplay.
cticklExitr.
menuwill be closed.
TheARPATRIAL
cticklb<ltr.
TheARPAmenuwill be closed.
c-zo
oaaaoaoaaaaaaaaao aaaoaoaalooaoooaaooooa
5.9 DELETING TARGETS

UNWANTED
When it is no longernecessaryto continuetrackingacquiredand trackedtargetswith their
symbolsand vectorsdisplayed,or when it necessaryto reducethe numberof vectorsto
makethe screeneasierto observe,unnecessary targetscan be cancelledone by one.
When atl targets are reacquiredfrom the beginning,all the targets on displaycan be
cancelledat once.
DeletingTargets.. '
DeletinEone tarqet
/6
1 Press lgg| .
TheARPAmenuis opened.
2 Placethe cross cursor over the target to be deleted.
3 Pressthe left trackball button.

The symbolandvectorof thetargetwillbe deleted,andonlythetargetechowill
remarn.
or'
60.\ .
Press e9
TheARPAmenuis opened.
Placethe cross cursor over the target to be deleted.
5-27
aoooaaaoa aoaaoooa aooooaaaaaoaaaaaoaoooa
3 Press the left trackball button.

The symboland vectorof the targetwill be deleted,and onlythe targetecho will
remain.
Targetto be deleted.
Attention
When all targetsare deleted,the systemstopstrackingall the targetsand they

mustbe acquiredagain,eitherautomatically or manually. Therefore,do not use
thismethodexcepl when it is necessary
to deleteall targets.
DeletinqalltarEets
1 press lor zsecondsor more.

contanuously
@@!| @
All the symbolsandvectorsof alltargetswill be deleted.
5-28
aaaaaaaaooaaooooaoaooaaaaaaaaoaaoooaaaa
5.10 ARPASETTING
A cnunonr
Thissimulationis a functionto checkwhethertheARPAsystem
is operatingnormally. Do not usethisfunctionexceptto check
ARPAoperation,
avoidusingthis modeduringactualnavigation
Especially,
becauseit will displaypseudotargetson the radarscreen,which
may be confused,withactualtargets. Usingthisfunctionduring
actualnavigation can leadto accidents.
The followingconstantsusedforARPAcan be referredto and modified:
ttl SIMULATOR: Pseudotargetsare generatedon the radar displayto check

whethertheARPAfunctionsareoperatingnormally.
till VD LEVEL: Quartering level for the video to be input to the target
detectioncircuit.
Constanlto calculatetheARPAvectors.
ilil] VECTORCONSTANT:
ltvl GATE: Gatesizeto acquireandtracktargets.
tv1 TESTVIDEO: Test video for use in checkingthe operationof the target
detectioncircuil.
5-29
aaoaoaaaa aaaaooaaaaaoaaaaaoaaaooaaoooao
Simulationr " .. r r " ' t "
GAUTION
Do not changethe VD LEVELand VECTORCONSTANT,
becausetheyare alreadysetto the optimumvalues. Making
any changesto thesemay causedeteriorationin the ARPA
performance.
Pseudo targets are generatedin certain known positionsto check whether the ARPA
processingcircuilsare operatingnormally. Since the pseudotargetsmove accordingto
known parameters,the valuesfor these pseudotargetscan be comparedwith the known
valuesby acquiring,trackingand displayingthem,and therebycheckingwhetherthe ARPA
systemis operatingnormally.
This functionshouldbe used only in the standby
TEST MENU
mode.
//a
eress[#&J to set
the standbymode.
GlickFESi on the screen,

or pressloplotrttl tey.
TheTESTMenuwillappear.
cricrERparFsi .
TheARPATESTmenuwill appear.
Clickthe "I.SIMULATOR"edit
box.
SIMULATOR andthe pulldown
is selected,
menuis displayed. EXIT
5-30
aaaaaoooaaaaaooaaaoaaaaoooooooooooaooao
5 When moving the pseudo target:
I r I scENARrOl
tnen@
cticrFeENARloi], tosetthetransmission
mode.
a pseudotargetat thetruebearing
willbe selto generate
ESeENAFaOd
of 18"andthe relativerangeof 3.2NM.Thetargetwilllhen approachtrue
bearingof 90"andthe relativerangeof 1NMat a relativespeedof
20Ks .Characters"XX"appearblinkingat the lowerof the radardisplay,
showingthatthe systemis executing mode.
ihe simulation
[]rl scENARro2
Click ENARIO , ffren@ mode.
to setthetransmission
F-ECENARIOZ will be set to generatea pseudotargetat the true bearingof

0%ndthe relativerangeof 6NM.The targetwill then approachown ship ai
a relativespeed of 10 ks in a relativecourse of 1801Characters"XX"
appearblinkingat the lowerof the radardisplay,showingthatthe systemis
executing the simulation mode.
Note: When the range betweenown ship and the pseudo target is 0,
the target will disappear.
press
6 Whenfinishingthe simulation, to set the standby
mode,thenclick pEE . @
.OFflwill be set.
11
clickl*lTorffi.
TheTESTMenuwillbe closed.
PseudoTargetParameters
SCENARIO Start point End point Target
NUMBER Distance Direction Distance Direction speed
1 3.2NM 18" lNM g0' 20kts
2 6NM 0' ONM 0" l0kts
3 6NM 18" {NM 1g' 1Okts
4 6NM 45" lNM 45" 10skts
5 6NM 45' 6NM 150" 20kts
6 6NM 45' 6NM 150' 20kts
5-31
aoaoaaaoaaaaaaaaaaoaoaaaoooaaaaooaaaoao
GateSize
GAUTION
Do not changethe presetgate size carelessly.lf the gate
the ARPAacquisition
valueis improper, and trackingfunctions
maydeteriorate.
Otherwise,thismay causeaccidentsto occur.
The Gate Size is definedas an "Area Within which targetsare watchedby the ARPA"processing
circuit.
lf the gate sizeis loo large,targetsare not lost but maybe swappedwith otherclosetargets.
lf the gatesizeis too small,targetsare noteasilyswapped,but maybe lost.
The ARPA processingcircuitis designedto detecttarget sizes and sel an accurategate size
dependingon the rangesand sizes of those targets(NARROWis the standardsize).However,
ihangethe settingparameters to selectthe bestsizein the followingconditions:
set F.llnnnoW in normaloperation.
. Whenacquiringandtrackingtargetsthatspreadwidelyin theangulardirection
(Theangulardirectionof thegateapertureis important)' ' ' ' ' ' ' 'lillflDq
. Whenmanytargetsaredenselycongestedandswappedwithin3NMin a port
(Thegatesizeshouldbereduced)' " ..''f.SM-Atil
5-32
oooofoooooooaoooooaa oaaaaoooaooaaaoaaaa
I presstheIMENO
orFFnoM keyonthescreen.
@l@!
SUBI MENU
2 click FUB1MENUi
, then
FRFA/AC[- '.CPA LIMIT
0.1-9.9nm
TheARPAMenuwill appear.
2.TCPA LIMIT
1-99min
Click the "5.GATE" edit box. 3.CPARING

The"2.SELECT SPEED'edit
boxwill porr Eoru
be selected. TRIAL
Press any of 1 to 3.
Enterthe numberof gatetypeto
change.
cticklEFli. EXIT
The Subl Menu will reappear.
clicklEE.
5-33
aaaooaaooaaf aaoaaaaooaaoaaoaaaaaoaaaaaa
TestVideo.. . '
o TESTVIDEOmay not appearfor targetsthat are not acquiredor tracked,or if the

controls[GAlNland [SEA]are not adjustedappropriately.
TestVideois usedto checkwhetherthe videosignalsundertargetacquisitionand tracking

are inputledto and processedin the targetprocessingcircuitnormally.
However,it is suffcientto checkthatFJ/ErHlin TESTVIDEo is displayed.
Thestartof the Testvideomodeis availableonlyin the Standbymode.
T E S TM E N U
Press to set
@
the standbymode.
Clickili on the screen.

or pressFprtotttlrey.
TheTESTMenuwill appear.
cticrFnpaTFSI.
TheARPATESTMenuwill appear.
Click the "2.TESTVIDEO" edit box.

"2.TESTVIDEO"is selectedandthe pulldown
menuis displayed.
EXIT
Glick "3.VDH" to selectit.
willbe set.
l3.VDHl
Testvideofor 3.VDH(videoinputin quartering
HIGHlevel)willappearon the
radardisplay.
G Press @ to set
the transmissionstate.
7 In orderto changethe test videotype,press to enter

@
the standbymode, then select the test video type from the pull
down menu.
Attention: F I OFFI is set,test videowill not be displayed.
5-34
ooaaaaaaaaaoaaaaaaoaaaaaaaaaaaoaoaooaaa
orFe5tr
cticklEFtn
The TESTMenuwillbe closed.
ExecuteTESTVIDEOin FI/DHInormally.
Attention: lf any target displayedclearly in the radar display is not displayed in the
Test Mdeo mode, the target detection circuit of the ARPA system may
have a trouble.
5-35
SECTION6
TRUE AND FALSEECHOESON
DISPLAY
llliltr"ilillll ilililil11
6-l
RadarWavewlth the Horizon,........-.-.,*.-.,..--..,......,...
6-3
Strengthof Reflectlonfrom the Targets.....,,..................
6-3
6-3
Dlsplayof RadarTransponder(SART) 6.6
ooaaaaooaoaaaaaaaaoaoaoooooooooaoaaaaoa
The radar operator has a role of interpretingthe radar displays to provide his best aid in
maneuvering the ship. Forthispurpose,the operatorhasto observethe radardisplaysafterfully
understanding the advantiages and disadvantragesthat the radarhas. For better interpretation
of
radardisplays,it is importantto gain moreexperiences by operatingthe radarequipmentin fair
weathersand comparingthe targetships watchedwith the nakedeyes and their echoeson the
radardisplay.
The radar is mainlyused to monitorthe coursesof own ship and other ships in open seas,to
checkbuoysandothernauticalmarkswhenenteringa port,to measureown ship'spositionin the
coastalwaters relativeto the bearingsand rangesof the shore or islandsusing a chart, and to
monitorthe positionand movement of a heavyrainif it appearson lhe radardisplay.
Varioustypesof radardisplaywillbe explainedbelow.
RadarWave with the Horizon' '
Radarbeamradiationhas the natureof propagatingnearlyalongthe curvedsurfaceof the earth.

The propagationvaries with the property of the air layer through which the radar beam
propagates.
the distance(D)of the radarwaveto the horizonis approximately
In the normalpropagation, 10%
longer than the distanceto the optical horizon. The distance (D) is given by the following
formula:
+J[zX"-l
D=z.n(Jfr
h 1: Height(m) of radar scanner above sea level
h2: Height (m) of a target above sea level
Fig.6.1 is a diagramfor determiningthe maximumdetectionrangeof a targetthat is limitedby the

curveof the earthsurfacein the normalpropagalion.
6-1
aoaoaoaaoooaaaoaaaaoooaaaaoaaaaaoooaaoa
h 2tmi
?s0
660
600
500
hl{ru} D (rm)
s0
50
40
50
3{
3{ s5
w 20
r0 !0
c
10
v
0
DetectiveRange Height of Target
Height of Scanner
F i g .6 . 1
Whenthe heightof ownship'sscanneris 10 m for instance,

(a) A targetthat can be detectedat the radarrangeof 64 nm on the radardisplayis requiredto
havea heightof 660 m or more.
(b) lf the heightof a targetis 10 m, the radarrangehas to be approx.15 nm. However,the
maximumradarrangeat whicha targetcan be detectedon the radardisplaydependsupon
the sizeof the targetand the weatherconditions, that is, the radarrangemay increaseor
decreasedepending upon those conditions.
6-2
ooooaoooooaaoooooaaaoaaaaaaaaoaooaooaoo
Strengthof Reflectionfrom the Targets

The signal intensityreflectedfrom a tiargetdependsnot only on the heightand size of the target
but also on itrsmaterialand shape. The echo intensityfrom a higher and larger trargetis not
alwayshigherin general.
In particular,the echofrom a coastlineis affectedby the geographicconditionsof the coast.
lf the coasthasa verygentleslope,the echofroma mountainon the inlandappearson the radar
display.
Therefore,the distanceto the coastlineshouldbe measuredcarefully.
Mountain displayedon the radar display
Sea shore line not displayedon the radar display
Fig.6.2
SeaClutters'
Whenthe seasurfaceruffles,brightechoreturnsspreadaroundthecenterof the radardisplay.
The higherthe wavesare,the echoreturnsare larger.
Swirlingcunentsmayappearas a smoothlinelikea coastalline.
False Echoes
The radar observermay be embarrassedwith some echoesthat do not exist actually. These
falseechoesappearby the followingcausedthat arewell known:
tll Shadow
Whenthe radarscanneris installedneara funnelor masl,the echoof a targetthat existsin the
directionof the funnelor mastcannotappearon the radardisplaybecausethe radarbeamis
reflectedon lhe funnel or mast. Whetherthere is monitoringthe sea clufterreturnscan check
somefalseechoesdueto shadows,in whichlheremaybe a partof weakor no returns.
Suchshadowsappearalwaysin the samedirections, whichthe operatorshouldhavein mindin
radaroperation.
6-3
aaaaaooaaaaoaoaaaaoaooooaaaataaaaooo aoa
llll Side Lobe Effect

A broken-linecirculararc may appearat the samerangeas the mainlobeof the radarbeamon
the radar display. This type of false echo can easily be discriminatedwhen a target echo
appearsindependent. (SeeFig.6.3)
Fig.6.3
tllll False Echo by SecondaryReflection

When a targetexists near own ship, two echoesfrom the singletarget may appearon the radar
display. One of those echoes is the direct echo return from the target and the other is the
secondary returnfroma mastor funnelthatstandsin the samedirectionas shownin Fig.
reflection
6.4.
target
Radarscanner
l\ Falseecho from
Secondaryreflection funnel
Funnel of micro wave
Fig.6.4
llvl False Echo by Multiple Reflection

Whenthereis a largestructureor shipwitha highverticalsurfacenearown shipas shownin Fig.
6.5, multiplereflectionreturnsmay appearon the radardisplay. Theseechoesappearin the
sameintervals,of whichthe nearestecho is the true echoof the target.
f l r t'
Fig.6.5
64
aaaooaaaaooof aoaaaaoaoataoooaoaaaoooaaa
M AbnormalPropagation
The maximumradardetectionrangedependsuponthe heightof the scannerand the heightof a
target as describedin the section of "The Horizonfor Radar Beam Radiation". lf a so-called
"duct"occurson the sea surfacedue to a certainweathercondition,however,the radarbeammay
propagateto an abnormallylong distance,at whicha targetmay be detectedby the radar.
For instance, assumingthatthe radarrangeis 6 NM (onthe repetition frequencyof 1100Hz),the
first pulse is reflectedfrom a iarget at about 76 NM or more and receivedduringthe next pulse
repetitiontime. In this case, a false echo appearsat a positionthat is about76 NM shorterthan
the actualdistance. lfthe false echo appearsat 5 NM on the radardisplay,the true distanceof
the targetis 5 + 76 = 81 NM. On the radarrangescaleof 1.5NM (onthe repetition frequencyof
1900 Hz), a false echo may appear at a positionthat is about43 NM shorterthan the actual
dislance.
This type of false echo can be discriminated by changingover the rangescale (the repetition
frequency), becausethe distanceof thetargetchangesaccordingly.
tvll RadarInterface
Whenanotherradarequipmentusingthe samefrequencybandas thaton own ship is nearown
ship, a radar interferencepattern may appear on the radar display. This interferencepattern
consistsof a number of spots, which appear, in various forms. These spots do not always
appearat the same places,so that they can be discriminated fromthe targetechoes.(SeeFig.
6.6)
l.-
-' -'l- tt
:
Fig.6.6
o-c
oaaaaaaaooaaaaaoaaoooaaaaaaaooooaaaoooa
Displayof RadarTransponder(SART)"' " " " r"
The SART(Searchand rescueRadarTransponder) by the GMDSS

is a survivaldeviceauthorized
(GlobalMaritimeDistressand SafetySystem),which used for locatingsurvivorsin case that a
is
distressaccidentoccursat sea. The SARTis designedto operatein the 9 GHzfrequencyband.
Whenreceiving the 9 GHzradarsignal(interrogatingsignal)transmittedfromthe radarequipment
on a rescugship or search aircraft,
the SARTtransmita seriesof responsesignalsto informthe
distresspositionto the rescueand searchparty.
The SARTpositioncan be displayedon the radarvideoby settingthe radaras follows:

O Radarrangescale: 6NMor12NM
@ Sea cluttercontrol: Minimum(Mostcounterclockwise)
€) AUTo sEAfunction: OFF
@ TUNE control: No tuning(to weakenclutterechoes)
@ Interferencerejecter(lR): OFF
@ PROCESS: OFF
SART code
Position of SART
Position of the rescue craft
Land
Otherships
[Exampleof Display]
Attention
a Whenthe radar is set as in O to @ aboveto detectthe SARTsignal,the targets

aroundown ship will disappearfrom the radardisplay. So it is necessaryto
exercisefull surveillanceover the conditionsaroundown ship by visualwalch in
orderto avoidanycollisionor siranding.
lf two or moresetsof radarequipmentare installedon own ship,use one set of 9
GHz band radarfor delectionof the SARTsignaland operateothersas normal
radarsf,ormonitoring aroundown ship,checkingon own ship'sposition
trargets
andavoidance of stranding.
After end of detectingthe SART signal,it is necessaryto readjustthe radarfor
normalnavigation.
o-o
ooaaoaaaoaaoaoaaaaaaaaaaaoaaoaaaoooooaa
6-7
SECTION7
MAINTENANGE
lllllilil"ililllll
lllffiillilrl'r,,
7.1 ROUTTNE
M4rNTENANCE....................................7-1
7.2 MAfNTENANCE ON EACHUN|T..........................7-2
gfl
ScannerNKE-I07 075N1 089/1087 7-2
..............................
Trdnsmitter-receMer
Unit NTG-3037
A/3028......,,.,....,,...7
4
DlsplayUnitNCD4263.....................................................
7-5
CoartetCable(Ji'A-9933-SAJ..........................................7-5
WaveGuide(JMA-99n-44nnq...................................
7{
aoooaooaoaaaaaoooooaaalaaaaaaooaaoaaaaa
7.1 RounNEMATNTENANcE
/\ WARNING
-
Nevercarryout internalinspectionor repairwork of the

equipmentby a user,
lnspection personmay causea
or repairworkby unauthorized
fire or an electricshock.
Ask you'renearestbranch,businessofficeor a dealerfor
inspectionand repair.
Turnoff the main powersourcebeforestartingmaintenance.

Othennrise,an electricshockmay result.
For operatingthe radarequipmentin the good conditions,it is necessaryto makethe

maintenancework as describedbelow. lf maintenanceis made properly,troubleswill
reduce. lt is recommendedto make regularmaintenance work as oftenas possible.
Common points of maintenancefor each unit are as follows:
Cleanthe equipment
Removethe dust, dirt and seawaterrest on the equipmentcabinetwith a pieceof dry

cloth.
cleanthe air ventswith a brushfor good ventilation.
Especially,
7-1
aaaaoaaaaooooaaaooaaaoaaaaaoaaaaoaoaaoa
oN EAcHuNIT
7 ,2 MATNTENANcE
5N 1089/1087'
ScannerNKE-I 0791107
A WARNING
Turnoff the mainpowersourcebeforestartingmaintenance.
Otherwise, an electricshockor injurymay result.
Set the SafetySwitchfor Stoppingthe Scannerto cents[OFF],

Otherwise,an accidentalcontactwith the rotatingscannermay
resultin injury.
Othenrvise, an electricshockmay result.
work, set the safetyswitchfor stoppingthe scannerto

Afterfinishingthe maintenance
"oN".
Precautionson Mounting the Cover

When the cover is removedfor regularcheckupand replacementof parts and refitted
after such work, the proceduresof fasteningbolts shall be taken with the following
precautions:
(a) The properfastening torqueof thefittingbolts(MB)is 1176to 1470N'cm (120to'150

kqf.cm) (which makes the inside watertightand protectsthe packingagainst
permanentcompressivestrain).
The packingstart producingfrom the cover at the torque of approximately1470
N'cm (150kgf.cm)or more.
Do not fastenthe boltswith a torqueexceedingthe specifiedvalue. Otherwise,the
screwsmay be broken.
(b) Usean offsetwrenchof 11 mm x 13 mm or a double-ended wrenchof 13 mm x 17
mm (not longer than 200 mm).
(c) Screwall the boltsby handfirst to preventthem playing,then fastenthem evenlyin
ordernot to causeone-sidedfastening.(Fastenthe boltswith 25% of the required
torqueat the firststep.)
*: Fastentheboltsin the diagonalorder.
7-2
aaaaoaaoaaaaaaaaaaoooooa oaaaooaaaoaaooo
Bolt (stainlesssteel)4-M8 Bolt (stainlesssteel)8-M8

ProperTighteningTorque: | 20 to | 50 kgf/cm Torque: 120to 1Sokgf/cn
Coverof NKE-1089 Coverof NKE-1079

BoltTightening
Procedure BoltTightening
Procedure
(1) Radiator
Attention
o lf the radiatorfrontface(radiation plane)is soiledwithsmoke,salt,dust,paintor

birds'droppings,wipe it with a pieceof softclothwettedwith alcoholor waterand
try to keepit cleanat all times. Otherwise, radarbeamradiationmayattenuate
of radarperformance.
or reflecton il, resultingin deterioration
I Neveruse solventsof gasoline,benzine,trichlorethylene and ketonefor cleaning.
Otherwise, the radiationplanemaydeteriorate.
Checkup and cleanthe radiator.
7-3
oaaaoaaaaaaooaaaooaaaaoaaaaoaaaaaaooaaa
(2) ScannerMechanism
(a) SupplyOilSeal
When there is not a grease nipple, the replenishmentof grease oil is
unnecessary.
Removethe cap of the greasenippleon the front of the S bandradiatorsupport
and supplyit with a greasegun. Makethe oilingeverysix months. The oil
quantityshallbe approximately 100g that is as muchas the greasecomesout
of the oil seal. Usethe greaseof Mobilux2 or EP2of MobilOil.
(b) Oilinggears
Apply greaseevenlyto the tooth surfacesof the main shaftdrive gear and the
encoder drive gear with a spreaderor brush. Greasingin short intervalsis
moreeffectiveto preventthe gearsfrom wear and tear and extendtheir service
life, but greasethose at least every six months. Use Mobilux2or EP2 of
MobileOil.
(c) Mountinglegs
Check the mountinglegs and mountingbolts of the scannerunit case on
corosionsometimesand keepthem in ordernot to causeany danger. Apply
paintto them once a half-yearbecausepaintingis the best measureagainst
corrosion.
Unit NTG-3037A/3028
Wipe dust on the transmitterand receiversectionswith a piece of dry clothe or
feather.
74
oooaaoaaaooaooaoaoaoaaaaaaoaaaoaaaaaoaa
DispfayUnit NGD4263
A WARNING
Do notwipethe radardisplaysurfacestronglywitha pieceof dry
clothor do notusegasoline
or thinnerfor cleaning.Othenryise,
thedisplaysurfacemaybe damaged.
Dusl accumulated on the radar displaywill reduceclarityand darkenthe video. For

cleaningit, wipe it with a piece of soft cloth (flannelor cotton). Do not wipe it strongly
witha pieceof dryclothnorusegasolineor thinner.
GoaxialCable (JMA-9933-SA)
(1) The coaxialpipeglandof lhe coaxialcablewill be providedwith perfectwatertight
treatmentat the timeof installation.Checkit and ensurethat not waterleakoccurs
from the connectionparts. In particularit is recommended to apply paintto the
coaxialpipeglandeverysix months.
WARNING
Do not give strongimpactto the coaxialcableby hittingit with
any toolor hammer.
Otherwise,it may be broken.
s Do not put any heavyarticleon the coaxialcable. Otherwise,

may be broken.
Do nottwistor pullthecoaxialcable. Othenrvise,

it may be
S broken.
for the S band

Procedures
(2) Forfurtherdetails,referto the CoaxialCableConnection
Radar.
7-5
aaaoaaaaaaaoaaaaoaaaoaaaaoaaaaaaaooa aaa
WaveGuide(JMA-9923-7XA/9XA)''''
Attention
o Connectthe wave-guideproperlywith no gaps. Otherwise,such gaps may

causewater leaksor corrosionlater.
aaoooaaaaaaaaaaaoaoaaoaooooooaaaaooaaaa
SECTION8
COUNTERMEASURESFOR
ROUBLEAND ADJUSTMENT
',rrilllll
lllllr||, ililffirilf
8.1 FUNCTTON Vector Constant .

CHECK.......................-......-........-...........8-1
Func on Cheekon Test Menu.......^.-....---.,--....,......,.8-z Uslng Sector Blank functlon
List of Alarms ancl otherI ndications....,,,......................
8-14
8.2 TROUBLESHOOTTNG
...............................................8-17
8.3 COUNTERMEASURES
TOTROUBLE.....................8-18
8.4 REPLACEMENT OFMAJORPARTS........................8-24
ol
Replacenent Perlodica y -----,*....,,..........8-26
PARTS
Replacementof Magnearon(Vl IW01)...........................
8-26
Replacementof the Liquid-Crystal Monitor.-..'....,..8-32 Navi gatlon Equi pn ent Setting
8.5 ADJUSTMENTS................--. .......8-33 Cuftent Coffectlon (SET/DRIFT) $etting.......................8-52
Tuning Adju stment........,....... 8-U TimelDay Oisptay Setting
Beadng AdJustment 8-35 Adiusfinent of Pefionance Monitor (NJU-63/61)........8-58
Adlushnentof Inter switch
RangeAdiuatmen,.........-..............,......,..,..............,,......8-36 ....,,....,.,.8-58
--..,.- - -...,......,......
Anbnna HeightAdjaaun€nt............ 8-37
oaaaoaaaaaaooaaoooaatooooaaooaaaaaoooao
8.1 FUNCTIONCHECK
Make operationalcheck on the radar equipmentregularlyand if any problemis found, investigateit
immediately. Pay specialattentionto the high voltagesectionsin checkingand take full care that no
trouble is causedby any error or carelessnessin measurement. Take note of the resultsof checking,
which can be usedefiectivelyin the nextcheckwork.
Operationalcheck shall be made in accordancewith Table8.1 FunctionCheckList in the order as
soecifiedin it.
Table8.1 FunctionCheckList
Equipment Checkltem Criteria Remarks
Transmitter- TuningLEDof Receiver The LEDis lightingduringoperation 48 NM range
receiverUnit
Videoand echoeson the screen Can be correctlycontrolled
Sensitivity
CRTbrilliance canbe conlrolled
conectly
Variousmarkers
Variousnumericalindications
Lighting
Safety switch and various (1) RefertoCheckofSafetySwitch,
currents and voltages VariousCurrentsand Voltages,
andSignals.
DisplayUnit Communication lines (2) Referto Checkof Peripheral
Units.
Panel (3) Referto Checkof Panel.
ARPA (4) Referto Checkof ARPA.
Magnetron current (5) Referto Checkof Magnetron
Current.
Performance Monitor (6) Referto Checkof Performance
Monitor.
ErrorLoggingDisplay (7) Referto Checkof ErrorLogging
Display.
SystemInformation Display (8) Referto SystemInformation
Display.
8-1
aaoooooaaaaaaaooaoooaaooaaaoaaaaaoaaoaa
FunctionCheckon TestMenu
can be checkedon theTESTMenu.
Thefunctionstatusof thisradarequipment
Glickffi on thescreen.or clickEFnoM rey.
TheTESTMenuwillappear.
Left-clickat any test item.
A clickof the leftmousebuttonat any test itemdisplaysdetailedinformation

on
the selectedtest item.
TESTMENU (1) Check of Memory, Safety Switch,

VariousCurrentsand Voltages,and
Communication Lines
PANELTEST (2) Checkof Panel
ARPATEST (3) Checkof ARPA
4.MAG CURRENT (4) Checkof Magnetron Current
(5) CheckwithPerformance
Monitor
LOGGING (6) Enor LoggingDisplay

INFO (7) SystemInformationDisplay
EXIT
1 click fExr I
8-2
oaoaaaoooaaoaaooo tooooooaooaooooaoaaaao
1 SELFCHECK
1-1SENSOR
[[s@! 1 ctickf-Esnon thescreen.

or ctickloprlon-ilt<ey.
Click SELFCHECK
The SELFCHECKMenuwillappear.
3 Glick I SENSORi.
The SENSORMenuwillappear.
Gheck0l( on each item.

lf any itemis no good,lil$ willbe selected.
In the standbymode,frfwillbe selectedfor VIDEO.
lf the safetyswitchon the scanneris OFF,#frF will be selected.
TESTMENU
C H EC K
SENSOR
* SAFETYSWITCH ScannerRotationSignal
r8
r. AZI PULSE EI SafetySwitchon the Scanner
* HL PULSE Ship'sHeadingLineSignal
@
* MH CURRENT LoadCurrentof HighVoltagein Modulator
@ RadarTriggerSignal
* TRIGGER EI
* VIDEO EI RadarVideo
* FANl @ Fan 1
* FAN2
@ Fan2
EXIT
cricrl-exrrI .
The SELF CHECK Menu will reappear.
cticr l-ExTl .
TheTESTMenuwill reappear.
cticrl-ExTl.
fhe TEST Menu will be closed.
8-3
aaooooaaaaoaaaaaaoaaaooaaaaaaooooaaaaaa
1.2 LINECHECK
click FEEi on thescreen.or clickloprtottTlxey.

Glick SELFCHECK
The SELFCHECKMenuwill appear.
Glick LINECHECK
The LINECHECKMenuwillappear.
Checkwhethereach communicationline is connected.

. Whenthe deviceis connected:
. Whenthe deviceis notconnected:
. Whenthe notrecognition:
TESTMENU
SELFCHECK
UNE
*MT R @q Transmitter-receiver
Unit
* stc.PROC. SignalProcessing
Circuit
*ARPA E&INf, ARPAProcessing Circuit

*SERII,/F SeriallnterfaceCircuit
@NEil
{,NsK ENi NSKUnit
,r,rsw @Ef,
(Option)
lnterSwitch
{.NAVI EEWf, NavigationEquipment1
*NAV2 ENf, NavigationEquipment2
+zAxts @q 2-axisLog
EXIT
click l-ExTL
The SELFCHECKMenuwill reappear.
2 crick |-ETIT-].
TheTESTMenuwill reappear.
3 Click I EXlTl.
8-4
aaaaaaaaooaaaaoaaaoaaaooaoooeaoaooaaaaa
CHECK
1.3MONITOR
Keepoff condition.
Thisfunctionis usefulfor monitoradjustrnentwith serviceman.
NOTE:KeePoff condition.
lf the test pattern of the monitor is displayed, it can be retumed to the
previous screen with "OPT|ON2"or by left-clickingthe mouse.
2 PANEL TEST
2.1 KEY
Referto (2) Checkingpanelin Section8.1.1FunctionCheckon TestMenu.
,| Clickthe FESI on the screen.

TheTESTmenuwillappear. I rEsr MENU I
f--P-Axrr-JEs- ]
EL TES'|'].
Click IPANEL 1. [- KEY---]
The PANELTESTMenuwillappear. 2.[ zuzzER---____l
3. [--LAMP------l
clicklKEtr.
"1.IKEV"is set andthe controlpanel
diagramwill appearon thedisplay.
Whena key on the controlpanelof the
actualequipmentis pressed,the portion
corresponding to the pressedkey in the
paneldiagramwill turnthe color.
cticklEFtn.
TheTESTMenuwillbe finished. o.[ EXnl__]
2 cricklETitr
8-5
aoooooaaooaaaoaooaaaoaoooaooaaaoooaaooa
2.2BUZZER
Referto (2) CheckingPanelin Section8.1.1FunctionCheckon TestMenu.
I rESr MENU I
t PANEL-EL
rEsl-l
Clickthe FESI on the screen.
1.[- KEY-----]
TheTESTmenuwillappear. ---BIZZER--_--l
2.[
EL 3.- LAMP------l
Click
The PANELTESTMenuwillappear.
3 ctickEuzzER.
The BUZZERMenuwill appear.A beepof
the buzzerindicatesthatthe ooerationis
normal.
1 cticklExln.
O.I EXIT I
2.3 LAMP
Referto (2) CheckingPanel in Section8.1.1 FunctionCheckon TestMenu.
Clickthe F-EEion the screen.

TESTMENU
TheTESTmenuwillappear.
PANELTEST
Glick EL KEY
The PANELTESTMenuwillappear.
LAMP
3 Glick|IEME.
The LAMPMenuwill appear.The key
is
is tumedon,the operation
backlight
normal.
1 ctickFEsT.
EXIT
Note: When performing a LAMP test, the operation cannot be checked if the
brilliance level of the key backlight is at maximum. (The brilliance will not
change)
8-6
aaaaaaaaaaaooaoaaaf oaaoaaaaoaaaaaaaaoao
, 3ARPATEST
3.l SIMULATOR
Refer to (3) CheckingARPA in Section8.1.1 FunctionCheck on Test Menu.
I Pressf.-EJ to setthestandby
mo d e .v I TESTMENU I
I ARPArEST I
Clickthe ffEsf'lonthe screen.
The TEST menuwill appear.
2.SCENARIOl
3 CIicKFRPATEET. S.SCENARIO2
4.SCENA,RIO3
TheARPATESTMbnuwill appear. 5.SCENARIO4
6.SCENA,RIO5
T.SCENAR!O6
Click MULA
'1 .SlMULATOR"will
be selectedand the
pull-downmenuwill appear.
Select any setting item of ARPA

Simulatorin the pulldown menu
and pressany of 1to7.
o.[-----Enr---__l
6 Press to set the transmissionmode.
@
1 Glic{_!!e!1.
Note: In normal operation,it is necessaryto turn off the "SIMULATOR"
8-7
aaaaooaoaooaoaaoaaaaaaaaoaaaaaaoooaaaoa
3.2 TESTVIDEO
Referto (3) GheckingARPA in Section8.1.1FunctionCheckon Test Menu.
t to setthestandbY
;H: @
TESTMENU
ARPATEST
Clickthe F-ESIon the screen. l,SIMULATOR
I.OFF
3 CrickFP--ArESI . E
TheARPATESTMenuwill appear. 2.VDG

3.VDH
4.VDL
Click ST VIDE 5.VDlN
.TESTVI will be selectedand the
pull-downmenuwill appear.
Selectany setting item in the

pull-down menu and press any of 0
to 5 numbers.
o. EXIT
//a
6 Presstgi to set the transmissionmode.
Glick [EST] .
8-8
aoaooaaoooaaooooloaoaaaaaaaoaaaaaaaoooa
3.3 STATU$
@@f, I or clickEprloHllrey.
ctickFEsnonthescreen.
The TEST Menuwill appear.
Click ARPATEST
Menuwillappear.
TheARPATEST
Cliclt
The STATUS Menu will appearto indicatethe ARPA setting values and
conditions.
VectorConstant
TESTMENU
(Refer to Vector Constant in Section 8.5
ARPA ADJUSTMENTS)
STATUS QuantizationLevelinAutomatic Acquisition
*CONSTANT E (Refer to QuantizationLevel in Section8.5
*VID LEVELTD E ADJUSTMENTS)
* vtDLEVEL Hr @ QuantizationLevelon mediumand Short
*vtD L E V E L L o W@ Ranges(Referto Quantization Levelin
SectionS.5ADJ USTMENTS)
* GATE
SlzE]lEEtrII
QuantizationLevelon LongRange
*TRACKING E (Referto QuantizationLevelin Section8.5
ADJUSTMENTS)
G ate Size
(Referto Gate Size in Section5.10 ARPA
SETTING)
CurrentNumbersof TargetsUnderTracking
EXIT
]|[| I ctickfExtrL
TheARPATESTMenuwill reappear.
2 Glick I EXITl.
TheTESTMenuwillbe reappear.
3 Click I EXITl.
8-9
aaaooaaaoooaaaoaaaf aaaooooaaaoaaaaooaaa
4 MAG CURRENT
@@ 1 ctickFEsnon thescreen.or ctickloprtotlil rey.

Select"ON" radio button of G CURRE

'ON" in "4.MAGCURRENT'will be set. The magnetroncurrentis displayed
at the bar-graphon the TEST Menu.
TESTMENU
SELFCHECK
P TEST
ARPATEST
ERRORLOGGING
STEMINFO
Magnetron
current
EXIT
Check"5-9.5" in the 24 NM range.
]|[ 1 ctickl-Exfl.
The TESTMenuwill be closed.
8-10
ooaaoaooaoaoooaaaaooaaoaoaooooaooooaooa
5 PM (PerformanceMonitor)
Referto (5) CheckingPerformanceMonitorin Section8.1.1FunctionCheck
on Test Menu.
Gtickthe FEEI on the screen. TESTMENU

1. SELF CHECK
Select"ON"radiobuttonof m. 2. PANEL
lf the PerformanceMonitoris installed."ON" 3. ARPA
in 'S.PM"will be sei and the statusof 4.MAG CURRENT
performancemonitorwill appearby the [PM] Eorr floN
5.PM
bar-graphin the TEST Menu.
loFF EJOH
Press5 again."5.PM"will be set to "on"and
6. ERRORL
the [PM] indicatorin the menuwill disappear.
7. SYSTEMINFO
cticklExtrorFe51. PM r,-il-il-il-ix
The TEST Menuwill be closed.lf "5.PM"is
set to "ON".the statuswill be set to'OFF'
automatically.
o. EXIT
8- 11
aoaaaaaaooaaaoaaoaoaoaaaooaaaoaaaoaoaao
lf any system error occurs, the selected characters will indicate the communication
linein whichthe erroris caused. The errorsthat are releasedwill also be indicatedin
iime sequence.
or clickFprlottilrey.
on thescreen.
ClickFEStr
Click ERRORLOGGING
The ERRORLOGGINGMenu will appearand the locationin which an error
has occurredwill appearby selectedcharacters..
I TEsrMENU I
frlERRo-F-mmim----l
r. I ALLCLEAR I
o.---Exlr----'l
EqI 1 crick[=*''l'
TheERROR LOGGINGMenuwillbeclosed.
2 PressI EXITl.
8-12
oaaaaaaoaaaoaaoaoaaao ofaaoaoooaoooaoaoa
7 SYSTENINFO
The currentsysteminformationwill be indicated.
@! 1 GtickF-EEIonthescreen.or ctickFFTIoM rey.

Click SYSTEMINFO
The SYSTEM INFORMATIONMenu will appear to display the currenl
system information.
TESTMENU
o
rTadudl
l-iler.oi.00---l
EXIT
]|[ I cricklEnfl.
The TEST Menuwill reappear.
2 GlickEm.
8-13
aaaaoaoaoaaaaaaoooaa aaoaaaooaaaaooaoooa
List of Alarms and other Indications'

Table8.2 Listof GyroAlarms
Message Description
SETGYRO of NSK or settingof initialvaluesfor gyro.
Requiresinitialization
TM RESET Own ship'spositionhas reachedat approx.607oof the radarPPI
radiusin the TM mode.
POSNRST Changethe latitudeand longitudesentence.
Table8.3 Listof ARPAAlarms
Message Description
CPA/TCPA CPA/TCPAof a target (ARPA)
GZ A targetapproachingown ship existsin a guardzone.
LOST A targetunderacquisitioncan not be tracked.
Table8.4 List of OperationalErrorMessagesand Warnings
ErrorMessage Descriotion
OUT OF RANGE Triedto createa guardzone outsidethe specifiedrange.
CHANGERANGE The rangeis set outsidethe specifiedin creatinga guardzone.
MAX POINT Triedto enternavigationinformationbeyondthe specified.
CAN'TTRANSMIT Triedto transmitwithin 1 secondafterstandbyor when the
transmitter-receiver has any trouble.
MAXMARK Tried to enter more than 20 plot marks.
CAN'TCHANGE Key in with the [+] or [-] at any placewhereonly a numericalvalue
can be enlered.
NO GYRO DATA Any operationrequiringGyro daia was made without it.
INVALIDDATA Tried to enter any data beyondits range.
NO POSITIONDATA Any operationrequiringpositiondatawas madewithoutit.
CHG RELVECTOR Triedto displaya CPAring in TRUE mode.
MAXTARGET The maximumnumberof targets(50 targets)is underacquisition.
SELECTSTRAIGHT The operatorset PM to ON withoutselectingstraight.
NOTALLOWED lmproperoperation
8-14
aaaaaoaaaaaaaaaaooaaoaaaaaoaoooaaoaaaa
Table8.5 List of InterSwitch

Alarmsand Messages
ErrorMessage Description
MASTERRANGECHG Triedto changethe masterrange.
ALREADY
SELECTED Selectedthe alreadyselectedpattern.
ISW END! The switchoverof the InterSwitchended normally.
ISWBUSY! Accessto the ISW menuwas madeduringinterswitching.
MTRST.BY! ThemasterMTRis in thestandbymode.
ISW STRAIGHT Failedin straightconnection
whenthe InterSwitch
systemstops
operating.
ISWSTAND-BY! The InterSwitchrecoverednormally.
ISWTIMEOUT Communication erroroccurredbetweenInterSwitchand display.
ISWERROR! The InterSwitchis disabled.
Note
An error messageand a warningare displayedat lowerright(shownbelow)in radar
displaymode.
,LAY INF
1.70
vRM2T2.2O1n
Displayposition
8-15
I aoaaaaooaaoaaaaaaaaoaaaaoaoaoaaoaaaooa
Table8.6 List of SystemAlarms
Message Description
MTR(AZ|) Bearingsignalenor
MTR(HL) Ship'sheadinglinesignalerror
MTR(MHV) Modulator'shighvoltageerror
MTR(DATA) Communications unit
errorwiththetransmitter-receiver
MTR(HEATER) Magnetronheatervoltageis abnormal
MTR(REVERSE) Antennalrotalionis reversed
MTRSTATUS Transceiver
statuserror
SSW OFF The safety switch is OFF during switchoverof the scanners
NSK(GYRO) Gyro signalOFF
ISW(DATA) Communications errorwith the InterSwitch
LOG Log signalOFF
NAV(DATA) Datefrom navigationequipmentOFF
DLOG 2-axislog signalOFF
ARPA(DATA) Communications errorwith the ARPAunit
NSK(DATA) Communications errorwith NSK unit
VIDEO RadarvideoOFF
TRIGGER TriggersignalOFF
FANl Fan alarm1
FAN2 Fan alarm 2
PROC(DATA) Signalprocessingcircuiterror
SERI(DATA) Serialinterfacecircuiterror
LAN(DATA) LAN l/F circuiterror
232C(DATA) RS-232Ccommunicationseror
MTR(VrB) Abnormalscannervibrations
MrR(TMP) Abnormalscannertemperature
MAG(HDG) Data from Mag compasshave been cut ofi
PROC(AZI) Bearingpulseis abnormal
8-16
aaaooaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaooaaaaaoooaooooooaa
8.2 TROUBLESHOOTING
ln case of semiconductorcircuits, it is deemed that there are few cases in which the used
semiconductordeviceshave inferiorqualityor performancedeteriorationexcept due to insufficient
design or inspectionor by other external and artificialcauses. In general,the relativelymany causes
are disconnectionin a high-valueresistordue to moisture,a defectivevariableresistorand poor
contactof a switchor relay.
Some troublesare caused by defectiveparts,imperfectadjustment(such as tuning adjustment)or
insufficientservice (such as poor cable contact). lt will also be effectiveto check and readjustthese
points.
Meltedfuses are causedby any clear cause. When a fuse is replaced,it is necessaryto checkthe
relatedcircuitseven if there is no trouble. In this case, noie that there is some dispersionin the
fusingcharacteristics.Table8.7 shows a list of fusesusedin the equipment.
Table8.7 Fuse List

Location PartsNo. NominalCurrent ProtectionCircuit Type
DisplayUnit(NSK) F 1 to F4 0.5A LOG.NSK
circuitPC4201 MF6ONR-0.5A
8-17
ooaoaoaoaaaaaaoaaooaaaaaaaaaaaaoaaaaaaa
8.3 ro rRouBLE
couNTERMEAsuREs
As this radarequipmentincludescomplicatedcircuits,it is necessaryto requesta specialistengineer
for countermeasure
for repairor instructions if any circuitis defective.
There are also troublesby the followingcauses,which should be refered to in checkingor repair
WOTK.
Poor Gontactin TerminalBoard of Inter-UnitCables

a) Poorcontaclin terminalboard
b) The cable end is not fully treated, so that it is earthed or contacts with another
terminal.
c) Disconnectedcablewire
Poor Gontactof Connectorwithin Unit
Reference
This radarequipmentis providedwiththe standardsparesas shownin
Table8.8.
Table8.8 Spares(62XRD00198)
Name Type/Code Shape(mm) In use Spare PartsNo. Location

Fuse MF60NR-0.5A I 4 1 2 Fl to F4 Display
NSKCircuit
(szFAD00013) 0 6.4
T
8-18
aaaaaooaaaaaaaa aaoaaaaoaaoaaaaaaaoooooa
Table8.9 SpecialParts
trl JMA.9933€A
PartsNo. Name Type Manufacturer Location Code
v201 Magnetron M'!302 NJRC Transmitter- sVMAAOOO32
recelver
A2O1 Girculator NJC3310 NJRC Transmitter- sAJBVOOOO2
receiver
4203 TRHPL TL378A NJRC Transmitter- 5VLAAOOO32
receiver
illl JMA-9e32-SA
PartsNo. Name Type Manufaclurer Location Code
v201 Magnetron M1302 NJRC Scanner 5VMAA00032
4101 Circulator NJC3320 NJRC Scanner sAJBVOOO04
A303 TRHPL TL378A NJRC Scanner sVLAAOOO32
ilrl JMA-9923-7XA/9XA
PartsNo. Name Type Manulacturer Location Code
V1 Magnetron M15688(J) NJRC Transmitter- 5VMAAOOOS2
receiver
AeO1tA202 Circulator FCX68 TOSHIBA Transmitter- 6AJRDOOOOl
CORPORATIONreceiver
A203 DiodeLimiter NJS6930 NJRC Transmitter- 5E2AA00024
receiver
A302 PinAttenuator NJS6926 NJRC Transmitter- 5ENAC00019
receiver
[fvf JMA-9922-6XN9XA
PartsNo. Name Type Manufacturer Location Gode
V1 Magnetron M1568B(J) NJRC Scanner 5VMAAOOOS2
4101tA.102 Circulator FCX68 TOSHIBA Scanner 6AJRDOOOOl
CORPOMTION
A303 DiodeLimiter NJS6930 NJRC Scanner 5E2AA00019
8-19
oaaaaaaaaaaoaaaaaoaaaaoooaaaaoaaaaooooo
Table8.10 RepairCircuitBlock(JMA-9933-SA)
Location CircuitBlock Type Remarks
Scanner Motorwithgear MPEM3OO3O AC2201230V 36
Scanner Motorwith gear 3Q(MEDonly)
M P E M 3 O 1 1 O AC2201230v
Scanner Motor with gear MPEM3OO92 10
AC100/110V
Transmitter- Modulator NMA-1253-1 PCz10 (CPA-209)
Including
receiver ExcludingMagnetron
Transmitler- Receiver NRG-88 cEA-334-1
receiver MIC
Including
Transmitter- Powersupplycircuit cBD-1682
receiver
Transmitter- T/Rcontrolcircuit cMc-1205
receiver
Display Powersupplycircuit cBD-1661
Display Terminalboardcircuit cQD-1949
Display NSK/LOGl/F circuit GMJ-462A/B
Display Motherboard cQc-1094
Display Panelcircuit-1 ccK-900
Display Panel circuit-3 ccK-902
Display Displaycontrolcircuit cMc-1218
Display Signalprocessingcircuit cDG-1209
Display AIS l/F circuit NQA4172
Display lnterSwitchcircuit NQE-3141 (Option)
Display LCD display TWSRDOOO2
Display LGDcontrolunit ccK-906
oooooaoooaaaaaaoaaaaooaaaaaaaooaaoaooaa
Table8.11 RepairCircuitBlock(JMA-9932-SA)

Scanner Motorwith gear MPEM3OO3O AC220I230V 30
Scanner Motorwith gear M P E M 3 O 1 1 O A0220l23ov1Q(MEDonly)
Scanner Motorwith gear MPEM3OO92 AC100i110V 10
Transmitter- Modulator NMA534-1 IncludingPC210(CPA-209)
receiver ExcludingMagnelron
Transmitler- Receiver NRG.222 cEA-334{
receiver MIC
Including
Transmitler- Powersupplycircuit cBD-1682
re@rver
Transmitter- T/R mntrol circuit cMc-1205
receiver
Display Powersupplycircuil cBD-1661
Display Terminalboard circuit cQD-1949
Display NSI(LOG l/F circuit CMJ4624/8
Display Motherboard cQc-1094
Display Signalprocessingcircuit cDc-1209
Display AIS l/F circuit NQA-4172
Display InterSwitch circuit NQE-3141 (Option)
Display LCDdisplay TWSRDOOO2
Display LCDcontrolunit ccK-906
8-21
aoooaoaaoaaaaaaoaoaooaaaaaaoaaoooaooaaa
Table8.12 RepairCircuitBlock(JMA-99?3-TXN9XA
Scanner Motorwith gear MDBW10645 AC220|230V 30
Scanner Moior with gear MPEM3O177 AIC2201230V',t6
Scanner Motorwith gear MPEM3O176 AC100/110V10
Transmifter- Modulator NMA-1252-1 IncludingPC210 (CPA-209-1
)
Transmitter- Receiver NRG-98 cEA-334
receiver lncludingMIC
recerver
Transmitter- T/Rcontrolcircuit cMc-1205
receNer
Display NSI(LOG l/F circuit CMJ462A/B
Display Motherboard coc-1094
Display Panelcircuit-l ccK-900
Display Displaycontrolcircuit cM c- 1218
Display Signalprocessingcircuii cDc-1209
Display lnterSwitchcircuit NOE-3141 (Option)
Display LCDdisplay TWSRDOOO2
Display LCD controlunit ccK-906
8-22
aaaaooaaaaoaaaaaaaoaaaaaaooaoaaoaoaaaaa
Table8.13 RepairCircuitBlock(JMA-9922-6XA/9XA)

Scanner Motorwith gear MPEM10645 AC220/230V
3d
Scanner Motorwithgear 1Q
MPEM3O177 AC220|230V
Scanner Motor with gear MPEM3O176 A C 1 0 0 / 1 1 0 V ' l O
Transmitter- Modulator NMA499-1 IncludingPC210 (CPA-209-1 )
Transmitter- Receiver NRG-154 cEA-334
recetver Including
MIC
recetver
Transmitter- T/R controlcircuit cMc-1205
receiver
Display NSIVLOGl/F circuit CMJ462A/B
Display Motherboard coc-1094
Display Panel circuit-2 ccK-901
Display Signalprocessingcircuit cDc-1209
Display InterSwitchcircuit NQE-3141 (Option)
Display LCD display TWSRDOOO2
Display LCD controlunit ccK-906
8-23
8.4 oF MAJ'R PART'
REPLA.EMENT
A DANGER
ln this INTER-SWITGH system,even if it turns OFF
an Indicator power supply, the power supply may
be suppliedto the scanner.
Turn off the main power source of the radar before
open the scanner unit.
ooaoaoaoaoaoaaaoaaaaoaaaaaaaooaaaaaaaaa
CAUTION
o Turnoff the mainpowersourcebeforereplacingparts. Otherwise,an

electricshockor injurymayresult.
o Beforereplacingthe magnetron,turn off the mainpowersourceandwaitfor

5 minutesor moreuntilthehighvoltagecircuitsare discharged.
an electricshockmay result.
Othenrvise,
Takeoff yourwristwatchwhen bringingyourhandscloseto the magnetron.

Sincethe magnetronis a strongmagnet,yourwristwatchmay be damaged
if not takenoff.
Replacement of the LCD unitrequirestwo persons.

lf one personattemptsreplacingthe LCD unit,he/shemaydrop it and get
injured.
Highvoltagewill temporarilyremaininside,evenafterthe mainpowerhas

beenturnedoff. Do not touchthe invertercircuitof the LCD unitwithwet
hands.
Failureto observethis precautionmay resultin electricalshock.
8-25
aaaaaaooooaaaoaoaaoaaaaaoaaoaaaaoaaaaaa
ReplacementofPARTSPeriodically" " ' '.'| ' r " .. " '

The partsshownbelow,it is needto exchangeperiodically.
Parts ExchanqeStandard
1. Magnetron 4,000hours
2. Motor 10.000hours
3. LCD 50.000hours
4. FanMotor 20.000hours
5. Lithiumbattery 3 years
of Magnetron(V1A/201
Replacement )
Removethe shield cover of the modulatorand check lhat no charge remainsin the
high-voltagemodulator circuit. Then, remove the socket of the magnetron.
Removingthe screwsfixing it can demountthe magnetron. When mountinga new
magnetron,do not touch the magnetwith a screwdriveror put it on an iron place.
After replacement,connectthe lead wire correctly.
Handlinq of Maqnetronunder Lonq-TimeStoraqe

The magnetronthat has been kept in storagefor a long lime may cause sparksand
operate unstablywhen its operalionis started. Performthe aging in the following
orocedures:
(1) Warm up the cathodefor a longer time than usually.(20 to 30 minutesin the
STBYstate.)
(2) Startthe operationfrom the short pulse rangeand shift is graduallyto the longer
pulse ranges. lf the operationbecomesunstableduringthis process,returnit to
the standbymode immediately. Keep the state for 5 to 10 minutes until the
operationis restarted.
(3) Afier transmissionis madefor about 15 minutes,conductthe tuningadjustment.
(4) AdjustRV1 withinthe receiverso that the bar graphof the tuningindicatoron the
displayreachesthe reading10 withoutsaturation.
8-26
aoooooaaaaaoaaaoooaaaaatooaaaaaaooaaaoa
< Scanner:
NKE-10754 Magnetron
Exchange
Procedure
o0 0 o 0e
Open portsidecover.
Magnetron
Heading
<-
. Removethe readsof magnetronon

terminal.
. LoosenI boltsA.
And remove2 attachedplates.
Caution)A
Be careful of the handlingof a
magnetron.
' ExchangeMagnetron.
AttachMagnetron,plates,reads.
Settingup scannerunit.
BoltA
AttachedPlate
8-27
aaooeaaaaaa a a aaaoaaaaaoaaaaaaa aaaooaooa
< Scanner: NKE-1087 MagnetronExchange Procedure
Openstarboardcoverof
scanner.
Loosen4 screwsA.
And remove
magnetron-cover.
. RemoveMagnetron-leadsat the
terminal.
. Remove4 screwsB.
RemoveThe Magnetron.
Caution)A
Be carefulof the handlingo f a
magnetronand screws.
. ExchangeMagnetron.
Attach Magnetron, leads and
@ver.
Screw:B Settingup scannerunit.
Magnetron
8-28
aooaoaaaoaaaaoaaooooooeaooaaaaaoaoaaoea
< Transmitter
Receiver:NTG-3037AMagnetron
Exchange
Procedure
. Removeouter-cover.
. Loosen6 screwsA.
. Removeinnercover.
Innercover
. RemoveMagnelronleads
fromterminal.
. Remove9 boftsB.
RemoveMagnetron.
' ExchangeMagnetron.
Attach Magnetron, leads
ano cover.
Settingup TR control
unit.
8-29
t oaaaaooooaaaooaaaaoaaaaaaaaaooaaaaaaaaa
< TransmitterReceiver:NTG-3028 MagnetronExchangeProcedure
Removeoutercover.
Screw:B Screw:C LoosenscrewA.
Andslideandremove
Screw:C attachplate.
Screw:C
Loosen4 screwsB
about4-5turns.
The pinfalls.
Whenpinis notfall,push
the pinby Philips.
Screw: B
Screw:A
Screw: C
Modulator
Screw:C
Remove4 screwsC.
Pullsout rotatingModulator
in the directionof an arrow
for a while.
8-30
aoooaaaoaaaaoaaaooooaaloooaoaaoooaaaaaa
.Magnetron
RemoveMagnetronmver.
RemoveMagnetron leads
on theterminal.
Loosen4 screwsD.
Screw:D
Removethe Magnetron.
Exchange the Magnetron.

Attachthe leadsand cover.
Settingup TR control
unit.
8-31
aaaaooaaaoaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaoaaaaaaaaaaao
of the Liquid-CrystalMonitor
Replacement
Attention
monitoris easily damaged,even by a slighl shock. When

The liquid-crystal
handlingthis monitorfor replacement,be extra carefulso as not lo hit a hard
o$ect againstthe monitor. In addition,do not placethe monitoron a hard
object.
1 . JMA-9933-SA, (Displayunit: NGD-4263)

JMA-9923-7XA/9)G
(1) Four screwsof the froni of a processingpart are loosened.

(2) The cableconnectedfromthe liquidcrystal(LCD)partis removed.(Three)
The band,which is fixingthe cable,is removed.
A cableis drawnout upwards.
(3) Four bolts,which have stopped the liquid crystaldisplay part to the case, are
removed.
(4) A displaypart is removed.
(5) Four screws of a liquid crystaltop and six screws (rotationpart) stoppedfrom the
lowersideare removed.(lt becomesonlythe displaypartof liquidcrystal.)
(6) A reverseprocedureperformsattachmentof a new liquidcrystaldisplaymonitor.
8-32
oaaaof aoaoaaoaaaaaaaaaaaooa aaaaaaaaaoaa
8.5 ADJUSTMENTS
This section describesthe electricaladjustmentsof the equipmentas the
adjustment proceduresto be carried out by service persons at the time
of installation.
CAUTION
S of the equipmentexceptauthorized
Do not carryout the adjustments
servicepersons. Otherwise,an accidentor troublemayresult.
S duringnavigation. Otherwise,the radar

Do not carryout the adjustments
performance may be affected,resultingin an accidentor trouble.
Tuningadjustments,bearingadjustments,and rangeadjustmentscan be performedfrom

the keyboard.
The followingproceduremust be usedto enterthe equipmentintoadjustmentmode:
![!!@ll 1 Gtick
mENUlon or press
thescreen. FFnoM rey.
The MAIN Menuwill appear.
ADJUST
1.TUNE
Click CODEINPUT 0-127 r-T5E
The CODEINPUTMenuwillappear.
S.RANGE
3 ctickI ol , thenIENTEE. 0-999 |-roEl
4.ANTENNA
HEIGH
TheADJUSTMenuwill appear. 3.OVER25m
5. AIS
]fl { crick Exrr 6. SECTORBLANK
TheADJUSTMenuwillbe closed. 7. MBS
Glick I EXITI.
The GODEINPUTMenuwill be closed.
o. EXIT
3 Click I EXlTl.
8-33
oooaaoooaaaaaooaaaoooaaaaaaaoaoaooooaao
TuningAdjustment'
I lf the AUTOTUNEmode is ON,changethe modeto the Manual
mode.
Set the range scale to 24 NM and adjust the [TUNEIcontrol to

the center.
ADJUST
3 Clickmulon the screen. l.TUNE
0-127 t-1.5tr
----_-_]
Or press IOPTION?key. |7.BEARTNG
oo-3srs"@-
3.RANGE
o-eee |-ioEl
HEIGH
4.ANTENNA
Click EIN
The CODE INPUTMenuwill appear. ARPVAIS
5. I
6. I SEGTORBLANK I
5 Gtickl 0 l, $ren|ENTER|. 7. MBS
TheADJUSTMenuwill appear.
'1.TUNE"editbox.
Clickthe
o. EXIT
7 U s i n gl A l a n d l V I , a d j u s t t h e b a r g r a p h ot hf e t u n i n g
indicator on the upper left of the display so that it becomes
the longest, and pressIENTEEto set it.
]|[ 1 crick Extr.

TheADJUSTMenuwill be closed.
2 Glickml
The CODE INPUTMenuwill be closed.
3 Click I EXITL
The MAINMenuwill be closed.
8-34
oaaaoaaoooaoaoaaaaaaalaaooooaaaoooaoaaa
BearingAdjustment''
Adjust the bearingso that bearingof the target measuredwith the ship's compass
correspondsto that of the target echo on the radar display.
Pressthe "N UP/HUP/CUP" button on the upper left of the

screen,then changethe bearingdisplay to relativedisplay
(HuP).
Measurethe bearingof an adequatetarget (for example,a ship

at anchor,a breakwateror a buoy) relativeto own ship's
heading. (For instance,assumethat the bearing of the target
is 25".)
ADJUST
l.TUNE
3 the screen.Or press
GticklMENUlon el27 t lsEl
E.e-EIroNc----------_l
loFnoM tey. I ooo.o
0.(F359.9' I
The MAINMenuwill appear. 3.RANGE
Feee t loEil
HEIGH
4.ANTENNA
4 Glick EI
The CODEINPUTMenuwill appear. s. I ARPVAIS I
6.
5 ctickl-ol , thenIENTER. 7. MBS
The ADJUSTMenuwill appear.
Click the "2.BEARlNG"edit

box. o. EXIT
[d wiII beselected.
E-.e=nRt
The EBL for bearingadjustmentwill appear.

Rotatethe [EBL] control and adjust EBL to the target selected
in Step2 above.
Press[EBL]controlto set it.
Rotatethe [EBLI control and adjust the EBL for bearing

adjustmentto the bearing of the targetselected in Step 2
above.
Press [EBL] control to set it.
(Adjustthe EBL bearingto 25' as the instancein Step2 above)
Repeatthe proceduresfrom step 5 above if the bearingis not

completelycoincidentwith the target'sactual bearing.
ooaaaaaaaoaooaaaaalaoaoooaaoooaaooaooao
][ 1 Grick[Effl.
The ADJUSTMenu will be closed.
RangeAdjustment"
Adjust the range that the rangeof the target on the radar video is indicatedcorrectly.
[@l| thescreen.or pressloFnonl rey.

1 GtickMENUlon
The MAINMenu will appear. ADJUST
I.TUNE
C l i ck E INP v127 t--lsEl
2.BEARING
The CODEINPUTMenuwill appear. oooo
0.F359.9" t I
3 ctickI o l,thenlENTER.
4ANTENNAHEIGH
TheADJUSTMenuwill appear. 3.OVER25m !
5. ARPA,/AIS
Clickthe "3.FLANGE"edit
box. 6. t-sEcroR BLANK I
bRnllGel wittbe selected. MBS
Find a target on the radar display the

range of which is alreadyknown.
(For example,assumethat the actualrangeof
o. EXIT
the targetis 0.33NM)
6 Using l-+l anAl-- l , adiustthe targetecho'spositionto the
position of the targetselectedin step 4 above.PressIENTERI

to set it. -land
Movethe targetechoupwardby J- + downwardOVl-:-l .
]|[ 1 Grick Exrr.

The ADJUSTMenuwill be closed.
clict [-exFl.
The CODEINPUTMenuwillbe closed.
3 Click I EXITl.
The MAINMenu will be closed.
8-36
ooaaaaaaaaaaoaaaaoaaoooooaooaaaoaoaoaao
AntennaHeightAdjustment''
Set the heightofthe antennaabovethe sea level.
Do not changethis settinginadvertently.
@! I thescreen.or pressloprtot't4rey.
GtickMENUlon
ADJUST
l.TUNE
Glick EIN o.l27
TheCODEINPUTMenuwillappear. 2.BEARING
0.0-359.S' oo0.oI
S.RANGE
3 GtickI ol , thenENTEE. (F999
Glickthe "4.ANTENNAHElGHT"edit
box. MBS
HEIG
.ANTENNA will be selected.
Measurethe height from the sea

surface to the top of the antenna,
then select the corresponding o. EXIT
antennaheightfrom the pull-down

menu.
The selectedantennaheightvaluewill be set.
IIL' crickffi.
2 Click IEXII .
The CODEINPUTMenuwill be closed.
3 Clickffi.
8-37
aoaaaooaaaaaaao oooaaaaaooaaaoaaaaaoaaaa
VectorGonstant""'"
Attention
Do notchangethe set valuecarelessly.

The vector constantshall be set to 4 normally. lf the vector constantvalue is
higher,a target'svectorwill be betterfollowedup when the targetand own ship
change there course or speed, but the vector accuracywill be lower on the
contrary.
[!!!@! 1 cticklMFNUlon or pressloFnoM rcy.

thescreen.
The MAINMenuwill appear.
ADJUST
ARPVAIS
2 Click ODEINP
- CONST
I.VECT I
The CODEINPUTMenuwillappear. 1-8 L-rE-f
VIDEOLEVEL
3.LIMITRING
3 ctickl-o-l, thenENTEE. Iorr Eon
TheADJUSTMenuwill appear. 4. AIS
a GlicklARPA/AlSl.
TheARPA/AISMenuwill appear.
Glickthe "1. VECTGONST"editbox.

.VECTCO will be selected.
o. ExIT
6 Input the new value by pressingthe 0
to 8 numberbuttonsor by usingthe [-+--lor f-l buttons,then
pressIENTeE
to input.
]fl r crickExr.
2 Click lEXlTl.
The GODEINPUTMenuwillbe closed.
3 Clickffi.
The MAIN Menu will be closed.
8-38
aoaoooaaooaaaooooaaoooaaaaaoaaoaaoaaaaa
Using Sgctor Blank function .."''. 'r"' I. r"..' ..rr'r
AcAUTToN
That a specified blank area that is displayed by diagonally shaded
potionsdisablesindicationof objectsand trackingof ARPA
The Sector Blank functiontemporarilystops radio wave emissionfrom an antenna,in a

soecifieddirection.
Thisfunctionis availableeven when the interswitchis connected.The settingsspecifiedon
the antenna are memorizedupon the antenna also. When connectingto another controller
using the InterSwitchfunction on an antenna with sector blank specifiedvalues are passed
from the antennato the displayunit.
Existingdata specifiedon the displayunit is overwritten.
Settingis righttern
End poin
Startpoint
Diagonallyshaded:Sectorblank area.
Transmissionis stoppedin this area.
8-39
oaaooooaaaoaaaaaoooooaooaaaaaoooaaaaaoo
Soecifvinosectorblankarea
Specifythe settingsunder operatingconditionsof radio transmission.The settingscan be
specifiedby valuesonly al stand-bycondition.
However, settings specified under transmittingconditions allow precise verificationof
assumeddirections.
ffi!!!@!t 1 GtickI MENU orpressI oFrtottzI rey.

I onthescreen.
ADJUST
2 Glick CODEINPUT SECTORBLANK
1.SECT1
3 Click r 0l , then CttTEfu.
f orr u ON
2. SECT2
I orr tr O N
3. SECT3
4 Click SECTORBLANK
The SECTOR BLANK Menu will f orr T ON
appear. 4. MAKESECT1
5. MAKESECT2
5 Click MAKESECT1
MAKE SECT 1 is selected and it 6. MAKESECT1
entersa modeto specifystartingangle
of sector stop area. A message"SET SETSTARTPOINT
START POINT BY EBL (CONTROL)'' BY EBL(CONTROL)
appears at the bottom of menu. l! ooo.o"
Specifya startingangle usingthe EBL
control.Red line indicatesa specifying
angle.
o. EXIT
6 PushEBL control.
Entersa mode to specifyendingangle.A message"SET END POINTBY
EBL (CONTROL)" appearsat the bottomof menu.
Specifyan endingangle usingthe EBL control.An area enclosedwith the
line becomesa sectorblankarea.
first lineand the currently-setting
Push EBL control.

This operationspecifiesa sectorblankarea.
This specifiedarea is indicatedas a diagonallyshadedarea.
EnIil 1 Gtick
tExTl
TheADJUSTMenuwill reappear.
2 ctickl-Exttl.
When specifyingother areas, select MAKESECT 2 MAKESECT3 in procedures5 above

840
oaa a aoaoa a a f aoa a aoaoa a aao aooa a o ao ooo.ooo
Turninqon/off sector blank
Activatingthis functionrequiresspeciiTinga sectorblankareain advance.
ffi@!@$ or pressI offittz

I ctick l-MEN-tilonthescreen. I rey.
2 Glick GODEINPUT
TheCODEINPUTMenuwillappear.
3 ctick l-o-l, thentrNTERl.

TheADJUSTMenuwillappear.
Glick SECTORBLANK
TheSECTORBLANKMenuwillappear.
Glick"SECT1" to "ON".
of SECT1 changes
Selection fromOFFto ON.
Whenturningonotherareas,pressnumbers
to change.
ADJUST
f[lII I Grick
tExrl. SECTORBLANK
TheADJUSTMenuwill reappear. 1. SECT1
I orr r ON
2 Click I EXITl. 2. SECT2

TheADJUST Menuwill be closed.
Iorr tr ON
3. SECT3
I orr n ON
4. MAKESECT 1
5. MAKESECT2
6. MAKESECT 1
o. EXIT
Notice
When you operate a performancemonitorfunction,pleaseuse it after turningOFF
sectorblankfunction.The pattemdisplayof a performance
monitormay hide by the
settingareaof a sectorblank.
8-41
aaaooooaaoaaaaaaaaaaaaaoaaoooaoaaaooaaa
Level''''
Quantization
CAUTION
Do not changethe set quantization
levelcarelessly. lf the leveldeviates
fromthe propervalue,theARPAacquisitionand trackingfunctionswill
deteriorate.
Otherwise,this may causeaccidentsto occur.
The quantizationleveldeterminesthe minimumsignallevelof the inputvideoto the ARPA

target detection circuit. ln this test, the value of the quantizationlevel can be set in a
rangeof 1 to 63.
lf the value is set to a lower level,weak targetechoeswill be inputtedto the ARPAtargei
detectioncircuit,but much radar noise will also be inputtedto the circuittogether,and
target acquisitionand trackingmay be disabled. Therefore,it is importantto set a value
that is 4 or 5 higherthanthe detectednoiselevel.
1 clickFFNUIonthescreen.or pressloFrloM t<ey.

The MAINMenuwill appear. ADJUST
Glick INP VIDEOLEVEL
The CODE INPUTMenuwill appear.
3 GtickI ol ,then|ENTEE.
4 GlicklARPA/AlSl.
TheARPA/AISMenuwill appear.
5 Click DEO
The VIDEOLEVELMenuwill appear. EXIT
6 Clickthe "3.H|GHLEVEL"editbox.
.HIGH will be selected.
842
aaaoaaaoaaoaaoaaaaaaoaaaaaoaaoaoaaoooa
7 To changethe quantizationlevel, enter a new value using any

of 0 to g or Fl and l--l , andpressIENTFdto set it.
Click I EXITl.
ctick l-bffi l.
GlicrI exr l.
Controlwill be returnedto the MAINMenu.
Do not changethe quantizationlevel LOW LEVEL.
843
aoooaaaaoooaaaoaoaaoooaaoaaaaoaoooltooo
Adjustmentof NSKUnit to Gyro Compassand Log

The NSK Unit of the radar equipmentis of solid-statetype and designedto be compatible
with almost all types of gyro compass by switch operalion (For the step motor type, 35 V
DC to 100 V DC, and for the synchrony-motor type, the primaryexcitationvoltageis 50 V
AC to 115 VAC). Before power-onoperation,the switches51, 52, 56 and 57 on the
NSK Unit(CMJ-462A/B)shallbe set to the type of gyro compassin use in accordancewith
the proceduresas describedbelow The gyro selectswitchon the NSK Unit is set to the
gyralion ratio of 360X and to be compatiblewith the synchronytype before delivery from
factory. Checkthe type of the gyro compassused in own ship and make settingsin the
proceduresbelow. For furtherdetails,refer to Fig. 127 SettingTableof Gyro Compass
and GyroSelectSwitchesof DisplayUnil,Type NCD4263.
O Set the switchesand jumperof the NSK Unit (CMJ462A/B)beforetuningon the radar
equipment.
a 55: Set it to [OFF].

a 36, 7: Set this switchassemblyaccordingto the particulartype of gyro.
36, 37. l'UPl'' Stepsignal
rDOWNl...'. Synchronysignal
S1-1 to 4: Set this switchassemblyaccordingto the particulartype of gyro.

S1-1''' Set this switch assemblyaccordingto the
particulartype of gyro.
luPl '. Stepsignal
rDOWNl " "' Synchronysignal
S1-2,3' Gyration ratio
Gyrationratio s1-2 s1- 3

36x ON ON
90x OFF ON
1 8 0x ON OFF
360x OFF OFF
Gyrationdirection
IONI " Reverse(counterclockwise)
I'OFFI . Normal(clockwise)
51-5-8:Set this switchassemblyaccordingto the particulartype of log.

S1-5"' LogtYPe-1
fONl " Synchronysignal
|OFFJ' Pulsesignal
51-6... L o gt y p e - 2
|ONJ.. 1-axis
IOFFJ' 2-axis
844
aoaaoaaaaooaaaaaoaaa aoaaaaaooaaaoaooooo
s1-7,8- ratio
Log ratio s1-7 s1- 8
100P/30x ON ON
200PEOx OFF ON
400P/180x ON OFF
800P1360 x OFF OFF
@ Connectthegyrosignalandthelogsignalcablesto theTerminal
BoardCircuit.
@ Set57 to [ON].
('Afte,po*et-onoperation,the switch51-4 shallbe set to [ONlif the radarvideoandl

I the indicated
valueof COPURSE (ownship'siruebearing) is reversed. I
\J
Table8.14 Gyroand Log SelectSwitches(S1 Dip Switch)

Sl SettingTable
S1 1 2 3 4 5 o 7 I
STEPTYPE ON
SYNCryPE OFF
GYRO
SIG, 36x ON ON
90x OFF ON
GYRO RATIO
1 8 0x
ON OFF
SIGNAL 360x ON OFF
SET
REV (Reverse) ON
DIRECTION
NORM(Normal) OFF
SYNC ON
TYPEl
PULSE OFF
LOGSIG. l AXIS ON
I TYPE2
2AXIS OFF
LOG
100P/30x ON ON
SIGNAL
SET PULSE x
200P/90 OFF ON
/NM 400P/180x ON OFF
800P/360x OFF OFF
52 SettingTable
1 2 5 4
GYRO LOG
LOGALM N/A
SIMULATOR SIMULATOR
S2
5 6 7 8
GYROALM
N/A N/A N/A
ON=5S.OFF=0.55
The setting of an input voltage ( When the model is a B version )

It removesNSK circuitwhenthe gyrocompass is equalto or lessthan24V DC, beinga
steppingmotortypeand it changesthe settingof a jumperpin.
In the NSKcircuitandwhen removing,the breakerof the displayunitconfirm"OFF"and
the 55 switchof the NSKcircuitconfirmthat it is 'OFF'.
lt removesNSKcircuitand it setsthejumperpin of TP90-92to1-2(The normallysetting
is 2-3 ).
845
oaoaaatooaoaaaooaoooaaoaaaaaaaaoaaooaf a
Adjustment''
MainBangSuppression
The adjustmentis intendedfor suppressingthe main bang that is an echo signalfrom the
microwavecircuit such as waveguideappearingas a circularecho at the radar video
center. lt is the optimumlevel in which the main bangsuppressionis adjustedso that the
mainbang remainsweak on the video.
a Do not changethe adjustedlevel carelessly. lf the adjustmentis improper,the

targetsignalson the shortrangesmay be cleared.
1 Set the radarrangescaleto the minimum0.125NM,set

PROCESS, TGT ENHand FUNCTION to OFF,and set the
system to the Transmitmode.
ADJUST
2 Adjust the operationcontrols as MBS
follows:
IGAIN]control: Maximum
ISEAI control: Center(MANUAL) z.MBSAREA
lRAlNl control: Minimum(MANUAL) 0-255
3 on the screen.
ClickIMENUI
or presspFTtotrtl rey.
The MAINMenuwill appear.
Click CODEINPUT
o. EXTT
5 crickI o-l, thenENTEE.

ClickIMBSI
.
The MBS Menuwill appear.
'1.MBS LEVEL" edit box.

Glickthe
ffiBSTEGI willbeselected.
846
aoaaaaaaooaaaaaaooaaaaaooaaoooooaooaaoo
8 Enter any value to adjust the suppressionrange using 0 to g
or lE and Fl , andpressIENTER
to setit up.
Click "2.MBSAREA" edit box in the state of step 5.

E BSA-REAwill be selected. ADJUST
MBS
10 Enter any value to adjust the
l.MBS LEVEL
suppressionlevelusing 0 to 9 or | +'l F2sE t oEl
2.MBSAREA I
and l---1,andpressIENTEE
to set it l-r5s----[Gf
up.
]ffl 1 crickfExrTl.
The ADJUSTMenuwill reappear.
ctickITl<lTI
ctick l-bcTl
o. EXIT
ctickfEXTl.
847
oaaaaaaaaaoaaoaaaaaooaaaaooaaaaaaaoooao
8.6 SETTING
TrueBearingSetting
Adjustthe bearingthat the bearingangleof the radaris the same as that of the gyro'
SUB1MENU
on the screen.
ClickIMENUI
I
[.setcvRo
--oô-ssst.
or pressFFrtot'tzltey. f
The MAINMenuwill appear. SPEED
z.SELECT
l.MANUAL
SET MANUALSPEED
Glick SUB1MENU , then V
SET
ISETTING1I.
The SETTINGl Menuwill appear.
7.PRF
.HIGH
S.RANGE SELECT
Glick in the "GYROSETTING"edit
fl 96nm E l2onm
box. SETTING2
The GYROSETTINGedit box will be
selected. o. EXIT
4 Enteranyvalueusing0 to 9 or l-+l ana l--l to adjustthe
radarbearingto the gyro bearing,and pressleruteRto set it

up.
cticr l-exil.
The SUB1 Menuwill reappear.
ctickI Exril
The SUBI Menuwill be closed.
3 Click I EXITL
8-48
aoaoaaaaaooaaaaoaaaaaaoaaaataoaoaoaoooo
Ship SpeedSetting
The ship'sspeedand variousotherrelatedvalues,and manualspeedcan be set.
SUB1MENU
I thescreen.
ClickMENUIon SETTINGl
II.SETGYRO 1
or pressloPrloruzltey. o"eTsr5'ref
2.SELECT
SPEED
The MAINMenu will appear.
3.
Click 81 MEN , then ISETTINGIl 4.
5.
The SETTING1Menuwill appear.
6. Y
7.PRF
Clickthe "2.SELECTSPEED"edit box.
S.RANGE
SELECT
The SPEEDedit box will be selected.
Egenm ntzonm
SETTING2
4-1 Manual Speed Settinq
o. EXIT
(1) qicrlMAllUA!
will be set.
SUB1MENU
(2) Click ET MANUALSPEE afterstep2
SETTINGT
aboveis completed.
The SET MANUALSPEEDMenuwill appear. l.MANUALSPEED
0-6o.oktst----ToEl
(3) Clickthe "1.MANUAL
SPEED"editbox.
(4) Pressanyof Oto g or l- + I and[-_l
andpressIENTEE.
The speed(max, 100.0kts)will be set.
o. EXIT
Note: The manuallyenteredspeed is effectiveonly when FENUA!
is set in ELECTS
849
aaoaaaaaaoaaaaaaoooaoaaaaooaooaaoooaoa
4-2 LOG Settinq
(1) ClickITAX-|E
for 1-axisloq.
EllRxtSilwir
beset.
(1) clict<
EIxSW
lg.2-AXS
vUwiil be set.
4-3 Selectionof Dataaqainst Ground for 2-axis Loq (NMEASiqnal)
(1) cticrEnx-i5G.
EznxSGwiltbeset.
r The speed data cannotbe selectedwhen the sentenceVBW of NMEA0183

is not entered.
Click I EX|Tl.
The SUBI Menuwill reappear.
click lEITl.
The SUB1Menuwill be closed.
3 ctick l-ExF-.l.
8-50
aooaoaoaaoaoooaaoaaaaaaaaoaaaaoaaaaaoao
NavigationEquipmentSetting
The datafrom the navigationequipmentsuchas GPS will be selected.
@l { ctickmENUlon
thescreen.
I suBl MENU
or pressFprloM tey. I SETTTNG1
The MAIN Menuwill appear. I SELECT
NAV
Click UBl MEN , thenFETTINGd

The SETTINGI Menuwill appear.
Click SELECTNAV
The SELECTNAV Menuwill appear.
4 Gtickthe "1.L/L(GPS)"editbox.
The "1.L/L(GPS)" edit boxwill be selected.
---__l
- Whenusingno navigation o.f*--- exr
-
equipment
5-1 Selectand set "NONE' by clicking.
- Whenusingnavigationequipment 1-
5-2 Selectand set "NAVI' by clicking .
- Whenusingnavigationequipment 2-
5-3 Selectand set "NAV2" by clicking .
cticklCxTL
The PORTMenuwill be closed.
cticr lexTl.
The SETTINGMenuwill be closed.
ctick[ExTL
8-51
aaaaaaaaaooaaaaaaoaoaaoooaaoaaaaaooaoaa
CurrentGorrection(SET/DRf
FT)Setting
The currenlset and driftwill be set.
for
o Settingwiththisfunctionis validonlywhenIMINUAilor linx9 is selected
ship'sspeedsetting(SPEED).
[[!!@l| thescreen.
1 ctickMENUlon SUBI MENU
SETTINGl
Or pressIOPTION?
key. /DRIFT
The MAINMenuwill appear. l.CORRECTION
E]OFF E ON
2.SET
2 Click 81 MEN then lSTTlNGll. o.tl_3se.e'
t- mEl
The STTINGIMenuwillappear. S.DRIFT
0.(F15.0kts
| 0.0Bl
3 crickFEr/DRTFI
.
The SET/DRIFTMenuwill appear.
click "l.coRREcTloN"to "oN" .

"ON" in "I.CORRECTION"willbe setto EXIT
ooeratethe cunentcorrectionmode.
lf the currentcorrectionmode is not operated,press"I.CORRECTION"Io
set
it to "oFF".
5 Set "I.CORRECTION"to "ON" andclickthe "2.SET" edit

box.
The numericinputdialogueboxwill be opened.
6 Enter any angle of the current set using 0 to 9 or fI and [ ,
and press ENTERto set it up.

Thecurrent
setwillbeset.
*ON"
Set "I.CORRECTION"to andclickthe "3.DR|FT"edit
box.
The numericinputdialoguebox will be opened
8-52
ooooooaaoooooooaoaoooaaoaooaoaoaaaoaooo
8 Enterany angteof the currentset using0 to 9 or [-il ot E ,
and pressENTEAto set it up.

The currentdriftwill be set.
f 1 crick Exrr.
The PORTMenuwill be closed.
2 CrickI ExrTL
Click I EXITl.
,n" tO*, will be closed.
8-53
aoaaoaaoaoaaaaoaaaoaoaaaaoaaaoaaaaaaaaa
Time/DayDisplaySetting
In displayingthe time, it is necessaryto set the LOCALTIME, LOCALDATAand GMT +/-
1 GlicklMENUlonthe screen.
SUBl MENU
1
Or pressIOPTION?
key.
TIME,/DAY
2 Glick U B 1M E N then lSTTlNGll

The STTINGI Menuwill appear.
1959/O1/21
4.GMT +/-
3 Glick|I|ME/DAV. +/- 12:OO
The TIME/DAYMenuwill appear. S.SYNCHRONIZATION

cPs IME
I svlrcHnoruzE
Click "1.UTULOCAL"edit box.

The UTULOCALpull-downmenuwill appear.
o. EXIT
- lf the timeof day is not to be displayed-
5-l Left-clickon "OFF" to select no time display.
- lf UTC(UniversalCoordinatedTime)is to be displayed-
5-2 Left-clickon "UTC" to select UTCdisplay.
- lf LOCAL(LocationTime)is to be displayed-
5-3 Left-clickon "UTG" to select local time display.
'2.LOCAL TIME" edit
1) Left-click in the SUB1MENU
box.
SETTINGI
The numeric input dialogue box will be
AY
opened.
2l Enter any local time using 0 to 9 and 1.UTC,/LOCAL ---El
presslffilto setit up. FoFF
The LOCALTIME will be set. 2.CPARING
100:00
3) Left-click in the "3.LocAL DATE" edit s.LocALD4IE_
box. llsss/0l/27 |
The numeric input dialogue box will be 4.GMT+,/-
opened. +/- 12:00
4) Enter any local date sing 0 to 9 and
presslEfrTFRto
setit up.
The LOCALDATEwill be set.
5) Left-click in the "4,GMT+ I -" edit box.
The numeric input dialogue box will be
ooened. o. EXIT
8-54
aooaaaaoooaaaaooaaaaaoaaaaaaaoaf oooaooo
6) Enter the time difference between the local time and the UTG
usins Fl and [ , andpresslE[rFfl to set it up.
The "GMT + / -" will be set.
Click I EXlTl.
The TIME/DATEMenu will be closed.
Glick I EX|Tl.
Gtickl-b<|Tl.
o Time correctionis not availablewhen the "ZDA" sentenceof NMEA0183is

not received.
8-55
aaoaaaaaoaoaaoooaaaaaaaaaoaaaaaaooaaaea
Adjustmentof PerformanceMonitor(NJU-63/64)'
Set the radar to Master Radarwhen the Inte€witch is

installed.
Press I vnurI to display VRMI and set the rangeof VRM1to

10-18*NM.
" Set the rangeto 12 to 18 NM when a waveguideis installedbetweenthe
'scannerunitand unit.(X bandradar)
the transmitter-receiver
* Set the rangeto 12 to 18 NM when the transceiverunit is incorporatedin
the scannerunitor in case of operatingthe S band radar.
Openthe ADJUSTMenu as directed in

ADJUST
Section8.5,Adjustments.
l,TUNE
F63 1------1-zEl
Left-clickon PM PRESET 2.BEARING
0.F359.9" f--ooool
The PM PRESETMenuwill appear. The radar 3.RANGE
be set to RM, OFF CNTER
will automatically
0-999 r_TT('EI
4.ANTENNA HEIGHT
OFF,IR OFF,PROCESSOFF,TGT ENH OFF,
FUNCTION OFFand 24 NM range. c. ARPA
LABELas 6. ISW
Affix the INFORMATION
suppliedwith the PerformanceMonitor 7. MBS
to a suitable position of the board side --o=izi
---re
E.PMPRESET I
of the DisplayUnit.
Write down the value of the "PM"

indicatorin the TESTMenuand the
o. EXTT
date of checking in the INFORMATION
LABEL.
8-56
oaoooooaaoaaoaoaaaaoooooaaaaoaaaaoaaooo
HL
Adjust the PM pattern
usingthe ten-keyor [+l
and [-l so that its outer
edgeis within10to 18 NM.
(Seestep 2)
PM Pattern
f 1 cticktEnTl.
The PM PRESET Menu will be closed and the display will return to the
stalus existingbeforethe tests were conducted.
Note: . All target acquisitionsby ARPAfunctions will be

cancelled.
The target acquisitioncancelledwhen PM is ON will not
be recovered.
. The radar image is suppressedto make the PM image
easierto see.
Therefore,the ADJUSTMENUshould be always opened
after PM check is completed.
8-57
aaaaooaaoaooaaaooaoaaaoooaooooaaaoaaaao
Adjustmentof Interswitch
[Checkingafter lnstallationl
Turn off lhe ship'smains(switchboard)for the radarequipment.
(1) Checkthat the InterSwitchis installedproperlyaftercompletionof the inslallation.
In particular,checkif the cableis connectedcorrectlyand if the shieldmeshworkof the
cableis groundedproperly.
(2) Checkthat the internalsettingsin each DisplayUnitare madeadequately.
[Checkingthe lnterSwitchOperation]
Turnon the ship'smains(switchboard)for the radarequipment.
(1) GheckingInterSwitchPafterns.
6 lnterSwitchpatternsare availablefor 2-unitsof radarsystem,and 12 lnterSwitch
patternsare availablefor 3-unitsof radarsystem.
For the checkingprocedures,refer to the lnstructionManualfor InterSwitchKit as
attachedhereto.
(2) Checkingand adjustingRadarVideo
The radarsystemwiththe built-inInterSwitchkit shall be adjustedin the followingthree
parameters:
. Rangeadjustment(0 NM adjustment)
. Bearingadjustment
. Roughtuningadjustment
Thesetypesof adjustmentshallbe madefor each InterSwitchpattemas follows:
2-unitssystem-. . . . .-l-trto.i-lanO
.'.....fllo.Tl ,lNtt-l ,l-No3lanolErzl
3-unitssystem .
For the methodof adjustment,referto the respectiveadjuslmentprocedures.
Note: Each adjustment should be performed swiftly after the InterSwitchis equipped.
These adjustmentsshould be performed on the pafterns specified according to the
radar quantity of the system.
lf the patterns are switched without adjustments and the radar is used, accurate
information cannot be obtained from the radar.
a. PatternI No--Tl
O Adjustmentbetweenthe DisplayUnit (right)and the MTR (right).(Adjustby operating
the panelof the DisplayUnit(right))
@ Adjustmentbetweenthe DisplayUnit(left)and the MTR (left).(Adjustby operatingthe
panelof the DisplayUnit (left))
b.PattemIT;n
o Adjustmentbetweenthe DisplayUnit(right)and the MTR (left).(Adjustby operatingthe
panelof the DisplayUnit (right))
6j Adjustmentbetweenthe DisplayUnit(left)and the MTR (right).(Adjustby operatingthe
panelof the DisplayUnit (left))
Systeml
l3-units
a. PatternNtTl
8-58
oaaooaootaaaoaaaaoaaaoaaaalaooooaooooao
O Adjustment between the DisplayUnit(center)andthe MTR(center). (Adjustby
operatingthe panelof the DisplayUnit(center))
@ Adjustment belweenthe DisplayUnit(left)andthe MTR(left).(Adjustby operating
the
panelof the DisplayUnit(left))
@ Adjustment between the DisplayUnit(right)andthe MTR(right),(Adjustby operating
b. PatternI No.2|
O Adjustmentbetweenthe DisplayUnit (center)and the MTR (left).(Adjust by operating
the panelof the DisplayUnit (center))
@ Adjustmentbetweenthe DisplayUnit(left)and the MTR (center).(Adjustby operating
the panelof the DisplayUnit (left))
@ Adjustmentbetweenthe DisplayUnit(right)and the MTR (right).(Unnecessary
adjustment)
c. PatternI No.3|
O Adjustmentbetweenthe DisplayUnit(center)and the MTR (right).(Adjustby operating
the panelof the DisplayUnit (center))
@ Adjustmentbetweenthe DisplayUnit(left)and the MTR (left).(Unnecessary
adjustment)
@ Adjustmentbetweenthe DisplayUnit (right) and the MTR (center).(Adjust by operating
the panelof the DisplayUnit (right))
d. Pattern
tNolz-l
@ Adjustmentbetweenthe DisplayUnit(center)and the MTR (center).(Unnecessary
adjustment)
@ Adjustmentbetweenthe DisplayUnit(left)and the MTR (right).(Adjustby operating
the panelof the displayUnit (left))
@ Adjustmentbetweenthe DisplayUnit(right)and the MTR (left).(Adjustby operating
8-59
SECTION9
TER.SALESSERVICE
llllilr"rilillll
lllllllllll
When you Requestfor Repair ....................

9-1
Recommended Maintenance.....................
9-l
RadarFailureCheckList ......................,.....
9-2
aoaaaoaaaaoaooaaoaoaaaoaaaaaaaooaoaaaoa
Whenyou RequestforRepair .r....
lf you supposethe product may be out of order, read the descriptionin SectionS
carefullyand checkthe suspectedpointagain.
lf it is still out of order,you are recommendedto stop operationof the equipmentand
consultwith the dealerfrom whomyou purchasedthe product,or our branchofficein
your countryor district,the salesdepartmentin our main officein Tokyo.
o withintheWarrantv
Period
lf any failureoccursin the productduringits normaloperationin accordancewilh
the instructionmanual,the dealeror JRC will repairfree of change.In casethat
anyfailureis causeddue to misuse,faultyoperation,negligenceor force major
suchas naturaldisasterand fine,the productwill be repairedwith charges.
a after the WarrantvPeriod

It any defectivefunctionof the productis recoverableby repail the repairof it will
be made at your own chargeupon your request.
o NecessaryInformationfor f
Productname,model,manufacturing dateand serialnumber

Troublecondilions(as detailedas possible.Referto "RadarFailureCheck
List"in page9-2
Nameof company/organization addressand telephonenumber
RecommendedMaintenance ... r r
The performanceof the productmay deterioratedue to the secularchangeof the
partsused in it, thoughsuch deteriorationdependsupon the conditionsof
operation.
So checkupand maintenanceis recommendable for the productin additionto your
dailycare.
For maintenance, consultwiththe near-bydealeror our salesdepartment.
Suchmaintenance will be madewith changes.
For further details of after-sale service, contact the JRC Offices in the list at the end of this
manual.
9-1
aaooaaaaaoaaatoooaoaaoaaaaaoooaaaaoaoaa
RadarFailureCheck List
When placingan orderfor repairof the product,it is requestedthat you couldconfirmthe checkitems
and fill the resultsand sentthe sheetto our contact.
lf thereis any unclearitems,contactthe shipon whichthe productis installed,andgivethe correct
informationon the product.
Shipname: Phone: Fax:

Radargeneralmodelname:JMA- SerialNo. :
(Writethe full modelnamecorrectly)
(1) Checkthe followingitemsin the orderof the number,and circlethe applicable answerbetween
YES or NO.lf the itemcannotbe determined as YESor NO,explainin detailin the item(18),
others.
Q) lf any of the items(1)to (5) if markedas NO,checkthe fuseof the product(referto Section8.2
and8.3).
(3 ) Checkthe items(4) to (17)whilethe transmission (TX)in ON.
*Functionmentionedin the items(14),(15)and (17)maybe optional,answeris notnecessary.
No. Checkltem Result

(1) Powercanbe turnon. (Thelampon the operationpanelis lit) YES NO
Q) A few minutesafterpowering-on,it will becomestandbystatus. YES NO
(3) Whenpowering-on (or TX ON),the LCDdisplayssomething(LCDis lit). YES NO
The scannerrotatesat thetransmission (TX)ON.
(4) YES NO
(Checkthefollowingitemswhiletransmission is ON)
(5) Currentis suppliedto the rnagnetron. (Referto the instruction
manual) YES NO
\o/ Tuningis enabled.(Checkwiththe rangeof 6 NM or more) YES NO
(7\ Fixedmarkeris displayed. YES NO
(8) VRM is displayed. YES NO
Whilenoiseis displayed whileset at SEAandRAINminimum,
(e) YES NO
GAIN maximum, IR-OFF and range48 NM.
(1 0 ) Targetreflectionecho is displayed. YES NO
(11) of reflection
Sensitivity echois normal. YES NO
(2) EBLis displayed. YES NO
(13) Cursormarkmoves. YES NO
. (14) GYROcouisecan be setand normallydisplayed. YES NO
. ( 1 5 ) LOGspeedcanbe normallydisplayed. YES NO
(16) ARPAworksnormally. YES NO
* (7) whenswitching
lf equippedwithan InterSwitch, fromthe straightmode(l l) to YES NO
(x),thefailures(itemsmarkedNO)in the above(1) to (16),are switchedoverlo
theotherunit.
(18) Others(Enormessaqe.
etc.)
9-2
ooaaaooaaaaaooaoaaaoaaaaaooooaoaaaoaaaa
9-3
SECTION10
DISPOSAL
llilffiI
llllffilt llllililililillll
10.1 DISPOSALOF THE UNIT.....;

10.2 DtsposALoF usEDBATTERY...........................10-1
10.3 oF usEDMAGNETRON
DtsposA|- ....................
10-1
10.4 OF TR.TUBE
DISPOSAL
aaaoa a ,aoa aaaaaaaooaaaaaoooaoalaaaaoaoa
10.1 DISPOSALOF THE UNIT

When disposingof this unit,be sure to followthe locallawsand regulationsfoe the placeof
disposal.
10.2 DrsPosAL
oF usEDBATTERY
AWARNING
insulatethe batteriesby tapingthe@andQ,terminals.
It
Otherwise,heatgeneration, explosionor a fire mayoccur.
In this unit,lithiumbatteriesare usedfor the followingparts:

lndicationcontrolboard (CMC-1218) : BT1(Maxell:GR2032)
O Do not store used lithiumbatteriesbut disposeof them as non-combustible

waste.
O When disposingof used lithiumbatteries,be sure to insulatethe batteriesby
tapingthe + and - terminals.
For disposalof batteries,be sure to followthe locallawsand regulation.
For detail, consultwith the dealer you purchasedthe product our business
office,or localgovernment.
10.3 DISPOSALOF
USEDMAGNETRON
Magnetronis used in the Scanner(NKE-1079/1089)
and the Transmitter-receiver
unit
(NTG-3037A/3028)
of theunit.
O When the magnetronis replacedwith a new one, returnthe used magnetron

to our dealeror businessoffice.
For detrail,consultwith our dealeror businessoffice.
10-1
ooaooaaaaaaoaaooaaooaaaaaaaaaoaeatooaaa
oF TR-TUBE
10, 4 DrsPosAL
In the casethat eithermarkshownin Fi9.10.1is on the expiredTR-tube,Radioisotopes
are
in the TR-tube
O Disposalof TR{ube with these marks must be done in accordancewith the

lawsand regulationsof the pertainingcountry.
O Radiationfrom TR-tube has no effect on the human body.
O Don'ttake apartTR-tube.
r.r r.r
aa
Fig.10.1
10-2
aaaaaaaaaaaaoooaaaooaaoaoaooooaaaaoaaaa
t
SECTION11
SPECIFICATIONS
llllilil"ililillll
llllffiilillrr''
11.1 TYPERADAR
JMA.9933-SA .........
11-1
11.2 JMA-9932€AryPE RADAR .........11-2
11.3 RADAR ............................
JMA-9923-7XA/9XATYPE 11-3
11.4 TYPERADAR ............................
JMA-9922-6XA/9XA 114
11.5 SCANNER(NKE-1079) .................
11-s
11.6 S C A N N E R(N K E -1075A ) 11- 6
..............
11.7 SCANNER(NKE-1089-7/9) ..........11-7
11.8 SCANNER(NKE-10875/9) ..........
11-8
11.9 TRANSMTTTER-RECETVERUNIT (NTG-3037A).......11-9
UNtr (NTG-3028).......11-10
11.t0 TR.ANSM|TTER-RECETVER
UN|T
11.11 DfSPLAY (NCD4263) .........'t1-11
11.12 A R P A ..............
11- 13
(N JU 63) ...................
11.13 P E R FOR MA i { C E MON | TOR 11- 14.
11.14 P E R FOR MA N C E MON ITOR(N JU -64)...................
11- 14.
aoaaaaaaoaaaaaoaaaaoaaaaaaoaoaaaooaooaa
SPECIFICATIONS
11.1 JMA.9933.SATYPE
RADAR . r.....
I GeneralSpecification
(1) Typeof Emission PON
(2) Display ColorRasterScan
(3) Screen 23.1-inch ColorLCD
(EffectiveDiameter,morethan 340mm)
(4) Rangescale 0.125,0.25,0. 5,0.75,1.5,3,6,12,24,48
and96 (or 120)NM
(5) RangeResolution Lessthan30m
(6) MinimumDetectiveRange Lessthan40m
(7) BearingAccuracy Lessthan1'
(8) BearingIndication North-upI Head-up/ Course-up
(e) AmbientCondition Temperature
Scanner -25'C to *55'C
(StorageTemperature-25'Cto + 70.C)
OtherUnitsexpectScanner-25'c to +55'c
RelativeHumidity 93%at +40'C
(10) Vibration 2to 13.2H2 amplitude t1mmt10%
13.2to l00Hz,max.accelaration 7mls' constant
(11) PowerSupplyInput Scanner AC2201230V,50/60H2,3<p
AC10Ol11O122O1230V, 50/60H2,1<p
( A C 2 2 0 1 2 3106V' ' ' M E Do n l y )
(12) PowerConsumption Approx.800VA
(13) PowerSupplyInput
VoltageFluctuation InputVoltaget10%
(atthe maximumcablelength)
(14) Pre-heatingTime Within4 min
(15) FromStandby
up to Operation : Within15 sec
I Scanner(NKE-1079) See11.5
I (NTG-3037A) See 11.9

I Display(NCD4263) See11.11
I Monitor(NJU-63) See11.13
Performance
I Option
(1) (onlyheatercollar)
Scannerwith DeicingHeater : NKE-1079-D
(2) RadarlnterSwitch (MAX
: NQE-3141-2 2UNIT)
(MAX4UNIT)
: NQE-3141-4
(3) DisplayUnit(Desktop
Type) : NCD4263T
11-1
ooooooaooaoaaooooooooaaaaaoaaaaaaoaoaaa
I DistancebetweenUnits MaximumDistance
(1) Scannerto Transmitter-receiver 30m
(2) Displayto Transmitter-receiver 35m
T CompassSafetyDistanceStandard
(1) Scanner 1.4m
(2) Transmitter-receiver 2.8m
(3) Display 3.1m
11.2 JMA.9932.SATYPE RADAR ...I" I "" r
t GeneralSpecification
(3) Screen 23.1-inch ColorLCD
(EffectiveDiameter, morethan340mm)
(4) Rangescale 0.125,0.25,0.5,0.7s,1.5,3,6,1
2,24,48
and96 (or 120)NM
(6) MinimumDetectiveRange Lessthan40m
(7) BearingAccuracy Lessthan1'
(8) BearingIndication North-up/ Head-up/ Course-up
Scanner -25'C to *55"C
(StorageTemperature -25'C to *70'c)
OtherUnitsexpectScanner-15"Gto *55"C
RelativeHumidity 93%at +40"c
( 1 0 ) Vibration 2to 13.2H2 amplitude t1mmt10%
13.2 to l00Hz,max.accelarationTmls'
constant
( 1 1 ) PowerSupplyInput Scanner A922O1230V,50/60H2,3q
ACl 00111O1220/230V 50/60H2,19
(12) PowerConsumption Approx.80OVA
( 1 3 ) PowerSupplylnput
VoltageFluctuation InputVoltage +10%
(at the maximumcablelength)
'lime
( 1 4 ) Pr+.heating Within4 min
( 1 5 ) FromStandby
up to Operation Within15 sec
T Scanner(NKE-1075A) See11.6
I Display(NCD4263) S e e1 1 . 1 1
I Monitor(NJU-63)
Performance S e e1 1 . 1 3
11-2
oaaaf aaoaaooaa aaaaaaaaooaaoaaooaaaaaaaa
I Option
(1) ScannerwithDeicingHeater (onlyheatercollar)
NKE-10754-D
(2) RadarlnterSwitch (MAX
NOE-3141-2 2UNrT)
NQE-31414(MAX4UNTT)
(3) DisplayUnit(DesKopType) NCD4263T
I DistiancebetweenUnits MaximumDistance
(1) Scanner- Display : 65m
I CompassSafetyDistanceStandard
(1) S ca n n e r :5.1m
(2) Display : 3.'1m
11.3 J MA.9923.7XN9XA TYPE RADAR

(21 Display ColorRasterScan
(3) Screen 23.1-inchColorLCD
(Effective
Diameter,morethan 340mm)
(4) RangeScale 0.125,0.25,0.5,0.75,
1.5,3,6,1
2,24,48
and 96 (or 120)NM
(6) Mi n i mu m
DetectiveRange Lessthan40m
(7) BearingAccuracy Lessthan1"
Scanner -25"c to *55'C
(StorageTemperature -25"C to *70'C)
OtherUnitsexpectScanner-15"Cto *55'C
RelativeHumidity 93o/oat +40"C
(10) Vibration 2to 13.2H2 amplitudetlmmtl0o/o
13.2 to lO0Hz,max.accelaration7mls2
constant
(11) PowerSupplyInput Scanner 4C2201230V,50/60H2,3q
AC10U 11A/2201230V,50160H2,1
<p
(12) PowerConsumption Approx.60OVA
(13) PowerSupplyInput
VoltageFluctuation lnputVoltagetl0%
(at the maximumcablelength)
(14) Pre-heatingTime Within4 min
(15) FromStandby
11-3
aaaotaaoaaaaoaaaaaaoaaaoaaaooooaaaoaaaa
Scanner(NKE-1089-7/9) S e e1 1 . 6
I (NTG-3028) See 11.10

I Monitor(NJU-64) S e e1 1 . 1 3
Performance
T Option
(1) Scannerwith DeicingHeater NKE-1089-7D/9D(onlyheatercollar)
(2) RadarInterSwitch NQE-3141-2(MAX2UNrT)
NQE- 31414( MAX4UNTT)
Type) NCD-42637
I DistancebetweenUnits MaximumDistance
(1) Scanner to Transmitter-receiver : 30m
(2) Displayto Transmitter-receiver : 35m
I CompassSafetyDistanceStandard
(1) S ca n n e r :1.05m
(z',) Transmitter-receiver : 2.8m
(3) D i sp l a y : 3.1m
11,4 J MA.9922.6XN9XA TYPE RADAR

(3) Screen 23.1-inchColorLCD
(EffectiveDiameter,
morethan340mm)
(4) RangeScale 0.125,0.25,0.5,0.75,
1.5,3,6,12,24,48
and96 ( or120) NM
(6) Minimum
DetectiveRange Lessthan40m
(7) BearingAccuracy Lessthan1"
Scanner -25"cto *55"C
(StorageTemperature -25'c to *70"c)
OtherUnitsexpectScanner-15"c io *55'C
RelativeHumidity 93%at +40"c
(10) Vibration 2to 13.2H2 amplitude
t1mmt10o/o
13.2 to l00Hz,max.accelarationTmlsz
constant
(11) P o w eS
r u p p l yIn p u t Scanner AC22Ol23OV,50/60Hz,3rp
50/60H2,1tp
AC100I 110l22Ol23OV,
114
aaaaoaoooaoooaaaaaaa oaaaoaaoooaoaaaaoao
(12) PowerConsumption Approx.600VA
(13) PowerSupplylnput
VoltageFluctuation lnputVoltagetl0%
(atthe maximumcablelength)
(14) Pre-heatingTime : Within4 min
(15) FromStandby
I Scanner(NKE-1087€/9) See11.6
I Monitor(NJU-ffi)
Performance S e e1 1 . 1 3
T Option
(1) Scannerwith DeicingHeater NKE-1087-6D/9D(onlyheatercollar)
(2) RadarInterSwitch NQE-3141-2(MAX2UNrT)
NOE-31414(MAX4UNTT)
Type) NCD4263T
t DistancebetweenUnits MaximumDistance
(1) ScannerDisplay : 65m
T CompassSafetyDistanceStandard
(1) S ca n n e r :2.4m
(2) Display : 3.1m
11.5 SCANNER (NKE-1079) ... r......... r.
(1) Dimensions : Height837xSwingCircle4000(mm)

(2) Mass : Approx.142k9
(3) Polarization : HorizontalPolarization
(4) DirectionalCharacteristic : HorizontalBeamWidth1.9'(-3dBwidth)
VerticalBeamWidth30"(-3dBwidth)
Side lobe Level Below-26dB (Withint10')
Below-30d8(Outsidet10')
(5) Revolution : Approx.26rpm(60H2)
Approx.2lrpm(50H2)
I,bJ Drive Motor : 4C2201230V,50/60H2,39

1q
AC100/110/220l230V,50/60H2,
( AC220V,1 O...MEDonly)
(7) Wind Velocity : RelativeWindVelocity 51.Sm/s(100knots)
11-5
oaaoaaaaaoaoaaaaaooatooaa aolaaaaaaaaaaa
11.6 . r . . . . . . ..
SGANNER(NKE-I075A)
(1) Dimensions : Height837 x SwingCircle4000(mm)
(2) Mass :Approx.165k9
(3) Polarization : HorizontalPoladzation
(4) Characteristic Horizontal
Directional BeamWidth1.9"(-3dBwidth)
VerticalBeamWidth30"(-3dBwidth)
SidelobeLevel Below-26dB(Withint10')
Below-30dB(Outside t10')
(s) Revolution : Approx.26 rpm (60H2)
Approx.21rpm(50H2)
(6) DriveMotor AC220| 23OV,50/60H2,39

AC10Ol110l220l23OV, 50/60H2,1<p
(7) WindVelocity RelativeWindVelocity 51.Sm/s(100knots)
(8) Transmitting
Frequency 3050t10MH2
(e) PeakPower 30kw
(10) Tube
Transmitting MagnetronIM1302l
(11) PulseWidth/
RepetitionFrequency 0.07ps/1900H2 ( 0.125,0.25,0.5NM)
0.07ps/1900H2
T (0.75NM)Bychangeover
J
0.15ps/1900H2 lls4switch
0.1 ps/1900H2 --1
0.2 us/1900H2 1- (1.sNM) _Qyghangeover
0.3 ps/19ooHz I lJLsPlswitcn
0.2 us/1900H2 -1
0.3 ps/1900H2 t (3NM) ,_U_changeover
0.6 ps/1100H7 ) IJISPlswitch
0.6 ps/1100H2 -T- (6,12NM) By changeover
1.2 psl'ToHz J IJLsPlswitcrr
1.2ttsl570Hz (24,48,96,120NM)
(12) Modulation SolidStatesModulatorCircuit

(13) Duplexer Circulator+ TRHPL
(14) FrontEndModule Built-in
(1s) IntermediateFrequency
Amplifier IntermediateFrequency: 60MHz
BandWidth:2Ol6l3MHz
Gain : Morethan90dB
: Logarithmic
AmplifyingCharacteristics Amplifier
(16) OverallNoiseFigure 7.5dB(Average)
(17) Tuning Manual/Auto
11-6
aoaoaaoaaaaoaaaaaaaaaaaoaaaaaoaooooo aaa
11.7 SGANNER (NKE-1089-7/9).'' r .

(1) Dimensions 7ft Height536xSwingCircle2270(mm)
9ft Height536xSwingCircle2825(mm)
(2) Mass 7ft Appr ox.51kg
9ft Approx.60kg
(3) Polarization HorizontalPolarization
(4) Directional
Characteristic HorizontalBeamWidth7ft 1"(-3dBwidth)
gft 0.8'(-3dBwidth)
VerticalBeamWidth 20"(-3dBwidth)
SidelobeLevel Below-26d8(withint10")
Below-30d8(Outsidetl0')
(5) Revolution Approx.26rpm (60H2)
Approx.2lrpm(50H2)
(6) DriveMotor :7ft AC 22O1230V, 50160H2, 39

AC100l'110 1220123OV,
50/60H2,1<p
9ft AC22O | 230V,50/60Hz, 39
AC1O0I 11012201230V,60H2,1p
(7) WindVelocity : Velocity 51.5m/s(100knots)
11-7
oaaoooaaaaaaaaaaaooooaaa
SGANNER(NKE-1087-6/9).. r . .
(1) Dimensions 6ft Height536 x SwingCircle1910(mm)
gft Height536 x SwingCircle2825(mm)
(2) Mass 6ft Approx.55kg
gft Approx.6Skg
(3) Polarization HorizontalPolarization
(4) Characteristic Horizontal
Directional BeamWidth6ft 1.2'(-3dBwidth)
gft 0.8"(-3dBwidth)
VerticalBeamWidth 20'(-3dBwidth)
SidelobeLevel Below-26d8(withint10')
Below-30d8(Outsidetl0")
(s) Revolution Approx.26rpm(60H2)
Approx.21rpm (50H2)
(6) DriveMotor 6ft AC2201230V,50/60H2,3q

AC100/110/2201230V,50/60H2,1tp
gft AC22O1230V,50/60H2, 3q
50/60H2,19
AC100| 11012201230V,
(7) WindVelocity Velocity 51.Sm/s('tO0knots)
(8) Frequency
Transmitting 9410t30MH2
(e) PeakPower 25kW
(10) Tube
Transmitting MagnetrontM1568B(J)l
( 11 ) PulseWidth/
Frequency
Repetition 0.07ps/1900H2 ( 0.125,0.25,0.5NM)
0.07ps/1900H2 -7- (0.75NM) Bychangeover
0.15ps/1e00Hz J
ljlFlswitch
0.1us/1900H21
0.2 ps/1900H2 J- (1.sNM) By changeover
0.3ps/1e00HzJ l]Flswitch
0.2ps/1900H2 1
0.3 ps/1900H2 -F (3NM) By changeover
0.6ps/1100H2 -J l@lswitch
0.6 prs/1100H2-1- (6,12NM) EE"ng" ouer.
1.2 1tsli7OHz J lI$P I switch
1.2 psl570Hz (24,48,96,120NM)

(13) Duplexer Circulator+ DiodeLimiter
(15) IntermediateFrequency
Amplifier Intermediate Frequency: 60MHz
BandWidth:20l6l3MHz
Gain: Morethan90dB
AmplifyingCharacteristics: Logdrithmic
Amplifi
er
11-8
ooatoooooaaooaaaooaoaooaaoaaaaaooaaaaaa
11.9 UNIT (NTG.3O37A)

TRANSMITTER.RECEIVER
(1) Dimensions Height615 x Width615 x Depth365 (mm)
(2) Structure WallMountDripProof
(3) Mass Approx.36kg
(4) TransmittingFrequency 3050t10MH2
(5) PeakPower 30kw
(6) TransmittingTube MagnetronIM1302]
(7) PulseWidth/
RepetitionFrequency 0.07trs/1900H2 ( 0.125,0.25,0.5NM)
0.07ps/1900H2-T- (0.75NM)
_Eysfangeover
0.15ps/1900H2 J ULSPlswitch
0.1 ps/1900H2
0.2 Usi1900Hz
0.3 ps/1900H2 + (1.sNM) By changeover
FEF|switch
0.2 us/1900H2
0.3 ps/1900H2
0.6ps/1100H2
0.6trs/1100H2 T
1.2 ttsl570Hz J
+ (3NM) Bv chanoeover
ULSPlswitch
(6,12NM) B4[ange over
l-[l=sP
lswitch
1.21tsl570Hz (24,48,96,120NM)

(e) Duplexer + TRHPL
Circulator
(10) FrontEnd Module Built-in
Amplifier Frequency: 60MHz
Intermediate
BandWidth:20l6l3MHz
Gain: Morethan90dB
: Logarithmic
(12) OverallNoiseFigure 7.5d8(Average)
11-9
aaoaaaaaaaaaaaaaoaooaaaaooaaaooaaoaoaao
UNIT (NTG.3O28)
11.10 TRANSMITTER.RECEIVER
(1) Dimensions Height461 x Width460 x Depth227 (mm)
(2) Structure WallMountDripProof
(3) Mass Appr ox.2lkg
(4) Frequency
Transmitting 9410t30MH2
(5) Peak Power ?5kw
(6) Tube
Transmitting MagnetrontM1568B(J)l
(7) PulseWidth/
Repetition
Frequency 0.07ps/1900H2 ( 0.125,0.25,0.sNM )
-r (0.75NM)
0.07trs/1900H2 _Ughange ouel
0.15ps/1900H2 J ULSPlswitcn
0.1trs/1900H2
0.2us/1900H2 1.sNM) By changeover
0.3 ps/1900H2 ]_.
0.2 ps/1900H2
0.3trs/1900H2 3NM) By changeover
0.6us/1100H2 ]_. FlsPlswitch
0.6us/1100H2-T16,12NM) By changeover
1.2 ttsl570Hz J FlsFlswitcn
1.2 Vsl570Hz (24,48,96,120NM)
(8) Modulation SolidStatesModulation

circuit
(e) Duplexer + TRHPL
Circulator
Amplifier IntermediateFrequency: 60MHz
BandWidth:20l6l3MHz
Gain : Morethan90dB
: Logarithmic
11-10
aoaaaaaaoaaaaaoooaoaooooooaaaooaooooaaa
11.11 DISPLAY UNIT (NCD-4263) r r r r.. r....,. r r..
(1) Dimension Height1100x Width700 x Depth850(mm)

(21 Structure Self-Standing Drip Proof
(3) Mass Approx.130k9
(4) Display 23.1-inch ColorLCD
(EffectiveDiameter,morethan 340mm)
(5) RangeScale 0.125,0.25,0. 5,0.75,1.5,3,6,1
2,24,48,
and 96 (or 120)NM
(6) RangeMarker 0.025,0.05, 0.1,0.25,0.5,1,2,
4,8,and 16(o120) NM
(7) RangeAccuracy Lessthan1% of the maximumdistanceof the
rangescalein use or 30m whicheveris larger
(8) VariableRageMarkers 2( VRM 1/VRM 2)
(e) VRM Scale 0.00- 96.0(o1 120.0)NM,Numerical indication
in
4 digits
( 1 0 ) BearingMarker 360"inl"steps
( 1 1 ) Off Center Within66%of the radiusof any rangeexcept
96 NM and 120NM
{ 1 2 ) TrackballCursor Built-in(Targetrange,Relative/ Truebearing
presentation)
( 1 3 ) ElectronicBearingLines 2 (EBL1/ EBL2)(Center/ Independent)
(14) EBLBearingIndication 0.0'- 359.9',Numerical in 4 digits
indication
( 1 5 ) TuningIndication Bar-graph
( 1 6 ) MarkingFunction Electronicmark(Max. 20 points
( 1 7 ) HeadingLine Indication Electronic
( 1 8 ) TrueMotionUnit Built-in(0.25,0.5,0.75,1 2,24and48 NM)
.5,3,6,1
( 1 e ) SEA Manual/Auto
(20) RAIN Manual/Auto
(21) DisplayMode North-up/ head-up/ Course-up
(22) TrailsIndication 0.5m in/ 1 min/3 min/ 6 m in/ OFF
(23) VideoProcess Built-in
(24) InterferenceRejection Built-in(ON/OFF)
(25) GuardZone Ring
(26) NavigationLines Built-in(256pointsx 10 types)
(onlywithnavigation equipmentis connected)
(27) Self-diagnostic-Function Built-in
(28) OwnShip'sTrackIndicate Built-in
(onlywithnavigation equipmentis connected)
(2e) ParallelLineCursor Built-in
11-11
aaaaoaaaaooooaaoa aaaooaaooooaaaaoaaaao
(30) Interface Sub display'l

:T:n-' I recorroz-1(NMEAo1s3)
GPS )
Radarbuoy
LOG
GYRO
RadarInterSwitch(option)
ExternalAlarmoutput
(Reference)NMEA01 83 Interface
O Receivable sentence BWC .GGA
GLL .RMA
RM B .RMC
VBW .ZDA
VTG
@ Priority
(1) Latitude/Longitude GGA>RMC>RMA>GLL
(2) WayPoint RMB> BWC
Note : Thespeedmeasuringaccuracyof speedsensorshallconformto IMO

Resolution
A.824(19).
11-12
aaoaaoaaaaaaaoaaao aaaaaaaaaaa ooooaaoaaa
11.12 ARPA .,....,r' aaaaa
(1) Acquisition
'AcquisitionMode Auto/Manual are acquired
Acquisition(Targets
within guard zone in the automaticacquisition
mode)
. ManualCancellationof
UnwantedTarget EachOne Targetor All Targetat once
(2) Tracking
. Numberof Targets 50 Targets(AutoTracking)
. Acquisition
and
TrackingRange 32 NM
(3) Presentation
. DisplayModes TM (TrueMotion)/ RM (RelativeMotion)
. BearingModes North-up/ Head-up1Course-up
. VectorModes True/RelativeDisplay
VectorLength Adjustablefrom1 to 60 min
. PastPositionDisplay True/ RelativeDisplay
Numberof Dots : 6 points
DisplayTime30sec,1 min,2 min,and4 min
. Timeto DisplayVector Within1 min
. Timeto StabilizeVector: Within3 min
(4) Alarm
. GuardZone 2
. SettingRanges GuardZone1 (0.5- 32 NM),
GuardZone2 (0.5- 32 NM)
. Alarm tndication V markon LCDwith Visible/ Audiblealarm
(5) Safe Limits(CPA/TCPA)
. SettingCondition cPA Lr M r T( 0.1- 9.9NM )
TCPA LIMIT(1 - 99 min)
. AlarmCondition
Safe CPA> CPALIMIT

Target O> TCPA
TCPA> TCPALIMIT
Danger CPA<CPALIMIT,
Target O<TCPA<TCPA LIMIT
. AlarmDisplay
Status LCD Symbol Alarm Buzzer

Safe Ship o OFF OFF
DangerShip A CPA,/TCPA ON
LostTarget , Q rart on LCD

Alarms
Visible/ Audible
11-13
aaoaaaaoaaaaoaaaooaaaaoaaoaooaaaaaaaaoa
(6) DataIndication
. TargetData : Simultaneous Displayfor
and Gontinuous
2 targets
TrueBearing,Range,TrueCourse,
TrueSpeed,CPA,TCPA,BCRand BCT
' OwnShip'sData : Courseand Speed
(7) TrialManeuver ManualSetting
. TrialCourse : 0"- 360"
. Trial Speed :0-100knots
(8) Accuracyof Display : Compliedwith IMOTechnical
Requirements
(e) SystemFailureAlarm Alarms
: Visible/Audible
(10) SpeedInput : Manual/Auto(log)
MONITOR(NJU.63) . .
11.13 PERFORMANCE
Dimensions : Height56 x Width150 x Depth249 (mm)
Mass : Approx.1.5k9
OperationFrequency : 3050130MH2
11.14 PERFORMANCEMONITOR (NJU.64) ...I .. I '

Dimensions : Height56 x Width150x Depth215(mm)
Mass : Approx.1.5k9
OperationFrequency : 9410t30MH2
11-14
APPENDIX
llllililililillll
APPENDIX
RadarSystemGomposition
bble A-1 S band Com ition
Equipment JMA.9933€A JMA-9932-SA
Typeof Scanner NKE-107911) NKE-1075Af 1)
Typeof Performance Monitor NJU-63 NJU-63
Type of Transmitter-receiver NTG-3037A
Unit
Typeof ModulatorUnit NMA-1253 NMA-534
Typeof ReceiverUnit NRG-88 NRG-222
Typeof DisplayUnit (.2)
NCD-4263
*1 NKE-1079-1(100/110VAC 50/60Hz16)
NKE-1079-2(2201230v AC 50/60Hz'td ) (MEDonly)
NKE-1079-2F(2201230V AC 50/60Hzsb)
NKE-1079-1D(100/110VAC 50/60Hz16 ) (Option withdeicingheatercollar)
NKE-1079-2D (22O1230V AC 50/60 Hz 16 ) (Option with deicingheatercollar)
(MEDOnly)
NKE-1079-2DF (22O123OVAC 50/60Hz36 ) (Optionwithdeicingheatercollar)
NKE-10754-112(100111012201230V AC 50/60Hz 1 6)
NKE-1075A-2F(22O|23OV AC 50/60Hz 3 Q)
NKE-1075A-1D t2D(11Ot 11Ol22Ol230V
AC 50|6o Hz 1 6 )
(Optionwithdeicingheatercollar)
NKE-1075A-2DF (22O1230V AC 50/60Hz 3 d ) (Optionwithdeicingheatercollar)
*2 NCD-4263 : Self-standing
type
NCD-4263T: Desktoptype (NWZ-158T:MonitorUnit,NDC-1279T:
ControlUnit,
NCE-772'|: Keyboard
Unit)(Option)
Note: The ARPA unit have the approbation by the Ministry of Transport
Automatic equipmentfor Preventionof collision JAS-9800.
A-1
TableA-2 X bandS Com
Equipment JMA-9923-7XA JMA-9923-gXA JMA.9922-6XA JMA-9922-9XA
Type of Scanner NKE-1089-7 NKE-1089-9 NKE-1087-6 NKE-1087-9
f1) ("2) (.3) (.4)
Type of Performance NJU-64
Monitor
Typeof ModulatorUnit NMA-1252 NMA449
Typeof ReceiverUnit NRG-98 NRG-154
Typeof DisplayUnit NCD4263C5)
*1 NKE-1089-71172 AC 50/60H21 d )
(7ft 1OOl11Ol22Oi230V
(7ft22ot230vAc 50/60H23d)
NKE-1089-72F
NKE-1089-71Dt72D(7ft100/11012201230VAC 50/60H21 d )
NKE-1089-72DF(7ft2201230VAC 50/60H23d )
(gft 1OOl11Ol220/230V
"2 NKE-1089-91/92 AC s0/60H21 d )
(9ft 2201230v
NKE-1089-92F AC 50/60H23d )
NKE-1089-91D192D (gft100/11012201230vAC 50/60Hz16')
NKE-1089-92DF(gft22O|23OV AC 50/60H23d)
*3 NKE-1087-61162
(6ft 1O0l'1101220/230VAC50/60H21 d )
(6ft 220123OV
NKE-1087-62F nC 50/60H23d)
NKE-1087-61D162D (6ft100i1101220123oVAC 50/60Hz16)
NKE-1087-62DF(6ft 220t230vAC 50/60H23d )
"4 NKE-1087-91/92 AC 50/60H21 d )

(gft 10o111O1220/230V
NKE-1087-92F(gft 22ot23ovAC s0/60H23d )
NKE-1087-91D192D(gft 100/110/220123OVAC 50/60H21 @)
NKE-1087-92DF (9ft 2201230vAC 50/60H23 d )
*5 NCD-4263 : Self-standingtYPe
NCD-4263T: Desktoptype (NWZ-158TMonitorUnit,NDC-1279TControlUnit,
NCE-7721: KeYboardUnit)(OPtion)
Note: The ARPA unit have the approbation by the Ministry of Transport
Automaticequipmentfor Preventionof collision JAS-9800.
A-2
RadarSystemCircuit Block
TableA-33-unit Scanner(S band
Typeof Scanner NKE-1079-1 NKE-1079-2 NKE-1079-2F
( 1 0 0 / 1 1 0 v A c , 1 0 )(220t230V4C,16) ezatnovAc,3d)
c1)
lnnerAntenna cQc-764 cQc-764 cQc-764
DrivingPart cBP-129 cBP-146 CBP-128
fl) MEDOnly
("D" is attached with a heater control part option to a form name HeaterCont: CCK-751)
TableA-42-unit Scanner(S band

Typeof Scanner NKE-1075A-1 NKE-1075A-2 NKE-10754-2F
( 1 0 0 / 1 1 0 v A c , 1 d (22O|23OV
) AC,1d) (220t230V
4C,30)
InnerAntenna coc-1098 cQc-1098 cQc-1098
DrivingPart cBP-129 cBP-146 cBP-128
lF AMP circuit eAE-344-4 cAE-344-4 cAE-344-4
lnnerReceiverUnit cMA-sil cMA-554 cMA-554
ReceiverUnit NRG-222
RFAMP circuit cAF-424 cAF-424 cAF-424
LO OSCcircuit cGH-205 cGH-205 cGH-205
Biascircuit cBD-1274 cBD-1274 cBD-1274
Limitercircuit cNL-23 cNL-23 cNL-23
Modulator Unit NMA-534
Modulatorcircuit cPA-209 cPA-209 cPA-209
lnnerModulatorcircuit cNM-239 cNM-239 cNM-239
Filtercircuit cFR-161 cFR-161 cFR-161
T/Rcontrolcircuit cMc-1205 cMc-1205 cMc-1205
Powercircuit cBD-1682 cBD-1682 cBD-1682
Relaycircuit csc-632 csc-632 csc-632
("D" is attachedwith a heatercontrol part optionto a form name HeaterCont: CCK-751)
A-3
TableA-5 3-unitTypeScanner(X band)
NKE-1089-71/91 NKE-1089-72/92 NKE-1089-72F192F

Typeof
Scanner (22O|23OVAC,16) (220|230VAC,30)
(100/11ovAc,1d)
lnnerAntenna cQc-1108 cQc-1108 cQc-1108
("D" is attachedwith a heatercontrol part option to a form name HeaterCont: CCK-919)
TableA-6 2-unit Scanner band

NKE-1087-61/91 NKE-1087-61/91 NKE-1087-62F192F
Typeof Scanner (22OI23OVAC,16) (220t2sovAc,30)
(100/11ovAc,10)
lnnerAntenna cQc-1097 coc-1097 cQc-1097
ReceiverUnit NRG.154
lF AMP circuit cAE-344 cAE-344 cAE-344
lnnerReceiverUnit cMA-588 cMA-588 cMA-588
ModulatorUnit NMA.499
Modulatorcircuit cPA-209-1 cPA-209-1 cPA-209-1
lnnerModulator Unit cNM-234 cNM-234 cNM-234
Filtercircuit cFR-161 cFR-161 cFR-161
T/R controlcircuit cMc-1205 cMc-1205 cMc-1205
Powercircuit cBD-1682 cBD-1682 cBD-1682
Relaycircuit csc-632 csc-632 csc-632
("D" is attachedwith a heatercontrol part option to a form name HeaterCont: CCK-919)

TableA-7 3-unitTypeTransmitter-receiver (S band)
UnitComposition
Unit
Typeof Transmitter-receiver NTG-3037A
ModulatorUnit NMA-1253
Modulatorcircuit cPA-209
Filtercircuit cFR-161
lnnerModulatorUnit cNM-236
ReceiverUnit NRG-BB
IFAMPcircuit cAE-344-1
RFAMPcircuit cAF-424
LO OSCcircuit cGH-205
Biascircuit cBD-1274
Limitercircuit cNL-23
lnnerreceiverunit cMA-s54
Powercircuit cBD:1682
T/R controlcircuit cMc-1205
Relaycircuit csc-632
. lnnertransmifter-receiver
unit cQc-1093
(X band)
UnitComposition
TableA-8 3-unitTypeTransmitter-receiver
Typeof Transmitter-receiver
Unit NTG-3028
ModulatorUnit NMA-12s2
Modulator cPA-209-1
Filtercircuit cFR-161
lnnermodulator unit cNM-235
ReceiverUnit NRG-98
I F AMP cAE-344
lnnerreceiverunit cMA-588
Powercircuit cBD-1682
T/R controlcircuit cMc-1205
Relaycircuit csc-632
. lnnertransmitter-receiver
unit coc-1092
A-5
TableA-9 NCD-4263TypeDisplayUnitCircuitCompositions
DisplayUnit NCD-4263 JRC COdE Remarks
1 Innerdisplayunit cwB-1256
2 NSIVLOGl/F unit
CMJ-462A/B
NSI(LOGl/F circuit
3 Rackunit
Terminalboardcircuit coD-1949
Displaycontrolcircuit cMc-1218
Radarprocesscircuit cDc-1209
Motherboard cQc-1094
4 Innerkeyboardunit CWB-1211.PSO/RST
Panelcircuit1 ccK-900
Connection cable CFQ-6908-RSO/RST
5 Monitorunit TWSRDOOO2
Casepart cwB-1255
Operationunit ccK-906
6 Innerpowersupplyunit
Powersupplycircuit cBD-1661
7 AIS l/F circuit cMH-1876
(NOA-4172)
8 lnterSwitch
circuit ccL-291
(NOE-3141) (Option)
TableA-10 NDC-1279TypeControlUnitCircuitCompositions
ControfUnit NDC-1279 JRC Code Remarks
1 Innerdisplay unit cwB-1256
2 NSI(LOG l/F unit CMJ-4624/8
NSI(LOG l/F circuit
3 Rackunit
Terminalboardcircuit cQD-1949
Displaycontrolcircuit cMc-1218
Radarprocesscircuit cDc-1209
Motherboard cQc-1094
4 Innerpowersupplycircuil
Powersupplycircuit cBD- 1661
b AIS l/F circuit cMH-1876
(NO44172)
o circuit
lnterSwitch ccL-291
(NOE-3141) (Option)
TableA-11NCE-7721TypeKeyboardUnitCircuitCompositions
KeyboardUnit NCE-7721 JRC Code Remarks
1 Innerkeyboardunit CWB-1211-RSO/RST
Connectioncable cF0-6908-RSO/RST (Option)
TableA-12NWZ-158TypeMonitorUnitCircuitCompositions
MonitorUnit NWZ-158 JRC Code Remarks
1 Monitorunit TWSRDOOO2
Case part cwB-12557
Operationunit ccK-906
A-7
INTERSWITCH
(NQE-31411
OPERATIONMANUAL
aaaaoaaaaoaoaaaoaaaoaaoaaaaaaaooaooeaoo
1. GENERAL
1.1 Outline
The NQE-3141 InterSwitch allows interconnections to be changed freely between

bridge-installedmultiple radar display units and multiple scanner units different in
characteristics.
The NQE-3141can change the interconnectionsbetween muhipleradar display units and
multiple transmitter-receiver/scanner units (in the remainderof this manual, referredto as
MTRs) in the JMA-9900Series radar system.
It is possibleto changethe interconnections betweenup to eightcombinationsof units:(two
unitsin the caseof a built-intype)x (fourunitsin the case of a separatetype).
1.2 lnterSwitchConstruction .. " '

The InterSwitch in the displayunit.(Option)
Kit is incorporated
The numberof combineddisplayunitsand MTRs accordingto the InterSwitchkit is
differentbetweenthe 2-unitssystemand the 3-unitssystem.
The distinction betweenthe 2-unitssystemand the 3-unitssystemis determinedby the
internalseftings.
The patternswitchoveroperationscan be exercisedsimplyand quicklyaccordingto the
menusdisplayedon the displayunit. The InterSwitchpatternsas shown beloware
displayedat the upperleftof the radardisplay.(Thepositionfilledon the markindicates
the positionof the displayunitcurrentlyoperated.)
Interswitch patterns
indicators (Combinationsof six pattern MTR r- al
I9l
6 6
Displayunit LRJ
l
Unitanang€ment(towardsthe ship'sheading)
MTR(L) MTR (R)
?9\'
6dcab
No.1 No.2
,/l
No.3 No.4
q.o g o
\l
o{ o{
Displayunit(L) Displayunt (R) No.s No.6
.' .'
systemof Interswitchpatterns
3-Gdar indicators . {Combinations of twelve pattems)
Unit arangemsnt (towards the ship's haadhing)
???T?
ooo ooo
?'? ?7
doa ooo
No.l No.2 No.7 No.8
oa9 000
AJt LA ?\o
6on
"f1
60d
No.3 No.4 No.9 N o . 1 0
o?? ??o
oOO
No.s
OOo
No.6
\"?
oao K
No.11 N o . 1 2
aoaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaoooaaaaoaaaaoaa
2. OPERATIONS
When switchingover the InterSwitchpatterns,first set the system to ihe STBY mode and
precede the switch operationson the operation panel of the Display Unit as shown in the
operationflow below.
2.1 OperationFlow'
The followingflowchartshowsthe operationflow from menuopeningto menuclosing.
[Open of software button] [Openofthe Subl Menu]
(D ctlcr tne
O cticr|MENOI,
thenFueTfrEM
@
on the upper left of the screen. I
(The ISWMenuwill appearJ
(This software button is differing in
selecting pattern. This picture is
2UN|T,No.4.)
The radar will be placed

[Changing InterSwitchpatterns) in the standbymode.The
changed pattem diagram
O Clicf the patternselection menu number. in the center of the
ClicklSETl. display as well as the
@ cticrffi. changemenu al the right
of the display will be
displayed.
[Closing the lnterSwitchmenuJ
[The Subl Menuwill be closed]
(DclicrmENUl
A-10
aaaoaaaaaaaooaaoooaaoaooaataloaaaaaoaaa
2.2 SoftwarebuttonlSubl Menu

Referto; (A) fSubl Menu display.-.Selectionof an ISW Menu]
of software button
Clickthe on the upperleftof the screen.
Openthe ISWMenu.
buttonis differingin selectingpattern.Thispictureis 2UN|T,No.4.
Thissoftvrrare
of the Subl Menu
o Click
@ ClickIS U B IME N U I.
TheSubl Menuwillappear.
Su b l Me n u
I suBrMENU I
r. f---- serme i--__l
---__l
2.a-----LEVEL
s.[NArlulpItlro''l
r.[-TilER---_l
s.T-----ARPA--___l
0.f:-l!L__-_l
?.T-----ffr-----l
_l
e.f- EBTT,4ANEUvER
9.I suB2MENtf
o. EOT i
Subl Menuwill be
. or clickffi
O clicklMfr-ril
A-11
aoaootaoatoaaoooooaaaoa aaaaaaoaoaaoaaao
2.3 ISW(lnterSwitch)Menu
Referto:(B)tlSWMENU1.''2-units(No.1to No.6)l
(C)tlSWMENU2'"3-units(No.1to No.6)I
(D )IS W ME N U3 '''3 -units( No.7to No.12) ]
Menucan be selectedonlywhenthe radarsystemis set to on the standby

The Interswitch
mooe.
Menucan be openedduringtransmission,
Althoughthe Interswitch the radarsystemwill
and
stoptransmission enter lhe standby
stateautomatically.
S u b l M e n uw i l l a
ISWMenuwilla
@ clickIISW
(2-unitsystem) *Set withthe equipped(2-uniV3-unit)-- (3-unitsystem)
if- rJl TF tF F-FF

L-+.+l -YT
IT TI =../-
./E l=r-'r
l-*,:l No.2
r#F FFT=
-r' -T- --l-
G_--:) No.A 'li['
IJL-
FF
L
e flF-----------l
-----
-\- o.[G [fan l
r+ No.5
PattemNo. UnitNo.of radarsvstem

The numbersurroundedby
a frame is the numberto
be selected.
A-12
aaaaaaaoaooaaaaaaaaaaaaaoaaaoaaooaooaoa
ISWMenu(PatternDiaqramxondisolavcenter)
The pattemdiagramsfor the 2-unitssysemis differentfrom the patterndiagramsfor the

3-unitssystem
. 6 patterndiagramsaredisplayedgor 2-unitssystem.
. 12 patterndiagrams(on two pageswith 6 patternsper page)are displayedfor 3-units
system.
In the patterndiagram.
. The patterndiagramdark filled representsthe currentpaltern.
. The displayunil currentlyin operationis highlightedin the reverseblacUwhiteview.
. A displayunit or MTR markedwith " x " is not connectedor hasa failure.
. The patterndiagramwith the mark " x " cannotbe selectedas describedabove.
ISW Menuwill be
@ clicklExtr
Subl Menuwillbe
O cricklEXitr
<(- The MTR not-connected

or at fault.
( x markdraw)
N o.1
+I
The MTRcurrentlyoperated.
(filledin reversevideo)
A-13
aaoooeoaoaoaoaaaoooaooaaoaaaaaaoooooaoa
2.3 GhangingInterSwitchPatterns"
Subl Menuwill
ISWMenuwill
an ISW
O Oick l-+-l or E to selectPatternNo.
ISWMenu(on displavriqht)
(2-unitsystem) (3-unitsystem)
[--]
l---r-
. r-trl
'-T
I r"r r"r I
IT T1
l-*,,-J
FF
--t
,/-
A. t{o_o
FF
+.
-\-
Ncs
ISW Menu (PatternDiaoramXondisplav center)
Click lT] or E , and the patterndiagramwill be enclosedby a squareline,
whichsignifles"selecting"
3-unitsystemis click EVIOUS/NEXT selectidNo.7to No.12
@ ctick ET
ET indicatedto selectingpattern.)
A-14
aoooooaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaooaaaaoaao aooaaaoo
MessaqeArea (on displav lower riqht)

"f SW END" is blinkingand an alarmbuzzersounds.
ISW Menu (PatternDiaqramxondisplav center)

The selectedpatterndeagramis blinkingfor about 5 seconds,and if it is
the patternis selected.
established,
Note that if the seitchover fails. the selected pattern will not appear.The
blinkinq is stopped after about 5 second and the previous patterndiaqlam
will reappear.In this case."lSWTIMEOUT"willappearon the messaEearea
on the lower riqht of the displav and an alarm sound is oiven.
In this state. re-selectthe patterndiaqram and seitch over the units. lf the
re-selectionfails. contact JRC servicedepot.
Pre-heatTime Countdown(on displav center or the upper partl
When the seitchoveroperationis completed,the timer at the display center
or the upper part will start the countdown.At this time, the radar operation
state at the upper right of the display indicates"PREHEAT".
lf the count "0:00" is indicated,the indicationat the upper right on the
radar display is changedfrom'PREHEAT" to "STANDBY".
ISWMenuwill be
Subl Menuwill be
A-15
aaaaaaaoooaoaooaaaaaoaaoooaaooaaaaaaoaa
(A)[Sub1Menudisplay'' 'Selection
of an ISWMenul
0.I ExrT I
(B )tl S WME NU1"' 2- units( No.1to No.6) l

The currentconnection pattern:No.1
The currentconnectionpatternto be selected:No.4
A-16
aaaaoaaaoaaoaaaaoaaaaaoaaaaooaaaooaaaaa
FFF
I:4
FTTF
--r--t- F--F
l-T-
(C)ISW MENU2"'3-units (No.1to No.6)]
paftern:No.1
The currentconnection
patternto be selected:No.4
The currentconnection
F==-rF IFFF
-r-F
T-]-
I
N o.10
0.t E(IT I
(D )i l S WME NU3' ' ' 3- units( No.7to No.12) l

Thecurrentconnection patternto be selected:No.10
A-17
oaooaaaoaooooaaooaaaooaooaaaaaooaaaoaoa
3. REFERENCES
Time after Pattern
After switchingover the InterSwitchpatterns,it is necessaryto wait for the time as

mentioned below because the pre-heat time is different from the previous
interconnection betweenthe MTR and the display unit. This measureis taken for
protectingthe electronic tubeemittingradarpulses.
(a) Not changedto the new interconnection condition:.. .No preheat
time
(b) Changedto the new interconnection condition.
H o w e ve r,th e MT R w as used befor echange:........................... ................3
seconds
(c) Changedto the new interconnection condition.
H o w e ve r,th e MT R w as used befor echange:............................................
minutes
on Pattern
lmmediately afterswitchingoverthe patterns,the try to selectanotherpatternmay fail.

This meansthat even lf the pattemswitchoveris completed,it takes some time to
operation.In this case,"lSW BUSY"will be indicatedin
preparefor the nextInterSwitch
the messagearea on the displaylower right, and the InterSwitchoperationis not
available.
arm Sound
The lnterSwitchalarm continueslo soundfor about 5 seconds.In settingthe alarm sound

level,openthe Subl Menu,press[2] switchto selectthe "S.BUZZER" in LEVELMenu.
When stoppingthe alarm sound immediatelyafter it sounds, press [ALARMACK] switch.
Even when lhe alarmsound stops,a certainmessage will remainin the messagearea.
on Master/Slave
The Master/Slaveconnectionis a configurationin which the DisplayUnit connectedto the

ScannerUnit is the Masier Unit,while the DisplayUnit connectedto the MasterUnit is a
Slave Unit. Of the InterSwitchpatterns, the following pattem numbers includes the
Master/Slave connection:
a) 2-unitSystem:No.3,No.4,No.5and No.6
b) 3-unitSystem:No.4,No.S,No.6,No.7,No.8,No.9,No.10and No.11
lf the Master Display Unit is noi in the transmissionstate, it is impossibleto set the Slave
Display Unit to the transmissionstate, lf the Master DisplayUnit is changedfrom the
transmissionto the standbymode,the Slave DisplayUnit will also be set to the standby
mode forcibly.In this status,"MTR ST-BY'will be indicatedin the messagearea and the
alarmwill beep.
A-'t8
aaaaooaooaooaaaaaaaoaoooooaaoaaoaaaaaaa
The Slave DisplayUnit will not change the radar video even if the tuning conlrol is adjusted
becausethe MasterDisplayUnitcontrolsthe tuning.The tuningindicatorat the upperleftof
the displaywill show "SLAVE".
The changeof the rangescaleon the Slave DisplayUnitdependsuponthe rangescaleon

the MasterDisplayUnit. In general,the Slave DisplayUnit cannot changethe rangescale
into a higherone than that on the MasterDisplayUnit.However,the $lave DisplayUnitmay
select a higherrange scale if the pulse length/repetition
frequencyis the same as on the
Master Display.
nner
lf the ScannerUnitsare changedover in the conditionthat the safetyswitchof one Scanner

Unit is set to "OFF"whilethe other is set to "ON",'SSW OFF'will be indicatedon boththe
display.
A-19
oooaataaaaaaaooaaaaaaoaaaooo oaooaaaoaaa
@ Settingthe DIPswitches of the interswitchcircuit (CCL'304)
Sei DIPswitchesSW11,SW12,andSW13as follows:
sw 1l sw 13 sw 12
@ @w
In te rs w i tc hc i rc ui t board
ccL-304
(1) SettingSW11(Expansionmode settingand masterislavesetting)
Expansionmodesetting
SelectOFF to connectup to
four units.
In expansionmode,select
ON for the ISW circuitboard
ai the slaveside.
SelectOFF.
A-20
aoooooaooaoooaaoaaaaalaaaaooooaaaaooaaa
(2) SettingSW12(Radarconnection
setting)
tttItIttl1ttl
ON
Radar connectionsetting
1 ON No.1 displayunit connection
OFF No.1 displayunit non-connection
2 ON No. 1 scannerunitconnection
OFF No. 1 scannerunit non-connection
3 ON No. 2 displayunitconneclion
OFF No. 2 displayunit non-connection
4 ON No. 2 scannerunh connection
5 ON No. 3 displayunitconnection
OFF No. 3 displayunit non-connection
6 ON No.3 scannerunitconnection
7 ON No.4 displayunitconneclion
O F F No. 4 displayunit non-connection
8 ON No.4 scannerunitconnection
(3) SW13(Notused)
Note: Set the DlPswitchesof the ISW circuitin accordancewith the INSTALLATION
MANUAL,and ensuresafetywhen and beforesettingthe DlPswitches.
A-21
aaaoaoaaaaaoaaaaoooaoaaaaaaaoaaaaaoooaa
seriesRadarAIS
JMA-9900
MANUAL
OPERATION
oaoaoaaaaaaaa aaaaoaaaaooaaoaaaaaa aoooaa
Introduction
This productprovidesthe AIS informationdisplayfunction,which is availableon the JMA-9900
Radarseries.
OReadthisoperationmanualcarefullybeforeuse.
OThismanualdescribes operations of theAISdisplayfunctiononly.
Pleasereferto JMA-9900seriesoperationmanualfor operationof otherradarfunctions.
Pleasekeepthisoperationmanualfor reference.
OTherearelvvotypesof AIS interfacesfor JMA-9900SeriesRadaras follows.
JMA-9900TYPE AIS l/F Type

type
Self-standing 7ZCRD0967
NQA-4172.,
Desktoptype NQA-4172",NQA4172-6
' NQA4172: BaseKil (Common
unitfor bothtypesof JMA-9900
radar.)
Note
ThisAISkitwascheckedthe operation withJRCAIS (JHS-182).
onlyby theconnection
The capacitvand limitationsof the svstem and operationallimitations
1. Vectors of ARPA target are displayed by dashed lines instead of solid lines to keep
consistencywith those of AIS targets.
2. Maximum 50 AIS targets are displayed in this system. Three kinds of AIS target filter are
provide to prioritize on displaying AIS targets effectively.See 1-10 in this manual.
3. Note that following operational restrictions in this system before using.
1) An AIS function cannot turn ON
. When "MANUAL" was selectedas a speed input source.
. When SET and DRIFTwas set in "LOG" speed mode
2) "LOG" speed mode cannot be chosen as a speed source.
. When an AIS function was ON and SET and DRIFTwere set.
3) "MANUAL" speed mode cannot be selected.
. When an AIS function was ON.
4l SET/DRIFT (Current correction)function cannot turn ON.
. When an AIS function was ON and speed was set as "LOG".
A-23
ooaooaooooaaaaooaaaaaaoooaaoooaaaoaaaao
Tableof Gontents
lntroduction .............
A-23
1 . AIS InformationDisplayFunction
1-1.AIS SoftwareButtons .....A-26
1-2.InitialSetting
rGPS Antennainstallation positionSetting .............. A-27
ICollisionDecision CriteriaSetting ......A-28
1-3.AIS FunctionON/OFF..... ..................... A-29
14. AIS TargetActivation
lManualTargetActivation............. ........ A-30
lAutomaticTargetActivation.... ............ A-3'1
1-5.AIS TargetDeactivation................. ......A-32
1-6.AIS SymbolDisplayON/OFF...... ......... A-33
1-7.ARPASymbolDisplayONIOFF..... ......A-34
1€. AIS TargetData Display
rTypes of DataDisplay .....A-35
tTarget DataDisplay ......A-35
rTargetDataDisplay Cancel ................ 4-36
tTarget DataDisplaywithsimple/detail mode. .......... 4-36
1-9.Definitionsof AIS TargetSymbols .....A-37
1-10.AIS FilterSetting
r M e a n i n go f A I SF i 1 t e r . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . .A. .-.3. 8
rAlS FilterTypeSe|ection.............. ....... A-38
rAlS FilterSetting .......... A40
rAlS FilterAreaDisplay .....A-41
1-11. AIS and ARPATargetAssociation Condition... ... A42
1-12.AIS Lost Target ............... A43
1-13.Conditionsof AIS SymbolDisplay
lMaximumAISTargetNumberandDisplayPriority.................... A-44
lAlS Target VectorDisplay .................. A44
l-l4.Alarm Display....... ............ A-45
{ -l S.Operational Restrictions........ ............ A-46
2. BasicOperationwith Track8a11............. A47

...................
3. Installationof AIS InformationDisplay Kit

3-1.Compositionof AIS InformationDisplayKit ...............,...........
A48
3-2.AIS l/F Gonnection.............. A48
................
A-24
aaaoaoaoaooaaaooaoooaooaooooaaaaoaoaooo
up afterInstallation
3-3.Set .....A49
34.Tumon andCheck........ ....A-49
A-25
ooaaaoaaaalaaooloaoaoaaaaaaoaooaaoaaaao
1. AIS InformationDisplayFunction
1-1AISSoftrrvare
Buttons
When AIS l/F is connected,the AIS softwarebutton as shown below is displayedon a radar
screen.By operatingthese buttons,ON/OFFof an AIS function,activationor deactivationof an AIS
symbol,and the displayON/OFFof ARPA-AISsymbolcan be performed.
Exampleof DisplaywithAIS l/F
Orus FUNcroNoN/oFFBUTToN
BUTToN
@nrsDEAcTvATE
oN/oFFBUTToN
@ns sYMBoLDTSPLAY
ASYMBOLDISPLAY
ON/OFFBUTTON
AISSoftwarebuttons
A-26
taaaaoaaaaooaaaaaoaaaaaaaaooaaaooaaaooo
1-2InitialSettinq
positionSetting
IGPS Antennainstallation
Thedistanceof the GSPantennafromthe positionof the radarscannershouldbe set.
ADJUST
lMettUlonthescreen.
1. Left-click
ARPA,/A
IS
MAINmenuopens.
AIS
I. GSPANT.LOCAT
ION
z.teft-ctict
Eooett*tFEtr. a:FtooFl
CODEINPUTmenuopens. u:[*tooF]
-- l-Errol.
ttTffii
3. Left-click
[*o-l
ADJUSTmenuopens.
+.tett-ctictFEPRTLtd .
ARPA/AISmenuopens.
5. Left-clickF-lS. 0. EXIT
AIS menuopens.
6. The GPS antennaroughdirectionfromthe radarscanneris chosenwith the GPS

button" P ".
7. Left-clickme buttonin the g box of "1.GPSANT. LOCATION".

Q
The distanceof the GPS antenna from the radar scanner in bow-stern
directionshould be entered.(The directionof the bow side is plus and the
directionof the sternside is minus.)
the l$lbuttonin the$, boxof "1.GPS

8. Left-click ANT. LOCATION".
The distance of the GPS anlenna from the radar scanner in port-starboard
directionshouldbe entered.(The directionof starboardside is plus and the
directionof the oori side is minus.
Notet
Unless it performs this setup correctly, the position of an AIS symbol may not
coincide with the radar echo position of the target.
Note2
When this setup is performed,offset is added to the data receivedfrom GPS, and the
compensated latitude and longitude are displayed as own ship position. lt would be
the radar scanner installationposition.
A-27
aaaaoaaaaaaaaaaooaoooooooaaaaaaaaoaaaaa
lCollision DecisionCriteriaSetting(CPA/TCPA)
ARPAtargetare used forAlS largetas well.
The collisiondecisioncriteriaCPA,/TCPAof
SUBl M ENU
1. Left-click on the screen.
IMENUI ARPA
MAINmenuopens. I. CPALIMIT
0.1- 99nm ltr-H
2. TCPA LIMIT
FuBl MENUI--- FRPATAISL
2. Left-click
1- 99min ITdH
ARPAmenuopens.
3. CPA RING
3. Set CPA LIMIT(ClosestPointof Approach) fiorr Eoru

4. TRIAL
(1) Left-clickthe "1.CPALlMlT"edit box. 5. GATE
willbeselected. 6. AIS SETTING

EPAffiII
The numericinputdialoguebox is
opened.
0. EXIT
(2)Inputthenewvalueby pressing the0 to 9 numberkeysor by usingtne f+-l or E

keys,thenpressI END I to input.
4. Set TCPALIMIT(Timeto CPA)
(1) Left-clickthe "2.TCPALIMIT'edit box.
ffCPALlMl'I will be selected.

the0 to g numberkeysor by usingtne l-Jl or E

(2)Inputthenewvalueby pressing
keys,thenpress"END"to input.
Forfurtherdetails,pleasereferto Chapter5 of a JMA-9900

seriesInsiruction
Manual.
A-28
aaoaaaaaaaaoooaaaaaaaaaaaaaaoaaaoaaoooa
1-3.AIS FunctionON/OFF
ION/OFF of AIS function is set up. There are two methodsto switch ON/OFF of AIS function.
(Method-1: With the AIS softwarebutton on screen.)

Put the arrow cursor on the E bufton at the lower left a screen and click the left
button of the track ball. Every time the left sectionbutton is pressed,AIS functionon/off
changesalternativelyas follows.
a. When the symbolis displayedin the brightcolor--AlS funclionis ON.
b. When the symbolis displayedin the darkcolor----AlS functionis OFF.
(Method-2: Withthe menuoperation.)

SUBl MENU
1. Left-clickIME-NUI
on the screen.
ARPA
Main menuopens.
1. CPA LIMIT
0.1-eenm
ITH
M-ENul.
2. Left-clickFUe1 2. TCPA LIMIT
SUB1menuopens. l-eemin l- 1o-lH
3. CPA RING
M
3. Left-click
Iorr Ioru
ARPtuAlSmenuopens. 4. TRIAL
5. GATE
4. Left-clickFrssETrrl.rd
AIS SETTINGmenuopens. 6. AIS SETTING
5. Left-click"ON"or 'OFF" of "1.AlSFUNCTION".

"1.AlSFUNCTION"is changedto on or off. 0. EXIT
Note:
When AIS function is OFF,no AIS symbol is displayedand all AIS functions are completely
turned off. Even if there were a dangerous target, AIS functlon would not be turned on
automatically.
A-29
oaaaaaaaooaaa aaaoaaoaaaaoaaaaaoaaaaaaaa
14 AIS TarqetxlActivation
I ManualTargetActivation
An AIS target is activatedby either of the mehod-1or the method-2 as follows,and then the
vector and the headingof the target are displayed.
(Method-1: With the softwarebuttonon the screen)

1. Put the arrow cursor on the [}Ct--l button at the lower left of the screen
and clicksthe left buttonof the track ball.
Cursormode "AlSACT" is displayedat the upperrightside on the screen.
2. Put the cross cursor"+" on the targetto be aclivatedand pressthe track ball
sectionleft button .
The selectedAIS target is activated.
(Method-2: Withthe menuoperation)
t. teft-ctick the screen.

lMEtlUlon
Mainmenuooens.
2. Left-clickFueI MENUI.
SUBI menuopens.
Frs/AtrPA
3. Left-click
ARPfuAIS
menuopens.
4. Left-click reETrird.
AIS SETTINGmenuopens.
'2.AlS ACTIVATE".
5. Left-click"ON"of
Cursormode "AlSACT" is displayedat the upperrightside on the screen.
6. Put the crosscursor "+" on the targetto be activatedand pressthe track ball sectionleft
button.
The selectedAIS target is aciivated.
x1 Refer to "1.9 Definitions ofAIS Target Symbols" about the activated target.
A-30
oaoooaoooooooaoaorioroaaaooaoa.ooaoaoaa
lAutomaticTarget
Activation
The AIS targetin a guard zone is activatedautomatically
and the vectorand the headingof the
targetare displayed.The guardzoneforAlS targetactivationis the samezone usedin ARPA.For
further details of guard zone setting, please see "Set Guard Zones" at Chapter 3.4 of the
instruction manual of JMA-9900 series radar. Dangerous AIS targets are also activated
automatically.
Note:
'When the manual'ACTIVATION'operation
is performedat the positionwhere no AIS sleeping
symbolis displayed,an AIS targetis searchedat the near area pointedby the cursor"+".The
following"searchmark' is displayed.
ffisrmcn
SearchMark
An activatedtarget symbol is displayedwhen an AIS target is found near the "searchmark'.
Then the "search marK' is removed. On the other hand, no AIS target found in approx. 4
minutes,the "searchmark"disappears.
' When no vectorof the activatedtarget is displayed,please refer to "1-13 Condiiionsof AIS
SymbolDisplay."
' No activatedsymbolmay be displayedif the priorityof the searchtargetis lowerthan existing

activatedAIS largets displayedon the screen. Refer to "1-13 Conditionsof AIS Symbol
Display'.
A-31
o aaaooooaaa aoaaaaoaoaaaaaaaooooaaaaa aoa
1-5AIS TarqetDeactivation
When an AIS targetis deactivated,the vectorand the headingare deletedas a sleepingx2target.

(Method-1: With the softwarebuttonon lhe screen)
1. put the arrowcursoron the lDAetrbuttonand clickthe trackball sectionleft
button.
Gursormode'AlSDEACflis displayed at the upperrightsideon the screen.
2. Putthecrosscursor"+"onthetargetto be deactivated andpressthetrackball
sectionleft button.
TheselectedAIS targetis deactivated.
(Method-2: Withthe menu operation)
1. Left-clickIMENUIon the screen.

Mainmenuopens.
2. Left-clickFuBl Mil-Ul.
SUBI menuopens.
3. Left-clickFRPA/AIS
menuopens.
ARPfuAIS
FrssErri[d.
4. Left-click
5. Left-click"ON"of "3.AlSDEACTIVATE.
Cursormode "AlS DEACT"is displayedat the upperrightside on the
screen.
6. Put the cross cursor "+" on the targetto be deactivatedand pressthe track ball section
left button . The selectedAIS target is deactivated.
Note
This operationis only availablefor an activatedtarget.
Refer to "1.9 Definitions of AIS Target Symbols" about the sleepingtarget.
A-32
aoaoaaoooooaaaaataaoaoooaaaaaooaaooaaaa
1.6ArSSYMBOL
DTSeLAY
ON/OFF
AIS symboldisplayis changedto on or off by the proceduremethod-1or method-2as follows.
rq
ry
(Method-1: With ihe softwarebuttonon lhe screen)
Put the arrow cursor on the fZ button and click the track ball section left button.Each
time the left buttonis pushed,AIS symboldisplayis changedto on or off.
When the buttonis displayedin the brightcolor--- AIS Symboldisplayis on.
When the buttonis displayedin the dark color --- AIS Symboldisplayis off.
(Method-2: With the menuoperation)
1. Left-click
MeNUlonthe screen.
Mainmenuopens.
mt
2. Left-click
SUBI menuopens.
3. Left-clickFRPA/ArSl
ARPA/AISmenuopens.
4. Left-clickFrssETrfitd
AIS SETTINGmenu opens.
5. Left-click"ON"or "OFF"of "4.AlSSYMBOLDISPLAY'.

AIS symboldisplay is changedto on or off.
Note
The ARPAsymboldisplaycan onlyturnedOFFwhen the AIS functionis ON.
TurningtheAtS functionOFF will automatically
returnARPAsymbolsdisplayback ON.
A-33
aaaaaaoaooaoaaaaaooaaaoooaaaaaaaoaoaaaa
1-7.ARPASvmbolDisolavON/OFF
ARPAsymboldisplayis changedto on or off by the procedureeitherof the method-1or method-2
m
as follows.
(Method-1: With the softwarebuttonon the screen)

Put the arrow cursor on the ldl button and click the track ball section left button. Every
timethe left buttonis pushed,ARPAsymboldisplayis changedto on or off.
Whenthe buttonis displayedin the brightcolor--- ARPASymboldisplayis on.
When the buttonis displayedin the dark color -- ARPASymbol display is off.
(Method-2: Withthe menuoperation)
MENUIonthescreen.
1. Left-click
Mainmenuopens.
ruENUl.
2. Left-clickFI,JB1
SUB1menuopens.
3. Left-clickFRWAIS
ARPA/AISmenuopens.
4. Left-clickFiSsEmNG.
5. Left-click "OFF'of '4.AlS SYMBOLDISPLAY".

ARPA symbol displayis changedto on or off.
A-34
aoaaaaoaaaaoaaooaooo ooaaaoooooaoooaaoaa
1-8.AIS TaroetDatraDisplav
I Types of Data Display

The detailedor simplenumericaldata of an AIS targetare available.The displayitemsin each
detailedand simplemodeare shownas follows.
Displayltems DetrailedMode SimpleMode

NAME (Ship'sName) Max20 characters Max 20 characters
CALL SIGN Max 7 characters Max 7 characters
MMS I Max9 characters Max 9 characters
coG Unit0.1 degrees Unil0.1 degrees
SOG Unit0.1 knots Unit0.1knots
CPA Unit0.1nm Unil0.1 nm
TCPA U n i t0 . 1 m i n Unit0.1 min
BRG Unit0.1 degrees
RANGE Unit0.01nm
HDG Unit0.1 degrees No display
ROT Unit 0.1" ,/min
L,z L (LatlLon) Unit0.001seconds
One targetdata in the detailedmode or two target data in the simplemode are displayedat the
numericaldata area on the screen.
I TargetData Display
1. Press
Cursor mode changes and "TGT DATA"are displayedon the upper right of the
screen.
2. Put the cross cursor "+" on the target to be data displayedand press the track ball
sectionleft button.
The numericalinformationof the selectedAIS target is displayedal the right side of

the screen, and I ] is displayedon the AIS largetsymbol.
A-3s
l oaaoaooooaoaaaaaoaaaaaaooaaaaaaoaaaooaa
Note:
When the numericaldata is displayedwithout I ] markon the radarscreen,the target
I
I
I
mightexistout of the radardisplayrange.
TargetData DisplayCancel
1. Press
Cursor mode changes and "TGT DATA"are displayedon the upper right of the
screen.
2. Put the cross cursor "+" on the targetto be turn off the numericaldata displayand
pressthe track ball section left button .
The numerical information of the selected AIS target data is removed from the
siOeof the screenand the symbol
numericaldata area at the right-hanO
-l
l-
Lj olsappears.
I mode
TargetDataDisplayin simple/detail
1. Put the cursor on the buttons@ or! at the upper right of AIS target
numericaldata area,and pressthe trackballsectionleftbutton.
2. Everytime the buttonis pushed,the modeof numericaldatiachangesto simple
or detailas follows..
Button
e
\--------7
When button
pushed, display
mode is changed
Exampleof Detailmode
aaaaaoaaaaaoaaaoaoaoaaaaoa aoaooooaaooao
1-9.Definitionsof AIS TarqetSvmbols
TheAlS symbolis as follows.

Symbol AIS Target & Meaning
Definitions
A target symbol indicating ihe presence and orientation of a vessel
equipped with AIS in a certain location. No additionalinformationis
Sleeping
4 Target
presenteduntil activatedthus avoidinginformationoverload.
The most acute apex of the triangleis alignedwith the headingof the target,
or with its COG.
A symbol representingthe automaticor manual activationof a sleeping
target for the display of additionalgraphicallypresented information
including:
- a vector (speedand courseover ground or water);
- the heading;and
Activated - ROT or directionof tum indication(if available)to display actually
Target initiatedcoursechanges.
The COG/SOGvectoris displayedas dashedline.
The headingis displayedas solidlineof fixed length.
A flag on the headingindicatesa turnedits directionin order to detecta
targetmaneuver.
When no data is coming,the vector, headingand flag are not displayed.
A symbolrepresentingthe manualor automaticselectionof any AIS target
r- -t for the displayof detailedinformationin a separatedatadisplayarea.In lhis
L-J Selected area, receivedtargetdata as well as the calculatedCPAand TCPAvalues

Target will be shown.
Squaresindicatedby its cornersare drawn aroundthe targetsymbol.This
markis displayedon the aroundof a numericaldisplaytarget.
A symbol representingan AIS target (activatedor not) which data

Dangerous contraveneore-setCPAand TCPAlimits.
Target CPA/TCPA alarm sound occurs and a symbol is flashed until
acknowledged.
A symbol representingthe last valid predictedpositionof an AIS target

beforethe receptionof its data was lost.
€ It will become a lost target when fixed time receptionof the data of a
LostTarget
dangeroustargetcannotbe carried out. When it becomesa lost target,a
symbolwill be displayedon the positionpredictedby data receivedat the
end, such as a courseand speed.
A-37
aoooaaaaooaaaaooaaaaaaaaooaaaao oaoooaaa
1-10.AIS FilterSettinq
I Meaningof AIS Filter

When an AIS filter is set up, AIS targetsin the filteringarea can be displayedpreferentially. A
defaultfiller is set up withina circlewith a radiusof 20nmfrom own ship and othertype of filier is
selectableby the procedurein this section.When 50 or more AIS targetsexistwithinthe limitsof
the filter,AIS symbolsare displayedaccordingto the displaypriorityindicatedin 1-13"Maxtarget
numberand Displaypriority''.
lAlS FilterType Selection
Thereare three kindsof AIS filtersas follows.One of them can be selected.
1) RANGE Afilter is set up in the shapeof a circlewhich makesa radiusset-up

distance.
2) SECTOR- A filter is set up in the shape of a sector includingthe own ship
headingdirection.
3) ZONE A zone area sunoundedby two directionsand two rangesfrom own
ship.
on the screen.
1. Left-clickIMENUI
Mainmenuopens.
2. Left-clickFuBlMENUI.
SUBl menuopens.
3. Left-clickFRPA/AIq
ARPA/AISmenuopens.
4. Left-clickFiS€Em-d.
AIS SETTINGmenu oPens.
Frsrmrf,
5. Left-click
AIS FILTERmenu opens.
A-38
ootoaaaoaoaaoaaaoaoaaaoaaaoaaooooaoaooa
6. Left-clickthe selectionsection (combobox) of "1 .FILTERTYPE'.
pulldownmenuis disptayed.
FifER TYFEIis chosenandthefottowing
SUBl M ENU
AIS/ARPA
AIS SETTING
S FILTER
1. FILTERTYPE
1. RANGE
2. SECTOR
4.
3. ZONE
3. FILTER
florr n oru
0. EXIT
7. Select the FILTERTYPE from the pull{own menu, select 1 through 3 with the
trackball.then left-click.
Note:
lf an ARPA guard zone is set, the filter area for AIS target will be modifiedautomaticallyto
coverthe guardzone.
A-39
aaalaaaaaoooooaaaaaaaoo a oooaaaaaooaaaoa
I AIS FilterSetting
Note:
An AIS filtersettingprocedurechangesaccordingto the filtertype chosen.
Select a filter type shouldbe set beforesetting up a filter area.
1. Set up the type of a filter,accordingto the precedingclause.

After selectinga filter type, then perform the following procedureto set a filter
atea.
rtLTER.
z. teft-ctictIMAxE
It goes intofiltersettingmode.
IWhen a filtertypeis "RANGE"I

3. Adjusta settingmarkerto filtersettingdistancewith a VRM knoband left-click.
(When a filtertype is "SECTOR"I

3. Adjusta settingmarkerto a filterstartanglewith an EBL knoband left-click.
4. Adjusta settingmarkerto a filterend anglewith an EBL knoband left-click.
[When a filtertype is "ZONE"I

3. RotateEBLand VRM controlknobsto adjustthe crosspointof EBLand VRM to
the startingpointof a fillerzone.Then leftclick.
4. RotateEBLand VRM controlknobsto adjustthe crosspointof EBLand VRM to

the end pointof a filterzone.Then left click.
A-40
ooaooooaoaaaooaaaaaaaooaaaaaoaaoaaaaoaa
I AIS FilterAreaDisplay
1. Left-clickIMENUI
on the screen.
Mainmenuopens.
MEM.
2. Left-clickFUB1
SUBI menuopens.
3. Left-clickFRFIMI-S
menuopens.
ARPA/AIS
4. Left-clickFistririflc.
5. Left-clickFrsTrLrEE.
AIS FILTERmenuopens.
6. Left-click"ON"or "OFF"of "3.F|LTERDISP".

The filterarea displaychangesto on or off.
. When it is set to ON, filter setting area is displayedas a green

dashedline on the radarscreen.
A-41
aof oaoaaaaaaaoooaoaaaaaooaaooaaaaoaoaao
1-11. AIS and ARPATarqetAssociationCondition
I When the distrancebetweenan AIS target and an ARPA target is less than the "identical
distance"of a presetvalue,these targelsmight be the same. In this case, only AIS symbol is
displayedand ARPAsymbolmay be suppressed.The methodof settingthe "identicaldistance"
to activatethis associationis as follows.
1. Left-click lhe screen.

lMENUlon
Mainmenuopens.
2. Left-clickFuBtr/tENUl.
SUBI menuopens.
FFPA/AIS
3. Left-click
ARPA/AISmenuopens.
4. Left-clickArsEETTfNd.
5. Left-clickthe "T.lDENT|CALDISTANCE"edit box.
FCPALlMil willbe selected.

6. Inputthe new value by pressingthe 0 to 9 numberkeysor by using16s l-+ | or

! thenpressIEND I to input.
t<eys,
Note:
1. ARPA symbol,which was suppressedby this association,can be re-displayedby switching
OFF the AIS display.See'1-6 AIS SymbolDisplay".
2. Both AtS and ARPAsymbolare displayedwhen the "IDENTICALDISTANCE"is set to zero.
(AssociationOFF mode.) When turning power on the radar display,the "IDENTICAL
DISTANCE'is set to zero.
442
aaaaaooaooaaaooooaaoaoooaooaaaaaf aoooaa
1-12.AIS LostTarqet
When a dangerousAIS targetis lost,the lost targetalarmwill be aclivatedand the dangerous

targetsymbolwill changeto a lost symbol.And the presenttargetpositionis predictedby the
final received data from the target and the lost symbol position will be updated for approx. 1
minute.The lost symbolwould be deletedwhen "ALARMACK" key is pressedor no data has
been receivedfor approx. 1 minuteafter activatinga lost target alarm.
LOSTTARGETintervaldependson the ClassA or ClassB and the categoryof ship.Pleasesee
the followingthe lost target intervalfor ClassA and Class B ship.
ISOLASshipsl (ClassA)
Categoryof Ship LosttargetInterval
Shipat anchoror mooredand movingat less than 3 knots 1 8m i n
Shipat anchoror mooredand movingat more than 3 knots 60 sec
Ship0 to 14 knots 60 sec
Ship0 - 14 knotsand changingcourse 60 sec
Ship14- 23 knots 36 sec
Ship 14 - 23 knotsand changingcourse 36 sec
Ship > 23 knots 12 sec
Ship> 23 knotsand changingcourse 12 sec
lNonSOLASshipsl (ClassB)
Category
of Ship LosttargetInterval
Shio < 2 knots 1 8m i n
Ship2-14knots 180sec
Ship 14 - 23 knots 90 sec
Ship> 23 knots 30 sec
NOTE:
Whennon-dangerous
targetis lost,the targetsymbolwillbe fixedat the lastreportedpositionand
deletedautomatically
afterwaitingforthedatainputfromthetargetfor abovelosttargetinterval.
443
aaaoooaaaaaooaaooaoaoooaaoaoaaaaoo oaoaa
1-13.Conditionsof AIS SvmbolDisplay
I MaximumTargetNumberand DisplayPriority
Up to 50 AIS targetsymbolscan be displayedin JMA-9900seriesradar.When morethan 50 AIS
targels exist, 50 targels to be displayedare selectedby the followingpriorityorder.
1. Dangeroustarget.(Both CPA and TCPAof a target are less than the presetCPA and
TCPAsafelimit.)
2. SelectedTargetfor numericaldata display.
3. The target specifiedin target search mode. (See 14 Note for search mode)
4. The targetin an AIS filter.(The closertargetfrom own ship in the filterhas higherpriority
than furtherones.)
5. Targetsoutsideof a filter and they do not conformwith the above 1 to 4 conditions.A
nearertargetfrom own ship has higherprioritythan furtherones.
Note:
When the 50 AIS targels symbol are displayedand 51"t target enters, "AlS MAX TARGET"
messageappearsat the lowerrightpartof the screenand alarmsoundswith "Pi! Pil ".
I AIS TargetVectorDisplay
- The vectorof an AIS symbolis displayedin eitherground-stabilizedor sea-stabilized
by a setup
of the own speedequipment.
The vectorusednow is displayedon "OS STAB"at the upperrightof a screen.
When displayedas "OS STAB GNDl- AIS Vectorpresentationis Ground-stabilized

When displayedas "OS STAB SEA" ---AlS Vectorpresentationis Sea-stabilized
When the vectorof an AIS symbolis displayedby sea-stabilized, vectorof

the sea-stabilized
AIS target is calculated from the COG/SOG of AIS target and the own ship COG/SOG &
CSE/STWinformation.
Note:
The vector of AIS target is not displayed in following cases.
Case l: COG / SOG data is not transmitted from GPS/DGPS.
Case 2: The selected speed equipment is not working normally.
oaaaaaoaoaaaooaa aaaoaaaooaatooaooooaooo
1-14.AlarmDisplav
I Thereare the followingalarmsin AIS system.
AlarmMessage Meaning
GPA/ TCPA DangerousTargetis occurred
LOST Lost Targetis occurred
The numberof displayedAIS symbolswas exceededthe
AIS MAXTARGET maximum target number 50. (The 51st data was
received.
)
Ars (DATA) AIS is not connectedcorrectly.OrAIS is tumedoff.
The AIS interface is not connected to radar correctlv.
Ars r/ F (DATA)
Otherwisethe interfaceis faultv.
It is the alarminformationreceivedfromAlS,
AIS ALARM*'* LocalAlarmNumberof an ALR sentenceis displayedby
3 figurenumber'***"..See the AIS Alarmlist below.
AIS Alarm List on RADAR display
AIS Alarm NO.

Meaningof AIS Alarm 4
001 Tx malfunction
oo2 AntennaVSWR exceedslimit
003 Rx channel1 malfunction
006 Generalfailure
008 MKDconnection
lost
025 externalEPFS lost
026 no sensorpositionin use
029 no validSOG information
030 no validCOG information
032 Headinglost/ invalid
035 no validROT information
Note:
at lowerrightpartof theradarscreen.
An alarmmessageis displayed
A-45
aaaaaoooooaaaoaaaaaaaaaaoa taooaoaaataao
Alarm messagedisplayposition
1-15. Operationalrestrictions
operationalrestrictions
exist
1l An AIS functioncannotturnON
. When "MANUAL'wasselectedas a speedinputsource.
. When SET and DRIFTwas set in "LOG"speedmode
2) "LOG"speedmodecannotbe chosenas a soeedsource.
. When an AIS functionwas ON and SETand DRIFTwere set.
3) "MANUAL"soeedmodecannotbe selected..
. Whenan AIS functionwas ON.
urrent correction)function
. Whenan AIS functionwas ON and speedwas set as "LOG".
A-46
aaoaaaaaaoaoaaaaaaaaaaoaaoaaoaaoaaaoaoa
2. Basic Operationwith Track Ball
The operationmethodof the trackballof each menu in this manual.is describedin "3.4 Basic
Operations"of the JMA-9900InstructionManual.
A-47
aaoaaaoaaoaaaoaaaaaoaoaoaooooaaoaaoaaaa
3. Installationof AIS InformationDisplayKit
Note:
Followingconnectionand setupare not requiredif the AIS interfacewas builtin the factorybefore
shipping.
3-1. Gomoositionof AIS InformationDisplavKit

TheAIS kit for JMA-9900consistsof .
-AlS l/F TYPE IV : AIS l/F PCB, Baseattiachment
-7ZCRD0967 cable
: Powerand Communication
3-2.AIS l/F Connection

(1) Attachthe AIS l/F in the indicator.Referto AIS UNITINSTALLATION
MANUAL.
cableas shownin the followingfigure.
(2) Connectthe communication
JMA-9900 Terminal
Board
Coveringis skinnedand
TB 4601
itconnectswitha
terminalboard.
AIS l/F Board
l\. Red
il
o
-.1
o
J16 P16
Y
[--l r
I_J ts
(3) Powercableconnection
ConnectP16 of attachedcableto J16 of the terminalboard.
ConnectP1 of attachedcableto J'l of AIS l/F board.
When ISW is equipped,exchangethe existingpowercablewith the 7ZCRD0967powercable
in thiskit.
A48
oaaaaoa aaaaaaoaoaaaaaaaaaaaaaaataaooooa
3-3. Set up after Installation
Set up a link pin,as shownin the followingfigure.
s100
12345678
:HHETE
12345678
s102
2345678
?pcBssoozA
cMH-1
8?6 Ai S_r./F
Note.
It diffursfrom "JMA-9800"
3-4.Turnon & Check

Turnon ship'smain power.And turn on radar power.
AIS l/F is operatingnormallyif the buttonforAlS (referto 1-1.AlS bufton)is displayedon the
screen lower leff.
, The connectionor the setup may not be performedcorrectlyif the AIS button is not displayed.
Pleaseturn off the radarand checkconnectionand a setup.
Note:
Referto the installation
manualin thecaseof connection.
A-49
tr
=
z
<x O.o
Ye = 3
cl Rir
HP i=
-z
6o ()
z
qvs->
(r{
o
()
o I a.l
O
=
o
FI
o uJ
t!
zo
tL
E r..l z
l/ .! f
J
z = =-
CE
F c( ..,
v) 2 6
o
o
Hrl
z9 ru E I
..9
s ii
oo
oo
?d
I 6
o >^JBR
=
z irrii
l
5
o
v) eo oi ^J!
+i ctg
€P +;
db F 5(!
--.
a N Crr
z .'t c{
R9
?E a.,l F
() ?E
o
N
ro F
f
c)
aE-
Fie
(U )J o
-
<[
5
UJ
ul
F
2
F
F
z
d
uJ
z
e
z N
I
t;
IN
l-
to
l€
t>
lc{
I (\l
|r.1 |
z -t o
Fig.101BlockDiagramof Radar,Type JMA-9933€A,JMA-9923-
a
<q F
Z@
dI= o r.)
>i
tr.1 ^N
;i=
F)<
ov
= ci
EO6?9
I
()
F
f
()
E I
o Ee
J
o =q,
E
9i
F
z ii- o
FZ
9
o
() z ei
13
+t
-o
;{
oct
oo
C{F
eB
t 6
:r3R
Yr?;i
f
5 e+
o "8
+ > e i
a.r 3
6rt +i
69
(o-
c{ iii
o
R=
?B
6 EB
<)
N
F
o
E +_>
>c{
L!- +- Tl
+
F
z
!!io
<ta
v) u)
l-
z
uJ
e
4
o -
a ro-
I
UJ
E
oP
I
o +;-
-o
a.,
UJ b>
?E
Fig.102BlockDiagramof Radar,TypeJMA€932-SA,J
t'\
t!
Y
z
E
uJ
z
z
I |-CROES COTTPLEXCABI!
?: z
E
E la
*;
I
-iea
H*lFd
<\,1
I
a
z
z
-J
o
4e^ *fre
E
-=y EF
5
Fig.l03 Terminal Board Connection Diagramof Radar,Type JMA-9933-SA (self standingtype AC 220/230V 3O)
IJJ
<)
HS
&rB
uJt(?)
t'a
6z
z
t
F
2
d
6
.E
5 I >>
E E*2 = il=
a xE
z t;
IJ
effie
'l=l'l?l*
Fig.104TerminafBoard Connection Diagramof Radar,Typo JMA-9933-SA (self standing type AC22O/23OVAC100/110V 1 d)
E
tlJ
HS
t(D
TTFO
P=P
fA z
z
E
F
i a-coREscoMPrEx claE
j H-2i95rr@$ (JRCSUpFI-Y)
.<
I
si Fe
2a
H =E I
. ;1 I
5
Fig.l05 Terminal Board ConnectionDiagramof Radar,Type JMA-9933-SA (desk top type AC 22O/230V3A)
o)
t\
o
I
uJ
:z
z
t?
uJ
z
z
x-2695iroa66oRC SrlPFtt
5
a
5
p
*Em
PE]:II
t-
(D
N
I
o
z
=
z
J
n
a
F
x,Fe
6=i
Fig.106TerminalBoardConnectionDiagramof Radar,Type JMA-9933-SA(desktop type AC220/230VAA100/110V1d
<9
al'
sl
st
o
i3 z
z
J
.I
a
.a
E En
?
Fig.107Tcrminaf Board Connection Diagramof Radar,Type JMA-9932-SA (self standingtype AC 220/230V 3A)
t
HE ;
6
I * FF
I 99
:
,'E
3 E:
: = F '
E =9
3
Fig.108Terminal Board Connection Diagramof Radar,Type JMA-9932-SA (self standingtype AC220/23OVAC100/11OV 16)
=p
Jf
i=
z
&
92
:6
iF
s!
' :'
qF .r,
a?-3
E EE
3
5
Fig.l09TerminalBoardConnectionDiagramof Radar,Type JMA-9932-SA(desktop Wpe AC 220l230V3d)
F-
2"
J )
a=
ilE
' f i6
q I E>
g! HE
99
le ?
9
?
t *
E
a
I
I!
I
Fig,1'f0 TerminalBoard Connection Diagramof Radar,Type JMA-9932-SA (desk top type AC22O/230VAC100/110V 1d)
=<
>+
z
I
rJt
:<
z
z
z
U'
t
F
E !!
3
5 F
E
u
T
EffiI B
Ftit>t:t
F
ttt-l
(D
N
T
z
t
z
J
L (L
o
a o
s
c,Fe
bB
o =t
I
Fig.l11TerminalBoardConnectionDiagramof Radar,Type JMA-9923-7/9XA(self standingtype AC 2Z0V/230V 3A)
|-
4r
rr. -
z
t*
tl 5
3: 6 3
g
I
3
FFEI
-S Fl'l'l
Fff1 s
P
'I'
E
{H8
i. 6la
: tt
Fig.112 Terminal Board Connection Diagramof Radar,Type JMA-9923-7/9XA (self standingtype AC220V/230V 1 0 AC100V,/110V 1 d )
tr
4+
=5
rr1
z
C',
o
uJ
:<
z
ul
z
z
o
o
:
&
35
*;
tl
PLEEI
F,
z. (9
-r
an
>s
5*
>E
;P
8."
.ti
Fig.l'f3 Terminal Board Conncction Diagramof Radar,Type JMA-9923-7,/9XA (desk top type AC 220V/230V 30)
b
4<-
>{
4-
z
d
^ I E.
5 ! Y;
!, : sr
9:
; ia
Effi
."' E' 6t
q Er
':
-a
i:
I
Fig.l14TerminalBoardConnectionDiagramof Radar,Type JMA-9923-7/9XA(desktop type AC220V/230V1d AA1OOV/110V1d)
=4
J -
E2
f;a
t>
t?
.:\\
JAH
199
l-I-Fl c E
EElFfr
N
rl
I
o
z
F
3
J
(L
U'
il
o' E' {6X
E 9:
_ i*
:
Fig.l15 Terminal Board ConnectionDiagramof Radar,Type .JMA-9922-6/9XA (self standingrype AQ 220Y/230Y 30)
h
4o
>{
s.a
z
F
rr, NI
I
-- 5E
=TE
< riJC
o:al
att 2.,
= >i
d FE
FFTN
'sl rrl-1 i
'l'l.l P
TI
FI
aa
3 3: a.:i
: 6H
3
Fig.l16 TerminalBoard ConnectionDiasramof Radar,Type JMA-9922-6,/9XA (self standins type AC22OV/230V 1 6 ACl00V/110V 1 6)
r
Z+
=5
4-
z
qa
E8
Ei Ee
Eg
E' *a
j t;
ES
3:
s l- l- l'l
F
(\l
€
I
z
F
z
d
)
e
E/
EI
*fi-o
"a E;
9 aiY
' :9
a
Fig.l17 Terminal Board Connection Diagramof Radar,Type JMA-9922-6/9XA (desk top type AG2?AV/23AY 3Q)
'ffi
E+
J =
E= tt[
t
t6
"O ti i!d.;
Fict 3g t ;ts
IE
I; >)
i ,? RE
t(
a
,' $' *fre
E Ee iJit
E.
!
Fig.118 Terminal Board Connection Diagramof Radar,Type JMA-9922-6/9XA (desk top type AC220V/230V 1d AC100V/110V 1 d)
Et
I
I
I Pi
;l-^ |
;:= i
I
I 0e= |
i =BA
izY
I:
i fil
FI
I Zl
I
-----;T-, eotrf :I
(\ll
Ei
tL'
oGl
oo
n9+
uJ
F=
>o
E(U
)J
(L trl
6Z0t-co0
a Jn3Ur0
Y l(/,
ta n9+ NtssScoud'lvNcts
uvovu
oZ
R- E
1Ov_1O, 22OV
JMA-9933-SA:1 _30
Fig.119PrimaryPowerSupplyBlockDiagramof Radar,
Type JMA-9933€A
Ri
tl
i ;:<
;i('l!l
i
I
I
I
=dA i
I
d I trl
ul I ,i
z I
Dstr:l
z -----:
>A
NI
o
b.
o(\l
q}
ot
o
a
o
a
o
J
(\ =
Llr
|-
A9+
C\
(0 UJ
(0 (,
o !z {
dl !o ct)
>o
F trru
z 6Z0r-coc
l 1!* !ncutc
F E ",,
la Nrss330ud
lvN0tsuvovu
z uJ o1 n9+
= 3 .F tr
o
5
(L
F
.D
o tr
1ll
6 I
F
GI
10V_16 , 22OV_36
JMA-9932-SA:1 o
Fig.120PrimaryPowerSupplyBlock Diagramof Radar,
Type JMA-9932-SA
oo
o<{
$
ct
o
o
E
dI
J
z
ut
F
n9+
c{
IL
FZ CD
i . u 6[tJ
"r 6Z0r€oc
04 d Jncutc
l-a a n9+ lvN0tsuvow
NrssScoud
9z t
l(- E
l!
F
o
c0
E
IJJ
r
F
00Vi110V_10, 220V1230V1A.22OVI23OV_30
JMA-9923-7XA:1
JMA-9923-9XA:220VI 230V_3 A
Fig.121PrimaryPowerSupplyBlockDiagramof Radar,
Type JMA-9923-7XA/gXA
-+------l
ii I
t
tu i
| "rZ I
i EFg
r FUJh
i
I
; =oh I
i6zY !
lEl
rul I
i ----;a-
Z l$tr:l
NI
l:
ea
ER
oo
o
o
t
dl
J
=
uJ
F
n9+
(\I
+
o-
(L
FZ
<UlO o
-! [! 6Z0r-coc o
aq ,-
l;l U)
IncutS
n9+ Ntss3coudTVNers uvcvu
9.2 IJ
in- :
dl
d)
tr
tl,
-r
JMA-9922-6XA100Vi110V_1 0 , 220V1230V
_1 6, 22OV
t23OV
_3 6
JMA-9922-9XA:220VI23OV 3 0
Fig.122PtimaryPowerSupplyBlockDiagramof Radar,
Type JMA-9922-6X,4/9XA
s101
5 Btot
TBIO2
1V
AC100,/110 0,
T0 T85002
0N u0/v0
Rlol
RED lOK2W
cBP-129
TB I O3
8102
c101 c102
l0O0ll. 22OOp
l6v 50v
sH l ELD
TBIO4
PT I
PTE
LVR
PMS
PERFORMANCE
MON ITOR UN IT
TXI
TXE
CABLE
or',rLY coLoR: 250-HV-12,/O, l8
coLoR (T) :250-HV-5O,/O- r 8
cQc-764
Fig.l23 InternalConnectionDiagramof Scanner Unit, Type NKE- 1079
Blol D R IVE
MOTOR
Tst02
4C100,/1
10V,1 d
T0 T85002
0N u0^0
Rt01
R 10K 2W
cBP-129
TBlO3
Bl02
ctol ct0 2
| 00Orr 220 Op
' r6 v
50v
SH IELD
DE ICING
HEATER (20 0w)
AC100V
t
ccK-7 5 I
TBlO4
PT I
PTE
LVR
PMS
PERFORMANCE
E MON ITOR UN !T
TXI
TXE
CABLE
oNLY COLOR: 250-HV-12,/O- 1I
coLoR (T) :250-HV-5O,/O. 18
cQc-764
Fig.124 Internal ConnectionDiagramof Scanner Unit, Type NKE-1079-D
l
Er$
iEft
E
z
I
2
o
:; il
--1 J2t(E
< -= 350209-2
a II i
*! l e lIL-JZ\I- = * -T r'"" 5*
! J
f,! zrc
<-___.t @il )l ; = _1
lMH E { 7 rza
r_____1\,,/| _
S
*, KA rE 9d z,o
llL1^T-i
l\? | J2102 I
. lL-12P C
|; = I
ll o
= HE=*-*a aeFe
4.'14r. r:+u I ci -.\j
!-N
;iF B r2A
h' d
I
I
2rA I
SFS
--rJ
I
o- I I
a J , l r-a I
= ,9 I
E 214
F *
Jr003 Jr004 z
88P-SHF E|}P-SHF a z
--- r9 I
t-
tr 83=u=:i-i:!t ese eBa; !:gEE.e:r
++ar-,r!>>
8E I
I
I
z
z
2
I
I
i:- ii**i=H=:=r-g5:l::n"
E3=urHis:338
J1111 r g 3.FAN-ERR2
[--c-l2P
4.GrI) c] g 3 FAN-ERRI
-{zt
2.TX0 = J
1.FJ(D
LNC
8-STABYJEO
7.+15V
I I.TRG2
d a 6+5v
toE 10.E = ;{ E.cNr
I +15V s+ 15V -f4E
8.TNI 8.T{l 3 T|ST0Fl
7.-l5V 7 - 15v o g 2.HVGATEl
$ S arrur 6.TNL= o I.HTERI
= j 5 rGrE s.rore-J
4.TGT 5E
3.GSE
2,GS 2.GS
I.MOM t.MoNt
i"r, ! " p r
J 2PW2
8-+5v
7 VDIN T.VDlttl 8.NC
ri 6.VDINE 6.\DDIE 7.TXE
e
tr - - s.MicPS '.|'licPsa I 6.TYJ
F frruc +rr'rc 9 ,i e$tE
tr
z
--5:
r esr 3AS1
=' i:
3,LVR
E 2 BS2 J13 Jr
LB53 LBS! lL 6P IL-G-6P
^H<-R .g"F^,s1 1.PTJ
t(J
E ii# e€€ €;
-.\i.t;4j
a
ui
FF-AEqin
-dor66
!.- H
-
4
-
Fig.125InternalConnectionDiagramof ScannerUnit,Type NKE-1075A(100/110VAC,1-phase)
E*fl ii __
Erg; l l
Nr'
iiref *-
il6e I r-
r:----:=====
E
6
2
:=
I
z |2
z
o o xx
--'l g J2l ql
< l- 350259-2
= | | f
uill<
? I. .r lol = ft
J
- i tu" t*
t/\l_ = !. ' E! z rvc
+-r @t( )tI 5 LMH
r--1\,./ | *
!R i 1u
E P* r5 qd
",^
J2102
larl E r n--12P 3
ttl
tto
tt
_Jr_=
o HE-*-*e EgFg
o!.XXr:F +.14 '.a-d +ES J ' , r- a
6r<- 'H 2rA
PI
rEe
=o5
d I ' ,- ^'
s, 9 o
E 2- IA
g
Jrooil J1004 z
E6 B8P-SHF BgP-SHF d z
ts9 F
t-
tr
330*.tF,?3tH !i:-i=l= i*3tEs-** z
z
2
I
I
I
I
I
Fi- ii=*3iEIi*P-g*ill:1"
E3===ri*:E3i I
I
I
J1111 J1t18 <. * 3.FAN_ERR2
IL-G-12P B3P-S[IF I
=o2E
i
6 €t 3 FAI|-ERRI
=<?2E
9.t|c
S.STABY-REA
7.+t5v
N o- 6 +5V
| 0.E = ,'! s.CNf
9+l5V - r - ! 4E
8.TNI 3TISTOPI
7 .-t5V 2 HVGATEI
ffBenr I HTERI
EE
J 2 .GS
! ,! tPwg
6 t.u ottl - J z.wz
t
P
8.+5V
7.\,DlN 8.NO
i e.vorl 6.VDINE 7.TXE
S,MicPS q g 6.TXl
= +.rro ! 5 - I +pus
z 3B s 1 1 !
TBIOI
2as2 J13 J1 J2 3,LVR
5/l l-G
MSTBA2
I BS3 lL-6P IL-C-6P IL-G-4P 2.PfE
-H<!oi .9^P-,s ^xis -&&.'^H l .PT I
€ee€;u
-.i-+ri
FraEi6ii > t=i
:d.t+ EfrEEiiF==E=
tr
z
=
I
F I
I o
Figr.126Intemal ConneotionDiagramof Scanner Unit, Type NKE-10754 (220,/230VAO,3-phase)
t-
=E.=
I
t_ EE$
t6,
rlr t(
I
I
I
I
z
5
e
dd
-ll- - J2rql
*
a | | *
s 350?09-2
E
*E l etl t _ l = B - 'i' :.urv i*
l_ = 5
=
=F 2.Nc
_-, qe
<------1 @)l( )l 9 9+ E |.MH a 12a
<* ;3
' ' *r---1\-,/l* X
'^T-;
3!i zra
lel I
- J21@
. rL-r2P A
JL
llo
9 FE---*a 4zEg
ul>x 4tsF+14r.cj+n
qE!!
d?,1 q' ua ' '" ^^
-l.
ad6 2rA
46F 5 o
o A rea
-
H 2.rA tg
()
L
J1003 J1004
z
E9 B8P-SHF BgP-SHF e z
E"
E EEuu*ii*!;El !ig-i=it :*3tEe=i* 2
z
z
Jt1fi Jl1l8 c $
3 FAN-ERR2
IL G']2P B3P.SHF
4.GNO - O. 3 FAN ERRI
I 3 +5v 5 g
I 2TXD 5 4
I
I I RXD
I 9.NC
I S,STABY.REO
7.+l5V
I I I TRGz
I N a- 6+5V
t0 .E r 0.E = ;i s.orr
I
9_+t5V 9.+l5V
i 8.TNI 8.TNI 3.IISTOP1
I ? -1 5 V 7.- l5Vo I 2IIVCATEI
I I * e.rm orri i $ I ltlERl
I
E j s.tct SrGTE ' l
I.TGT 4JGT 5E
I 3 GSE
I 2.GS 9 ,-[ r pvi,r
I r.Mot{ i J z.wtz
I
ii 8JsV
?.VOIN 8NC
ll 7,TXE
6 VDINE
rl 6TXI
t: sMicPS6 q
ri eFo'
t, 3 Bst - J
tl ," T BIO1
2.852 Jt3 Jr 3.1\,R
I "t IP MstEAz5rr t-c
LBS3 IL-6P |L-G-6P IL-G 2 PTE
*H<oi
€e€€;u
-6i.i-d
>E.*^,Fl
F-EEECC
:Hg*tEeEi;FtH:i I PT]
,
L
o
Fig127 lnternal ConnectionDiagramof SoannerUnit, Tvpe NKE-1075A (220/230V AC,1-phase)
OR IVE
sror I o TOR
ACl00./110Vr B l 0 i a\^l- i [\
;*'ll
16 UI
I
M
AC20A/220V BLK (T)
16 V1
T0 T85002 GRN (T)
wl \)
0N u0lv0 BLU (T) .x cBP-l22/
MU 1
Ell tl
r)l
I 123
_t
(l,f
il+|
tSLl\ I
MVI
MW1
l
BLK
-lil+ _ -J
XDRIVE IIOTOR
NKE-1059-71/91 (100/'t10V,1d, 60rf)CBP-122
2(2O0
lfKtsr059-72/9 / 220V,16, 60uCtsP-l23
cfo c102
I OO 2zOOp
l6v
Ts0v
LD m
TBI O5 NECKHEATER
REp(T)rlllo I HtW
HRIOI I
TBIO4
DE ICING
HEATER r U
(100w)
AC100V t
PT I V
PTE
LVR
PMS C C K - 7 5 O H E A T E CONTROL
R
F
TX I
PERFORMANCE
TXE MON ITOR UN IT
CABLE
oNLY COLOR : 250v-HV-l 2.,/0. I I
coLoR (T) :250v-HV-50,/O. l8
cQc-788
Fig.128InternalConnectionDiagramof ScannerUnit,Type NKE-1089-7/9(1-phase)

TBIO2
4C200/220V
36
TO
0N u0/v0lw0
cBP- 132
TBI O3
Bto2
cr0l ct02
| 000 22OOp
l6v 5 0v
H IELD
TBlO5 NECK HEATER

TH 1O 1
TS o4
DE ICING
HEATER
r U
RED
rYv,-
HRIOI
(100w)
PT I AC100V t V
PTE
LVR
CCK-7 5O HEATER
CONTROL
PMS
TXI
PERFORMANCE
TXE MON ITOR UN IT
CABLE
oNLY COLOR:250V-Hv-12/O. 18
coLoR (T) :25O V-HV-5O/O. l8
cQc-788
Fig.l29 Internal ConnectionDiagramof Scanner Unit, Type NKE-1089-7/9 (3-phase)

d i\i
s--
z,i
Hl
)
6
x.
l=
=
z
=
z
22 -.\j I
J2103
350209'2 E
*=
ft -l rur 5R 2 t2a
= zNc 'ra
=F 8A zrr
_E 1MH
J211)2 j
F ll-12p z **n i
;i9 p' i8i ' a
E3=r=Hi-=3fi sEi
- v
HT
_
2rA
-o 3 1 2e.ra
4
fi
Jlm3 Jro04
B8P-SHF BgP-SHF o
iig-3=ir!*3trp-**
EE=u=ii-is?:
E= - -.= p- *"P a4 E * z.ca
EF::;;is:3?3!pg i1**:==2 i*f **i - Y r .+r 2V
J 1104 n * 3.FAN-ERR,
B6FSHF
o g 3 FAN-ERRI
9NC
S,STABY.REQ
l r l 5V
r0E - + 6*w I
9.+t5V
-faE
8.TNI
7.-t 5V
3.TISTOPI
2.HVGATEI z
z
I E9orr' I,HTERI
T =- -Is,TGTE z
3 a.rcr
t 3.CSE
z
3 a.cs 2
6 t.f'toNt ?,i l"w:
I riv
7.VOIN 7.VDIN 8.NC
6 VDiNE 6.VDINE 7 TXE
g - ^ 5.Mi6pS 5 MicPS6' * 6,TXI
z EiarNc n.nc f 6
F
z 5 = l.Bsr 3.ASt - !
2.852 2.8s2 J13 Jl J2
1.853 1.AS(t IL-6P tL-G-op IL-G-4P 2.PIE
i*iH
d<€ ,. a
o iR_ ,!^*-.* .,s&&
rsio{6d
FF&sdh
-de+o€
995:
-(id+
E
z
I
L
Fig.130 lnternal Connection Diagramof ScannerUnit, Type NKE-1087-6/9 (1-phase)
*s
=*
il
2
z
z
z
I
I
I :; ;t 5
z2
I J2103
-l 350209-2
==
Tr E
=l * -l run q3 t tzA
Zl : 9i zuc 'r
_,8 rMH i;
H 2.14
aJ
z,
fl
El t*
9l J2102 d*
qi =
, IL-IzP A ==6 -6 r.2A
qc -61 5iF ^..
F ','^
> >..;,.
Ri ii---sI 2Z->
r,z4rlFF:+.ur.o-.i sH8
=l =-(.,
I -X i
c3l4
I I3Itl
I
I JtmS J1004
B8P-SHF BgP-SHF 4
> > t!. *.. P
f a+
i oJ ii-?iEi
..i.i+ 6 dtFo
s9*rFo-tH
-.,ici r {i €F o o
I
I
I
L
t-
tr E3=u=s!-l::a
Eo ' ...... = - ' n& z c r
+ *i a>9> **H
=Cii ji**iEi3
E3=:=Hiu?E33 ==l*33i:'''-
J1111 J1118 - O. 3 FANERR2
IL-Cr12P S3P SHF
O g 3 FANJRR]
9.NC
S.STABY-REO
7.+l 5V
Ngr6+5v
l 0 .E
I +l 5 v
= .t s.ct{T
-f4_E
,5
o
8.TNI 3.TISTOP]
? .-r5 v 2
2.HVCA'rEl z
Y E*ot"' 1.HTERl F
z
< 4 TGT
E 3.GSE z
p z.cs z
= $ 3.Pw3
3 I MON| - I z.wtz
:
t 8.+5V
8.NO
s TVOIN 7Vt N
6.VDINE 7.TXE
6.TXl
5.MicPS o a
z orrc ! 6
2
E 3Bsr - J
.$s.e +E
z
2.832 J13 Jl J2 3 LVR
d.z 2,PTE
1.853 lL-6P [- Cr6P lL-G-aP
z z
s.*6s+- pE*HuHeHgg
-ai.tr€4t -N4+6@
I.PTI
F
I
o
Fig.131InternalConnectionOiagramof ScannerUnit,Tvpe NKE-1087-6/9(3-phase)
2
z
z
Nr, E
z
tr
J
EJ
P
{ii
e
;=
g6
=o
:o
z2
F
ZZ -.n z
J2r03 z
Cltt i
35{}2(xF2
E|g
g .. l o l, ; ,S -i
g;,""
rrn
ii
-J I l/'\l- = 6g
=-eMe q E*
J2t02
-E IMH EF
I*
? rzr
"o
lel 5
rL-tzp
tt I E F B
-'
.JI-E
-'l
tl
t-
v
z
frE::=Hi=f3fE *rr-'
;=+
-"EA
i
e' H* '2*. 1 a
="6
-
*9l?A
i E rtr
=
J 1@ 3 J t004
E9 88FSHF 8gP-SHF r
oL
t-
E
?i*,FtEr !E?HFo-48
I gF
! zz
FI- !i**i=ig :*E-**qis$ggi*
E3=u=Hlu3E?i
4.GND
r *ov P $
i zTXD5 J
I RXD
E
z
I I.TRG2
9.NC
z t0 .E 10.E
S.STABY.REO
9 .+l 5 V 9+15V
7.+r 5V
8 TNI 8-TNI N o' 6 +5v
7 .-t5 V l.-tw c I
= i(scrur
z _ j 4E
z
S I ontu 6.TNL= d
3.IISTOPI
3 J 5,TGTE s.rcre'f
2 HVG,qTEI
4,TGT 4.TGT
1 I{TERI
3.GSE 3.GSE rfi
2GS
1,MONI
2,GS
I.MONI
P
o- {. ' 24V
E=e
= rr 3 PW3
- J z Ptt2
I +5V
7,VDIN 7 VDIN t.Pv{]
d
z 6,VDINE 6 VDINE
8.NC
F
- - 6-MiEPS 5 MicPSo g
z 7 TXF
Q i c.rr,ro l.r'.rc ! J 6 TXI
5 = 3.Bst 3BSr ':
TBlol q $ 5E
2.8S2 2 BS2 Jl J2 -
MSTB,25./11-G :4.PMS
LBS3 IL-G 6F IL G'4P
tts$cr::*t rHsHr;*tE::
ilr'
Fig.132 lnternal ConnectionDiagramof Transmitterreceiver Unit, Type NTG-30374
Nr,
F
2 F
-2
P.
1R d
->
rl :!
z
z
E6
z
:; iT
J21G} z
B 350209-2 z
i E
= ft - t a,,rt :*
= : 9 ! r.ro
3 _E LMH
9 3 2 12A
Er J2102
-H 3g z.rr
1 F rL-12P B
5 = E6 > >,.h.,
i3-r-9! 2Z;>
= |4+r1 xii+.!,1 d;6,i
;=F @
'E
c !2A
ana 2.lA
863 a
o *{ r.:a tr
- E z.ra
E a
Jt003 J10(X z
BSFSHF B9P_SHF r
56 , >..i., --- Eg a
2>;i
ci S? *<qa-xEr P: F + u ! _ d - . \ i ?*+.FlE+9E$EFu",EE
- c,i.i + si ai F qi j 6i cta d€F €6
?i.-FaE+!EE".gElits+sT,"
J ll J l t04
IL.G-I2P B6P- SH F 81 2c 2
: 91.+l2v
o [
4.GND "o"-"""'
s *sv 6 g - J l .+12v
r,
".-^ :
. A 3,FANERRI
I,RXD
=(|2E
':
! r .+l 2v
gNc
r rJRc2 L
S.STABY.REQ z
loE 10.E
I +16V
I +l5v 9jt5V
STNI 8-TNI N o.6+5V z
=;iscNr z
7 -t5 V 7. l5vo 9 .
-:
t 4E
I B o rtlr err.ti I
g i 3.TISTOPl
S.TcrEl J
",^,, 2.HVGA'E 1
4.TGT
I.HTERl
J 3.OSE 3 6SE
a
*
5
L
z.cs
t.Mo N l
?GS
1.M ONI 6 q 4.r2{V
6 E
- o J.rnr
- ! 2.PVt2
E 8.+5V
z t.Pl,Yl
i r.vorrl 7 VDIN
6 VOINE
5.MicPS- a b
2
3 ! TNc = ,r"
z 3
2.452 JI J2 I
z
= I as3 IL-G-{P
...
IL-G'4F
.. i ) .
i:s$HEs:==
Fig.l33 lraemal ConnectionDiagramof Transmitterreceiver Unit, Type NTG-3028
E 9F 9 I ^ :g: F
3 i 5Fi R ;E T : " F 3 2
5=r* ordotr z
;ESE-
z PP3! 3t
9o
-cr 9 =
dll A =
E
:tE ,{
jl5Fl = I --
X
EeE P3
c B ! E sB $ A
+
t i
F
E
ls
9= z Fl
!o Yi
PFE
1 =gs
:"'fr
+-i
a?=
oi9 3;g E
i
-;--T--;---;-.l 5 l
I e ll P
lf------- | |r------- T-rI
=
Co- a
E
ZF
-
l-
=
= =
TO ANT or TMR
Fig.134lnternalConnectionDiagramof DisplayUnit Type NCD-4263
g=s=6H
t
z
f
<crJ <6
8g tro
F- at)
,.,tr ae
^z
XO Io-
r\ F-
o
o
J sl
trl
(?
o
(',
* Y o
o) <{
(O rf)
6)
o o I
o I
(J
5
(/)
E, o
() I
NJ m
F :<
h
z
l
*#
49
Po
;o
>O
I
c)
=
-
ca
GI
Fig.135InternalConnectionDiagramof LCD Monitorof DisplayUnit,Type NCD-4263
(r?
cl!
\
x X
>a =
rt ro tl
z> z
o
z
m= v)
U>
trff s
(h
85
uJ
!)<
9p
0-o lr-
o-x
YZ lr)
tr $i. J<
=: Llt -l E6
p= z2 6r (,rl
=*.
EE @x <v
ol
6= o=
ez
<J
O:.
F
s
A
- <L <(,
1 t*o ^x.z
I
I I
I I
=< =a
XO
<5
xao s
J
tr
F
2
IJJ
=
o-
=
z
s
J
t
F.
ug
fr6
E
L
F
=
E
6
UJ
ut
UT
o
s
=
n2 g
Be [JTTEi6
H€
Is
F>e
==-
>?
EEHH
H>d5 e
Fig.136
BlockDiagram
of DisplayUnit,TypeNCD*4263
=#F#,/Sl TABLE
51 SETTING
S1 I 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
STEPTYPE ON
Ur4tr SYNCTYPE OFF
{E€ 36x ON ON
90x OFF ON
RATIO 1 8 0x ON OFF
GYRO
SIGNAL 360x OFF OFF
REV(fFE)
SET DIRECTION ON
NORM(JE OFF
SYNC ON
TYPE 1
trrl PULSE OFF
trE TYPE 2
1 AXIS ON
2 AXIS OFF
LOG x
100P,/30 ON ON
SIGNAL 200P/90x OFF ON
PULSE,/NM x ON OFF
SET 400P,/180
x
800P,/360 OFF OFF
S2
I 2 3 4
GYRO LOG N,/A
LOGALM SIMULATOR SIMULATOR
S2 5 6 I I
GYROALM N,iA N/A N,/A
ON=5S,OFF=0.5S
Fie.137List of NSK and LOG Select Switchesof

DisplayUnit, Type NCD-4263
Settingthe speedlogswitches
1. This radarusesthe six typesof standardspeedlog signalslistedbelow

Pulsetype:800pulse/NM,400 pulses/NM,
200 pulses/NM,
or 100pulses/NM
Synchrotype :360x/NM, 90XNM,or 30XNM
180)VNM,
Set GyrolLogselectionSwitch51 usingthe S1 settingtable.
2. Connectthe speedlog signallineto, for the pulsetype [PULSE]side,or for

the synchrotype, the [SYNCRO]side, of terminalblock T84801(Terminal
BoardCircuit).
3. S1:Gyro/Log
Selection
Switch diode CD116(1-axis)
4. Light-emitting and
Set the switch in accordancewith are providedto check
CD117(2-axis)
the 31 settingtable. pulse-type
log inputsignals.
This LED lights if the log signal tevel is
a
H-n-."ro.Ot-.O
+2V or more(orundera non-connected
statusof the log signalline ),or it dose
illrri nol lightif the logsignallevel+2Vor less.
pt
llr'f ]'0."*.'o*
SlOe SETTtIGTASLE
Fig.138SettingTable of Speed LOG SelectSwitchesof DisplayUnit, Type NCD4263

5I EE z z u, FJ z z uJ z 2
F F
o at) an
o o
E
F 6:Es
33:i
;i rH r:
o
; * E c€
o
v) qfEi
a
.,. /9
ln
a L!
(t o
.9
3
z t!
lL z z t!
IL z IL IL
I o
{t
E. LL IL l!
z. z l! l! tr- l! l! LL
o
Lr- tt
t! LL
|l. z z l!
IL l!
z l!
l! LL
!
o
IL <N
>I
(
>I
t.t a
(J
o ?
>o
+ ?i
>E <+
>6
?+
oB c) (o 9;: o6
'F
!q
uJ
'o: (!
jJo
i
H
g5 3
( t .o
6
:E
bo9 € E
tt 'esHa
EI
YZ
t = *.+
i
5(5= E
o=
9<^
8.9 i2^ E5 x..!
:F =6A i: :l er OQ ! P 5 ;NX
g*6 :(\to :-o
i6F
6 Z t- !1. U t , l i
;=(/)g i> lP
,o-ii t6= 6= ?,
;= 19
S J
d
o- n' <{ N
Y
> tq T :
-t trt
s S ER >ii * I
E
!{
;
.-i cv
.rr
:Z ui !l
F. H> I- > cd^
/i=o
-<t a
ii9 ;8>R
d
i
ii9
\v o 6
<9 ie
.;-:< ; j 8 6 { ^{X? i J - .^ XEc <
e -rH
6i sd ER++SFd3H ^863 o
>=E => i[?{ - = : u e :s-,<>
-_o -
( e
S>;B'RHd --\[^=
6l =:->5^
^'\EA . r ,R ,l:lzg i=g k=
1l- i.l
:F$<e h&.JT'-Lof iT
F=.5VE
NTTi9
i5i
.' :F I esF i
5*reE3F9 = > 6 9 9 * E z:3
st\i=l:
iro@&
txaSz he* E; = = 9 t r E f =6dtro
UJ( //)( J r x d c o F <)ICL ooa!!!zo-o- E- - < <52
r.=
mia i\fi3 ,lri? F+ >
/4
/i i=si;g Egs
tr E t < F
rgc N. \ d= eb nh oo-9b
I\<
/:
Fig.l39 Sotting Tablc of Gyro compass and Gyro solect switchcs ofDisplayunit" Typc NcD-4283
DISPLAYl DISPLAY2
NCD-4263 NCD-4263
T84201 T84201
ISWIN/OUT ISWIN/OUT
1
ii L
VDIN 1 I VDIN1
VDIN1E Y rl
--il z VDIN I E
BLU
TMGIN1 J -t- it TRIGIN1
i
TRIGINlE 4 J- ii yEL 1l- 4 TRIGIN1E
BPIN I 5
__lt I
-t_ BPIN I
B P I N1 E o -]- 6 B P IN1E
GRN
BZIN 1 7 -L 7 BZIN 1
BZIN 1E I J- I BZIN1E
BLU-BLU
MTRIN1+ I I MTRIN 1+
MTRIN1-
MTRIN 1E
10
1l 5
BLU-WHT
-r_ 10
11
MTRIN1_
MTRIN1E
ORG
PWRIN1+ 12 12 PWRIN1+
BLK
PWRINlE 13 13 PWRINIE
' t4 PNK 'I
PWROUT1 14 PWROUT
BRN
PWROUT1E 15 16 PWROUT1E
2
VDOUT1 16 VDOUT1
VDOUT1E 17 -Y RED
Y- 11 VDOUT1E
TRIGOUT1 18 _L 18 TRIGOUT 1
TRIGOUTI E 19 J_ 19 TRIGOUT1E
PUR
BPOUT1 20 _L z0 1
B P OU T
BPOUT1E 21 J- 21 BPOUTlE
'l WHT
BZOUT 22 22 BZOUT1
J iiL BZOUTlE
BZOUTlE
MTROUT1+
23
24 71--- ir YEL-YEL
l : "--?T
23
24 M T R O U T1 T
lr YEL-WHT I'
MTROUT'I_ z5 25 MTROUT1_
MTORUT
'1E 26 il rj 26 1E
MTORUT
H-2695111153
(JRc SUPPLY)
Fig.l40 TerminalBoardConnectionDiagramof Z-unit Interswitchesystem,Type NQE-3141-2

11153(JRCSUPPLY)
H-26951
ac (.,
l$
EA
Yl(J
oz
H - 2 6 9 5 1 1 1 1 5(3J R C S U P P L Y )
I
I
UJ
z
al et
<$
(LA
U'A
clc0
11153(JR CS U P P L Y)
H -26951
o-A
a6
az
H-269511l153 (JRC SUPPLY)
Fig.l41 TerminalBoardConneotionDiagramof 3-unit lnterswitchesSystem,Type NQE-3141-4
TElg17
TElg15
H-7ZCRDO97OA
; T8914 |
t-------l
3
: TE } 913 |
L____,--__l
H-7ZCRDO97OA
; T8912 |
1-------l
I
i 1E | 911 |
L_____--__l
FE3?E;
Ir
o
c|
(r
t\
c\
I
-
*3EPE;
a\
I
o
|.\
o
o
N
I
I
Fig.142lnternalConnectionDiagramof lnterswitch,Type NOE-3141-2
la'
>-<o-
FI ^{+R
F O-.\:
Itr g c-F
d2
l5
.9l F
+l
lc'
-{sR
trdAx
lcl
c6tr
a2
l5
Gt (!t
+l
6l : ^1$R
LP
tr*AF
oz.
î$R
trEA:
96=
oz
? E E r -3
TL
-? -o ."?.o-? -o -? -o -? e
o
N
E
z
t
Fig.143IntemalConnectionDiagramof Interswitch,Type NOE-3141-4
AGREEMENT
LICENSE
END.USER
SERISERADARSOFTWARE
FORJMA.ggOO
IMPORTANTfi.EAD CAREFULLYThisEnd-UserLicenseAgreement('EU|-A')is a legalagreementbetween
or singleentity)andJapanRadioCo.,Ld. ('JRC) fortheJRCRadarequipment
pu (eitheran individual that
indudesMicrosoftsoftrare products.
O you haveacquireda devicefDEMCE) thatindudessoftwarelicensedby JRCftom Microsoft.Licensing

produdsof MS origin,as wellas associatedmedia,
Inc.or ib affliates('MS ). Thoseinstalledsoftrlrlare
('SOFI'WARE) are pmtectedby intemational
printedmaterials,and "online"or electronicdocLrrnentiation
propertylawsandfeaties.TheSOFTWAREis licensed,notsold.All rightsreserved.
intellectual
O lf you do not agreelo this EULA,do not use the DE1/|CEor copy tlre SOFTWAREinstead,prompq
mhta6 lnC foiinstructionson retumof the unuseddevice(s)for a refund.Any use of the SOFTWARE
indudingbut notlimitedtDuseon the DEVICE,will constitute)/ouragreementto this EULA(or ratification
of anypreviousmnsent).
ThisEULAgrantsyouthefollowing
license.
O Grantof SOFTWARE license:
. onlyonthe DEVICE.
YoumayusetheSOFTWARE
. determinedhourto
TheSOFTWAREis notfauhtolerant.JRC has independently
NotFauftTolerant.
use the SOFTWAREin the DEVICE,and MS has relieduponJRC to conductsuftcienttestingto
determinethatSOFTWARE is suitablefor sudr use.
' 'ASIS"andwih allfaulb.The entire
No warnanties for theSOFTWARE the SOFIWAREis provided
riskas trcsatisfactoryquality,performance, andefiort(includinglackof negligence)is with
accurzrcy,
you.Alsothereis nowarantyagainstinterference withyourenjoymentolthe SOFTWARE or against
infringement. lf you havereceilredanywarranties the
regarding DEVICE or the SOFTWARE, those
wananties do notoriginate from,are not on,
binding MS.
. Noteon Java Support.The SOFTWAREmay containsupportfor progEmswrittenin Java.Java

technologyis rpt faulttolerantand is not designed,manufach.rred, or intendedfor use or resaleas
onlinecontrolequipment in hazardous environments fail-safe
requiring performance, suchas in the
operatlonof nudearfacilities,aircrafrnavigationor communication qrstems,air fraftc control,direct
fifesupportmachines, or weaponssystems,in whichthefailureof Javatecfinologymuld leaddiredly
tc death,personalinjuryor severephysicalor environmenbldamage.SunMicros/stgms,Inc,has
obligatedMSto makethb disdaimer.
contractually
. No Liabilityfor CeftainDamages.Exceptas prohibitedby law, MS shall have no liabilityfor any
or incidenlaldamagesarisingfromor in connectionwifl the use or
indirect,special,consequential
performance of the SOFTWARE. Thislimibtionshallapplyeven if any Emedyfuitsof ib essential
purpose.In no eventshallMS be liablefor any amountin excessof U.S.two hundredfiftydollars
(u.s.$2so.oo).
. on RevercsEngineering,
Limitations andDisassembly.
Recompilation, Youmaynotreverseengineer
recompile,or disassemblethe SOFTWARE,exceptard only to he extentthat sucft ac{ivityis
thislimitation.
expresslypermitledby applicablelawnotwithstanding
. SOFTWARE Youmaypermanendy
TransferAllorvedButWithRestrictions. hansferrighb underftis
EUIA onlyas partof permanentsaleor fansferof theDevice,and only if he recipientagreesto this
EUI-A.lf ine SOmrulRE is an upgrade,any must
transfer also include all priorversiors of the
SOFTWAER
. ExportResficlions.YouacknodedgethatSOFTWARE is of USorigin.Youagreeto complywithall
intemational
applicable and laws
national that applyto the SOFTWARE,includingU€ U.S. Export
Regulations,
Administration issued
as wellas end-user,end-useand countrydestinationrestrictions
by U.S. and other govemmenb.For additionalinficnrntionon exportingthe SOFTWARE,see
http://www.microsoft.com/exporting/.
I
7ZPNB0026
@ frytlaaAo&o".fH.
H+HBP'ffi€'iEWWFEE
H4 fi4ffi* *ir
or elements
Declarationon toxic & hazardoussubstances
of Electronic Information Products
JapanRadio Company Limited
HE€#WJffi*rtRffJf,ffiEEE
(Names& Cootentoftoxic and hazardoussubstancesor elements)
#fr,€ Greet:IMA-9933-SA/9932-SA
JlrL\-9923-1XN9X
IMA-9922-6XNgXA -E ffiName):Marine RadarEquipment
€&EEvtuft*,ft*
(Toxic and Hazardous Substancesand Elements)
*lr1+€f,I
(Part oame)
?t] ?B xat& 4&Vk# *tR.#w
(PBDE)
(Pb) (Hc) (cd) (ctu') (PBB)
+*+ x x X x x x
(Scanner Uniq
trEg4tfl X X x x x x
(Trdnsmitler-receiver Unit)
+fift8*E
(InboardUdt)
.,afr*E
(DisplayUnit)
x x X x x x
.@#*€
(Keyboard Unit)
'€€Ai4#E
(ProccssingUniq
ll'+"{iAE€eripherals)
.EF(options) x x
x x x x
'€4*1cattesl
. *ff}(Documennts)
ffie\affiff ffiHreffi.ftt++ ff1aafr#.sJ,/Tl

o :#3 v^H&€ E MJ t5]es.EfiffiE** xT.
1306-2006
(trrdiaalssthatthis toxic, or haeard,ous
substanc€ mat€rialsfor this part is belowtherequirementin
containedin all of thehomogeneous
sJ,/I11363-2006.)
tilEflE6![Re+'t"
x:&i,&H#EEwffi4,b4rrrfrl+tu1#i-frIfrttf++freEEHsr,"rl1363-2006
(Irxlicates that this roxic of hazardous substanc€contained in at least one ofthe homogeneous materials uscd for this paxt is above
the limit requiretnentin S/T I1363'2006.)
JRC CodeNo. : 7ZPRD0606
: f #AR*fr E €+{F,H.PF,'rt*ftftiltrW'll*
RE
ManasementMethodson Control ofPollution from ElecFonicslnformation Productsofthe People'sRepublicofChina
- rlt-
uedef
ulpaluud oJn l'9 uo!].!P:l gooz'c3c@
90900udzz'oNfcoc
uloo'€qraureclf@gc|rues :ueu-e
OSOZ-?99-9OZ- l.+ : allu{soej
WW-|jj-WZ- l+'. auoqdop-L
Lpuerg flllvjs
lusr.uPcJl@|oc!rues :[|€r-u-g
99/O-899-OZ-Lt* :ellu{scej
osr-o-8se-oZ- |.8* :
1,igzlTri^,
dl'oo'crf@csurl :tlEur-e
OZVI-6LLt-g- L8+ : allLurs"rej
SO€ t-Z6tg-g- 1.8+ : euoL{oepl
luguruPdec ac!rues eulJeu\
d['sJ'cr['MM^^ / t.d+Ig lun
9J6J azuls solsoqsP aql 6sn loN
'Ffrr"rydowurtd?e "'1i+E 6 -etz1 HSIF| { xvy I
@ :pelu@ uoqeuuolu!rewry Jo!

Mariner Radar Equipment Instruction Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mariner Radar Equipment Instruction Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

JMA'993&SA/9932-SA

As far as the victimof electricshockis not in dangerouscondition,do not movehimand practice

as resultof the accident,but rescuermay also get an

(2) Turnoff the powersourcecalmlyand movethe victimawayquietlyfromthe electricline.

(3) Calla physician

(4) Laythe victimon his backand loosenhis necktie,clothes,belt,etc.

(6) Openthe victim'smouthandtakeout artificialteeth,cigaretteor chewinggum if any.Keep

(2) Cover his mouth as widely as

(3) Blow into hi.

Fig.2 Cardiac massage

Thankyouverymuchfor purchasing JMA-9900ARPAseries.

O Beforeoperatingthe equipment,be sure to read this instructionmanual

This indicationis shownwhere any personis possibilityto be in

Sincethe scannerradiatorrotates,do not approachit.

Installthe scannerat any placehigherthananyperson.

o When approaching the scannerfor maintenan@ or inspection,

Use ARPAonly as assistingdevicesfor navigation.

o In the case that either mark shown in followingfigure is on the

ScannerUnit Type NKE-I079(12 Feet)

Unit Type NTG-3037A

ScannerUnit Type NKE-1089-9(9 Feet)

Transmitter-receiverUnit Type NTG-3028

ScannerUnit Type NKE-I087-9(9 Feet)

Control Unit Type NDC-1279T(DesktopType)(Option)

KeyboardUnit Type NCE-7721T (DesktopType)(Optlon)

2. NAMEAND FUNCTION PANEL

8.2TROUBLESHOOTTNG ......... ..8-17

Fig.101 Bbck Diagramof Radar,TypeJMA-9933€AandJMA-99217XAPXA

1.1 FUNCTTON .......................

I I ] First Stage : Target Detection from Radar Information

I II ] Second Stage : Target Tracking

[IIIJ Third Stage : Judgment of Existence of Ship in Danger of Collision

The system employs the latest adaptive clutter suppressiontechnologyto eliminate

Key Arrangement for Higher Operability

Advanced Technology Based ARPA Functions Provided as Standard

lmproved Day/Night Mode

Two types of backgroundcolorsare avaihblein each Day/Nightmode (total4 background

Low Power Consumption

Self-diagnostic Program Incorporated

programalwaysmonitorsall the functionsof the system.lf any function

The radar performance(transmittedoutput power and receivingsensitivity)can appear on

Easy InterSwitch Operation (Option)

By additionallyinstallingan InterSwitchPC board, up to 3-unitsof the JMA-9900series

Radar and Ship'sMains

2 . The scannerunit can be equippedwith a deicing heateras an option markedwith (-),

4. The name platesfor the radarcomponentsindicateas foflows:

Fi9.1.2EXTRIORDRAWINGOF SCANNERUNII TYPE NKE-i075A

Fig.1.3EXTRIORDRAWINGOF SCANNERUNIl TYPE NKE-l089-7

Fig.1.4EXTRIORDRAWINGOF SGANNERUNIT,TYPE NKE-l089-9

Fig.1.5EXTRIORDRAWINGOF SCANNERUNIT,TYPE NKE-l087-6

Fig.1.6EXTRIORDRAWINGOF SCANNERUNII TYPE NKE-l087-9

Fig.1.9EXTRIORDRAWINGOF DISPLAYUNIT,TYPE NCD4263

Fi9.1.10EXTRIORDRAWINGOF MONITORUNIT,TYPE NwZ-l587

Fi9.1.11EXTRIORDRAWINGOF CONTROLUNII TYPE NDC-12797

Fi9.1.12EXTRIORDRAWINGOF KEYBOARDUNIT,TYPE NCE-77217

Fig.l.10 EXTRIORDRAWINGOF MONITORUNIT

Fig.I.'14GENERALSYSTEMDIAGRAMOF RADAR,TYPE JMA.9932€A

Fis.l.l5 GENERALSYSTEMDIAGRAMOF RADAR,TYPE JMA-9923'7XA

Fig.1.16GENERALSYSTEMDIAGRAMOF RADAR,TYPE JMA-9923'9XA

Fi9.1.17GENERALSYSTEMDIAGRAMOF RADAR,TYPE JMA-9922'6XA

Fig.l.18 GENERALSYSTEMDIAGRAMOF RADAR,TYPEJMA-9922'9XA

Note:Eliminatingthe interferenceon frequenciesused for marinecommunications and navigation

Fi9.1.13GENERALSYSTEMDIAGRAMOF RADAR' TYPE JMA-9933€A